Canon EOS 7D Mark II (G) Digital SLR Camera Basic Instruction Manual

EOS 7D Mark II (G)

COP

Y

Basic Instruction Manual

This basic manual covers only the most basic operations.

For other features and more details, see the

Camera Instruction Manual PDF file in the CD-ROM.

E

2

Introduction

The EOS 7D Mark II (G) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 20.2 effective megapixels, Dual

DIGIC 6, approx. 100% viewfinder coverage, high-precision and highspeed 65-point AF (Cross-type AF point: Max. 65 points), approx. 10.0 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full

HD) movie shooting, Dual Pixel CMOS AF, and GPS function.

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Warnings” (p.174-176) and “Handling Precautions” (p.14-15).

Refer to This Manual While Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.

Y

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the COP

Copyrights

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images of people and certain subjects for anything but private enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

Item Check List

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

Camera

(with body cap)

Eyecup Eg Battery Pack

LP-E6N

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E6/LC-E6E*

Wide Strap Interface Cable

Y

Cable protector

* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.)

IFC-150U II

COP

The Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next page.

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

Depending on the Lens Kit type, a lens instruction manual may also be included.

Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

Connecting to Peripheral Devices

When connecting the camera to a computer or printer, use the provided interface cable or one from Canon. When connecting an interface cable, also use the provided cable protector (p.27).

In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory cards used to record images or movies.

* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/ movies. Please purchase it separately.

3

4

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs

The instruction manual consists of a booklet, leaflets, and electronic manuals (PDF files on the CD-ROM). The booklet is the Basic

Instruction Manual. For more detailed instructions, see the Camera

Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM disc.

GPS Cautions

Quick Reference Guide

Camera Basic

Instruction Manual

(this booklet)

Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

Contains the following manuals in PDF format:

• Camera Instruction Manual (Detailed version)

• Quick Reference Guide

Y

Instructions for viewing the Camera Instruction Manual

CD-ROM are on pages 164-165.

COP

Contains various software. For more information and installation procedures of the software, see pages 168-

170.

Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM

Contains software manuals in PDF format. Instructions for viewing the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM are on page 171.

Compatible Cards

The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, it is recommended that you format the card with this camera (p.58).

CF (CompactFlash) cards

* Type I, UDMA mode 7-compatible.

SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards supported.

Cards that Can Record Movies

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/ writing speed as shown in the table.

IPB (Standard)

L : 8 7

Other than above

CF Card: Recording Formats

Movie Recording Size (p.145)

ALL-I (For editing)

MOV Y MP4

30 MB/sec. or faster

10 MB/sec. or faster

10 MB/sec. or faster IPB (Light)

Movie Recording Size

COP -

SD Card: Recording Formats

ALL-I (For editing)

MOV MP4

20 MB/sec. or faster

L : 8 7

Other than above

IPB (Standard)

20 MB/sec. or faster

6 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Light) 4 MB/sec. or faster

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.

If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need an even faster card.

To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.

5

6

Quick Start Guide

1

Insert the battery

(p.32)

.

To charge the battery, see page 30.

5

2

4

Insert the card

(p.33)

.

The camera-front side slot is for a CF card, and the camera-back side slot is for an SD card.

3

* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.

White index Red index

Y

(p.42)

.

Align the lens’s white or red mount index with the camera’s index of the COP

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <

f

>

(p.42)

.

Set the power switch to <

1

>

(p.37)

.

6

7

8

Quick Start Guide

While holding down the center of the Mode Dial, set it to <

A

>

(Scene Intelligent Auto)

(p.23)

.

All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically.

Focus on the subject

(p.47)

.

Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject.

raised.

Y

Take the picture

(p.47)

.

COP

9

Review the picture.

The image just captured will be displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

To display the image again, press the < x > button (p.152).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.127).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.152).

To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.162).

7

8

Conventions Used in this Manual

Icons in this Manual

< 6 >

< 5 >

< p >

< 9 >

< 0 >

0 / 9 / 7 / 8

: Indicates the Main Dial.

: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.

: Indicates the AF area selection lever.

: Indicates the Multi-controller.

: Indicates the Setting button.

: Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. respectively after you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials, and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

LCD monitor.

3

M

(p.**)

: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

< M > button to change its settings.

the function is available only in the <

Y d >, < s >, < f >,

< a >, or < F > mode.

COP

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions

All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch is set to < 1 > and the < R > switch is set to the left (Multi function lock released) (p.37, 51).

It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are set to their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

Chapters

For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s basic operations and shooting procedures.

Introduction

1

Getting Started

2

Basic Shooting

3

5

4

6

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

Image Settings

GPS Settings

COP

Advanced Operations

Y

7

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

127

67

73

91

107

115

8

Shooting Movies

9

Image Playback

10

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer

29

139

151

163

2

9

10

Contents

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs ................................................... 4

Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5

Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6

Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8

Chapters........................................................................................... 9

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 14

Nomenclature ................................................................................. 16

1

Getting Started 29

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 32

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 33 COP

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 39

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 41

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 42

Lens Image Stabilizer..................................................................... 45

Basic Operation.............................................................................. 46

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 53

3 Menu Operations.................................................................. 55

Before You Start............................................................................. 58

l Displaying the Grid .................................................................. 62

Q Displaying the Electronic Level............................................... 63

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display..................................... 65

Help........................................................................................... 66

Contents

2

Basic Shooting 67

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................68

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) .........................71

3

4

Setting the AF and Drive Modes 73

f : Selecting the AF Operation .....................................................74

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point .........................................78

AF Sensor .......................................................................................82

Lenses and Usable AF Points.........................................................83

Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics ............................................87

MF: Manual Focus ..........................................................................88

o

Y

j Using the Self-timer ...................................................................90

Image Settings

COP

Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback .............................92

91

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ..............................................95

i : Setting the ISO Speed............................................................97

A Selecting a Picture Style.........................................................98

B : Setting the White Balance......................................................99

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast .................................100

Setting Noise Reduction ...............................................................101

Highlight Tone Priority ...................................................................103

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations..........104

Reducing Flicker ...........................................................................106

11

12

Contents

5

GPS Settings 107

GPS Precautions.......................................................................... 108

Acquiring GPS Signals ................................................................. 109

Setting the Positioning Interval..................................................... 112

Using the Digital Compass ........................................................... 113

Logging the Route Traveled ......................................................... 114

6

Advanced Operations 115

d : Program AE ............................................................................ 116

s : Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 117

f : Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 118

a

Y

q Selecting the Metering Mode.................................................. 121

O Setting Exposure Compensation............................................. 122

h

COP

A AE Lock................................................................................... 124

D Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 125

7

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 127

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor .............................................. 128

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)................................................... 131

MF: Focusing Manually ................................................................ 137

Contents

8

Shooting Movies 139

k Shooting Movies .....................................................................140

Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................140

Shutter-priority AE ......................................................................141

Aperture-priority AE....................................................................142

Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................143

Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................145

9

10

Image Playback 151

x Image Playback ......................................................................152

B : Shooting Information Display.............................................154

x

u

Y

k Playing Movies........................................................................160

L

COP

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer 163

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM .......................164

Downloading Images to a Computer.............................................166

Software Overview........................................................................168

Installing the Software...................................................................170

Software Instruction Manual .........................................................171

Certification Logo

Select [ 5 4: Certification Logo Display ] and press < 0 > to display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.

13

Handling Precautions

Camera Care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon

Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself.

Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean

Canon Service Center.

Y the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

Do not remove the focusing screen unless you are changing it. When changing the focusing screen, do not touch it with bare hands. Instead use separately).

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working.

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

14

Handling Precautions

If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.

If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.

LCD Panel and LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.

Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

Y

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following: physical shock, or vibration.

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic.

COP

Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Contacts

15

Nomenclature

< m > Flash exposure compensation/ISO speed setting button (p.97)

< U > LCD panel illumination button (p.52)

< B > AF area selection/

Multi-function button

(p.80)

< 6 > Main Dial

(p.48)

Shutter button

(p.47)

Self-timer lamp

(p.90)

Remote control sensor

Grip

(Battery compartment)

DC coupler cord hole

Depth-of-field preview button

< o > Drive mode selection/

AF operation/AF method selection button (p.89/74/131)

< n > White balance selection/

Metering mode selection button (p.99/121)

EF lens mount index (p.42)

Built-in flash/AF-assist beam (p.125/77)

EF-S lens mount index (p.42)

GPS antenna

Flash sync contacts

Hot shoe

Mode Dial lock-release button (p.48)

Mode Dial

(p.23, 48)

COP

Y

Strap mount

(p.26)

Built-in microphone

< D > Flash button (p.125)

Lens release button (p.43)

Lens lock pin

Contacts (p.15)

Mirror

Lens mount

16

Body cap (p.42)

Nomenclature

< p > AF area selection lever (p.50)

LCD panel (p.19-20)

Eyecup

Viewfinder eyepiece

< p >

AF start button

(p.47)

< A > AE lock button (p.124)

< S >

AF point selection button

(p.80-81)

< B > Info button

(p.52, 63, 66, 111,

113, 130, 144, 152)

Power switch (p.37)

< M > Menu button

(p.55)

Terminal cover

< Q > Quick

Control button (p.53)

COP

Touch pad (p.51)

Y

< 5 > Quick

Control Dial (p.49)

< 0 > Setting button

(p.55)

< Y > External microphone IN terminal

< n > Headphone terminal

< g > Digital terminal (p.166)

< D > PC terminal

< D > HDMI mini OUT terminal

Cable protector socket

< F > Remote control terminal (N3 type)

When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, also use the provided cable protector (p.27).

17

18

Nomenclature

Dioptric adjustment knob (p.46) < V > Focal plane mark

Speaker (for sound)

< b / X >

Creative Photo/

Comparative playback

(Two-image display) button (p.98)

< A / k > Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch

(p.127/139)

< 0 > Start/Stop button

(p.128, 140)

< 9 > Multi-controller

(p.50)

< c >

Rating button

Strap mount

(p.26)

< u >

Index/Magnify/

Reduce button

(p.158/159)

< x > Playback button (p.152)

< L > Erase button

(p.162)

Speaker (for beeper)

COP

Y

Card slot cover (p.33)

Battery compartment cover release lever (p.32)

Battery compartment cover (p.32)

Access lamp (p.36)

LCD monitor (p.55, 128,

140, 152)

Tripod socket

Ambient light sensor

Serial number

Multi function lock switch (p.51)

SD card slot (p.33)

CF card slot (p.33)

CF card eject button (p.35)

Nomenclature

LCD Panel

Shutter speed

FE lock ( FEL )

Busy ( buSY )

Built-in flash recycling ( buSY )

Multi function lock warning ( L )

No card warning ( Card )

Error code ( Err )

Cleaning image sensor ( CLn )

Logging function ( LOG )

White balance

(p.99)

Q Auto

W Daylight

E Shade

R Cloudy

Y Tungsten light

U White fluorescent light

I Flash

O Custom

P Color temperature

< h > AEB (p.123)

Aperture

AF point selection

( [ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF )

AF point registration

( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP )

Card warning ( Card 1/2 )

Card full warning ( FuLL 1/2 )

COP

Y

Possible shots

Self-timer countdown

Bulb exposure time

Card error warning ( Err )

Error number

Remaining images to record

Metering mode (p.121) q Evaluative metering w Partial metering r Spot metering e Center-weighted average metering

Battery check (p.38)

< J > Bulb timer shooting

< r > GPS acquisition status (p.109)

< u > White balance correction

< H > Interval timer shooting

< N > Auto Lighting Optimizer

(p.100)

< w > HDR shooting

< P > Multiple-exposure shooting

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

19

20

Nomenclature

< f > CF card indicator

< J > CF card selection icon < J > SD card selection icon

ISO speed (p.97)

< g > SD card indicator

< i > ISO speed

(p.97)

< A >

Highlight tone priority

(p.103)

AF operation (p.74)

X

One-Shot AF

9

AI Focus AF

Z

AI Servo AF

< y > Flash exposure compensation

4 L

Manual focus

Exposure level indicator

(Setting value)

Exposure compensation amount (p.122)

AEB range (p.123)

Flash exposure compensation amount

COP

Y

< z > Warning symbol

Drive mode (p.89) u Single shooting o High-speed continuous shooting i Low-speed continuous shooting

B Silent single shooting

M Silent continuous shooting

Q Self-timer: 10 sec./ remote control k Self-timer: 2 sec./ remote control

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information

Electronic level (p.64)

Spot metering circle (p.121)

Large Zone AF frame (p.79)

Focusing screen

Grid (p.62)

< S > Single AF point

< O > Spot AF point

Area AF frame

(p.79)

Exposure level indicator (Metering/

Flash metering)

Flicker detection

(p.106)

Shooting mode

White balance (p.99)

Drive mode (p.89)

COP

Y

AF operation (p.74)

Metering mode (p.121)

Standard exposure index

Exposure level scale

: 1 stop

: 1/3 stop

Overexposure

Flash overexposure

JPEG/RAW (p.95)

< i > AF status indicator (p.77)

< z >

Warning symbol

Exposure level

Flash exposure level

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Flash underexposure

Underexposure

21

Nomenclature

22

< z > Battery check

(p.38)

< A > AE lock (p.124)

AEB in-progress

(p.123)

< D > Flash-ready

(p.125)

Improper FE lock warning

< d > FE lock

FEB in-progress

< e > High-speed sync

< y > Flash exposure compensation

Shutter speed (p.117)

FE lock ( FEL )

Busy ( buSY )

Built-in flash recycling ( buSY )

Multi function lock warning ( L )

No card warning ( Card )

Error code ( Err )

Aperture (p.118)

< i > ISO speed

(p.97)

< o > Focus indicator

(p.68, 75)

Y < e > AF status indicator

Maximum burst

Number of remaining multiple exposures

COP ISO speed (p.97)

< A > Highlight tone priority (p.103)

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount (p.122)

AEB range (p.123)

Flash exposure compensation

Red-eye reduction lamp ON

AF point selection

( [ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF )

AF point registration

( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP )

Card warning ( Card 1/2 )

Card full warning ( FuLL 1/2 )

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).

F : Bulb a : Manual exposure (p.119) f : Aperture-priority AE (p.118) s : Shutter-priority AE (p.117) d : Program AE (p.116)

A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.68) Y

Custom shooting mode

COP

You can register the shooting mode ( d / s / f / a / F ), AF operation, menu settings, etc., to w , x , y Mode Dial positions.

23

24

Nomenclature

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM Lens

Focusing ring (p.88, 137)

Hood mount (p.44)

Focus mode switch (p.42)

Zoom position index

Zoom ring lock lever

(p.43)

Filter thread

(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.43)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.45)

Lens mount index (p.42)

Hood mount (p.44)

Y Contacts (p.15)

Focus mode switch (p.42)

Zoom position index

Distance scale

Filter thread

(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.43)

Focusing ring (p.88, 137)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.45)

Contacts (p.15)

Lens mount index (p.42)

Battery Charger LC-E6

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.30).

Power plug

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

Nomenclature

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Y

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Battery Charger LC-E6E

COP

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.30).

Power cord

Charge lamp

Battery pack slot

Power cord socket

25

26

Nomenclature

Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

The eyepiece cover is also attached to the strap.

COP

Nomenclature

Using the Cable Protector

When connecting the camera to a computer, printer or Wireless File

Transmitter, use the provided interface cable or one from Canon.

When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.

Using a Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable (sold separately)

1 2

3

Clamp

4 COP

Y

Cable protector

Provided interface cable

5

HDMI cable (sold separately)

27

Nomenclature

Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)

If you use a genuine interface cable (sold separately), run the cable through the clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable protector.

Clamp

COP

Y

Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may damage the digital terminal.

Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may damage the camera’s digital terminal.

As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.

28

To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is recommended even when connecting an HDMI cable.

1

Getting Started

This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations.

Y

COP

Minimizing Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

29

Charging the Battery

1

Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.

LC-E6

LC-E6E

2

Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse.

3

Recharge the battery.

For LC-E6

As shown by the arrow, flip out the Y

For LC-E6E

COP power outlet.

X Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.

Charge Level

0-49%

50-74%

75% or higher

Fully charged

Color

Orange

Green

Charge Lamp

Display

Blinks once per second

Blinks twice per second

Blinks three times per second

Lights up

It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /

41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

30

Charging the Battery

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.

Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet.

You can attach the cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery has been recharged or not.

If the battery has been recharged, attach the cover so that the battery-shaped hole < > is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is

Y

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount COP the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance and purchase a new battery.

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 10 sec.

If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not be recharged.

The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.

31

Installing and Removing the Battery

Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.

The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and darkens when the battery is removed.

Installing the Battery

1

Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover.

Insert the battery.

2

Insert the end with the battery contacts.

place.

Y

3

Close the cover.

COP

Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.

Removing the Battery

Open the cover and remove the battery.

Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery.

To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts, be sure to attach the provided protective cover (p.30) to the battery.

32

Installing and Removing the Card

The camera can use a CF card and an SD card. Images can be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.

If both types of card are inserted, you can select which card to record images to, or simultaneously record images on both cards (p.92-94).

If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable writing/erasing.

Installing the Card

1

Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it.

CF card

SD card

Write-protect switch

2

The camera-front side slot is for a CF card, and the camera-back side slot is for an SD card.

you and insert the end with the small holes into the camera.

If the card is inserted in the wrong way, it may damage the camera.

X The CF card eject button will stick out.

With the SD card’s label facing you, push in the card until it clicks in place.

33

Installing and Removing the Card

Card selection icon

Possible shots

3

Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut.

X When you set the power switch to

< 1 > (p.37), the number of possible shots and the loaded card(s) will be displayed on the LCD panel.

The images will be recorded to the card indicated by the arrow < > icon.

CF card indicator

SD card indicator

COP

Y

The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk-type cards.

34

Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA cards enable faster data writing.

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or SDXC memory cards can also be used.

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.

Even if shooting 2,000 or more shots is possible, the indicator will display only up to 1999.

Setting [ z 1: Release shutter without card ] to [ Disable ] will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card.

Installing and Removing the Card

Removing the Card

1

Open the cover.

Set the power switch to < 2 >.

Make sure the access lamp is off, then open the cover.

If [ Recording...

] is displayed, close the cover.

Access lamp

CF card eject button

Remove the card.

2

To remove the CF card, push the eject button.

To remove the SD card, push it in gently and release it. Then pull it out.

the cover.

Y

COP

35

36

Installing and Removing the Card

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or banging the camera around.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from 0001.

If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera (p.58). The card may then return to normal.

Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. contacts, contact failure may result.

Y

Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).

COP

Turning on the Power

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see page 39 to set the date/time/zone.

< 1 > : The camera turns on.

< 2 > : The camera is turned off and does not operate. Set to this position when not using the camera.

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Whenever you set the power switch to < 1 > or < 2 >, sensor cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be

Y the LCD monitor will display < f >.

You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter COP

If you repeatedly turn the power switch < 1 >/< 2 > at a short interval, the < f > icon may not be displayed. This is normal and not a malfunction.

3

Auto Power Off

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the shutter button halfway.

You can set the auto power off time with [ 5 2: Auto power off ]

(p.60).

If you set the power switch to < 2 > while an image is being recorded to the card, [ Recording...

] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording finishes.

37

Turning on the Power z

Checking the Battery Level

When the power switch is set to < 1 >, the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon ( b ) indicates that the battery will be exhausted soon.

Display

Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1 0

Number of Possible Shots (Approx. number of shots)

Temperature

No Flash

50% Flash Use

Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

800

670

Y

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

760

640

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

COP

• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx. 300 shots with no flash, approx. 250 shots with 50% flash use.

38

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor often.

The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on the lens used, the battery may exhaust faster.

For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 129.

See [ 5 3: Battery info.

] to check the battery’s condition in detail.

With Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) loaded with size AA/LR6 batteries, a four-level indicator will be displayed. ([ x ] [ m ] will not be displayed.)

3

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the camera will automatically adjust the date/time.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

1

Display the menu screen.

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

2

Under the [

Time/Zone].

5

Y

2] tab, select [Date/

Press the < Q > button and select the

[ 5 ] tab.

COP

6 > dial to select the [ 5 2 ] tab.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Date/

Time/Zone ], then press < 0 >.

3

Set the time zone.

[London] is set by default.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Time zone ].

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the time zone, then press < 0 >.

39

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

4

Set the date and time.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the number.

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the desired setting, then press < 0 >

(Returns to < s >).

Set the daylight saving time.

5

Set it if necessary.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Y ].

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Z ], then press < 0 >.

When the daylight saving time is set to [ Z ], the time set in step 4 will

Y

Y ] is set, the daylight saving time will be canceled

6 and the time will go back by 1 hr.

COP

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ OK ], then press < 0 >.

X The date/time/zone and daylight saving time will be set and the menu will reappear.

40

The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set the date/time/zone again.

After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time are set.

When performing [ Sync time between cameras ] via Wireless File

Transmitter, using another EOS 7D Mark II is recommended. If you perform [ Sync time between cameras ] using different models, the time zone or time may not be set correctly.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

The date/time that were set will start from when you press < 0 > in step

6.

In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC.

The time can be set using the GPS auto time setting function.

3

Selecting the Interface Language

Display the menu screen.

1

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

Y

2

Under the [

5

2] tab, select

[Language

K

].

COP

Q > button and select the

[ 5 ] tab.

Turn the < 6 > dial to select the [ 5 2 ] tab.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select

[ Language K ], then press < 0 >.

3

Set the desired language.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the language, then press < 0 >.

X The interface language will change.

41

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Attaching a Lens

1

Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.

White index

Red index

Attach the lens.

2

Align the lens’s red or white mount index with the camera’s mount index of the same color. Turn the lens as place.

Y

3

COP

to <AF>.

< AF > stands for autofocus.

< MF > stands for manual focus.

Autofocus will not operate.

4

Remove the front lens cap.

42

Image Conversion Factor

Since the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm film format, the angle of view of an attached lens will be equivalent to that of a lens with approx. 1.6x of the focal length indicated.

Image sensor size (Approx.)

(22.4 x 15.0 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm image size

(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Zooming

Turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers.

If you want to zoom, do it before focusing. Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus.

Detaching the Lens

While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.

detach it.

Y

Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.

COP

You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it around. Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever to < LOCK >. The zoom ring can be locked only at the wide-angle end.

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to

< 2 >.

If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.

43

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens Hood

A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain, snow, dust, etc. adhering to the front of the lens. Before storing the lens in a bag, etc., you can attach the hood in reverse.

If the Lens and the Lens Hood Have a Mount Index

1

Align the red dots, then turn the hood as shown by the arrow.

Align the red dots on the hood and lens edge, then turn the hood as shown by the arrow.

2

Turn the hood as shown in the illustration.

Y

COP

44

If the hood is not attached properly, it may obstruct the image’s periphery, making the image look dark.

When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood when turning it. Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the hood, resulting in failure to turn.

Lens Image Stabilizer

When you use the IS lens’s built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is based on the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

1

Set the IS switch to <

1

>.

Also set the camera’s power switch to

< 1 >.

2

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The Image Stabilizer will operate.

Take the picture.

3

When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

Y

COP

The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the exposure.

For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to < 2 >. If < 1 > is set, Image

Stabilizer misoperation may occur.

The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat.

The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens’s focus mode switch set to either < AF > or < MF >.

When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to < 1 > with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to

< 2 > is recommended.

The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod.

With the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM or EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

USM lens, the Image Stabilizer mode may switch automatically to suit the shooting conditions.

45

Basic Operation

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.

Turn the knob left or right so that the

AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.

If the knob is difficult to turn, remove the eyecup.

If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is recommended.

Holding the Camera

shake.

COP

Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 127.

46

Basic Operation

Shutter Button

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway

This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec.

(metering timer/ 0 ).

Pressing Completely

This releases the shutter and takes the picture.

Y

Preventing Camera Shake

COP

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button completely.

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > shooting modes, pressing the

< p > button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway.

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.

Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.

47

Basic Operation

Mode Dial

Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial.

Use it to set the shooting mode.

6

Main Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<

6

> dial.

When you press a button such as

< n > < o > < m >, the

6 sec. ( 9

Y turn the < 6 > dial to change the setting.

When the function selection ends or if

COP camera will be ready to shoot.

Use this dial to select or set the metering mode, AF operation, ISO speed, AF point, etc.

(2) Turn the <

6

> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel, turn the < 6 > dial to change the setting.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture, etc.

48

The operations in (1) are possible even when the < R > switch is set to the right (Multi function lock, p.51).

Basic Operation

5

Quick Control Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<

5

> dial.

When you press a button such as

< n > < o > < m >, the respective function remains selected for

6 sec. ( 9 ). During this time, you can turn the < 5 > dial to change the setting.

When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will be ready to shoot.

Use this dial to select or set the white

(2)

balance, drive mode, flash exposure

Turn the <

5

Y

> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel, turn the < 5 > dial to change the

COP

Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount, the aperture setting for manual exposures, etc.

The operations in (1) are possible even when the < R > switch is set to the right (Multi function lock, p.51).

49

50

Basic Operation p

AF Area Selection Lever

The < p > lever can be tilted to the right. Use it to select the AF area selection mode.

After pressing the <

S

> button, tilt the <

p

>.

Pressing the < S > button will make the AF area selection mode and AF point selectable for 6 sec. ( 9 ).

Then, when you tilt the < p > to the right within that time, you can change the AF area selection mode.

You can also press the < S > button and then press the < B > button to select the AF area selection mode.

Y

9

Multi-controller

The < 9

COP

Use it to select the AF point, correct the white balance, move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View shooting, scroll around magnified images during playback, operate the

Quick Control screen, etc.

You can also use it to select and set menu items.

For menus and Quick Control, the

Multi-controller works only in the vertical and horizontal directions

< V > < U >. It does not work in diagonal directions.

Basic Operation h

Touch Pad

During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, sound recording level, and headphone volume.

This function works when [ z 5: Silent Control ] is set to [ Enable h ].

After pressing the <

Q

> button, tap the <

5

> dial’s inner ring at the top, bottom, left, or right.

R

Multi Function Lock

By setting [ 8 3: Multi function lock

Y

R > switch to the right, you can prevent the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, Multicontroller, and AF area selection lever from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.

COP

> switch set to the left:

Lock released

< R > switch set to the right:

Lock engaged

If the < R > switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked camera controls, < L > will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. On the shooting settings display (p.52), [ LOCK ] will be displayed.

51

52

Basic Operation

U

LCD Panel Illumination

Turn on ( 9 ) or off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the < U > button.

During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the

LCD panel illumination.

Displaying Shooting Function Settings

After you press the < B > button a number of times, the shooting function settings will be displayed.

With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode

Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode.

Pressing the < Q function settings (p.53).

Y

Press the < B > button again to turn off the display.

COP

Q

Quick Control for Shooting Functions

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.

1

Press the <

Q

> button

( 7 )

.

X The Quick Control screen will appear.

< A > mode

Set the desired functions.

2

Use < 9 > to select a function.

X The setting of the selected function is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > or < 6 > dial to change the setting.

< d /

Y s / f / a / F > modes

COP

3

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

X The captured image will be displayed.

In the < A > mode, you can only select the recording function and card, and set the image-recording quality, drive mode, and flash firing.

53

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

54

Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen

Aperture (p.118) AE lock* (p.124)

Shutter speed (p.117) Highlight tone priority* (p.103)

Shooting mode* (p.23)

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting

(p.122/123)

ISO speed (p.97)

Flash exposure compensation

Picture Style (p.98) Custom Controls/

Flash firing ( A mode)

AF operation (p.74) Image-recording quality

(p.95)

White balance (p.99)

Metering mode (p.121)

White balance correction /

White balance bracketing

Recording function/Card selection

(p.92)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

(p.100)

Y

Drive mode (p.89)

* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

COP

Function Setting Screen

Ð

< 0 >

Select a function and press < 0 >.

The function setting screen will appear.

Turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to change some of the settings. There are also functions that are set by pressing the button.

Press < 0 > to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen.

When you select < > and press the < M > button, the previous screen will reappear.

3

Menu Operations

You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-recording quality, date/time, etc.

< M > button

< 6 > Main Dial

LCD monitor

< 5 > Quick Control Dial

< Q > button

< 0 > button

A

Mode Menu Screen

Y

COP

* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the < A > mode.

d

/

s

/

f

/

a

/

F

Mode Menu Screen

3 : Playback

2 : AF z : Shooting

5 : Set-up

8 : Custom Functions

9 : My Menu

Main tabs

Secondary tabs

Menu settings

Menu items

55

3 Menu Operations

56

Menu Setting Procedure

1

Display the menu screen.

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

Select a tab.

2

Each time you press the < Q > button, the main tab will switch.

Turn the < 6 > dial to select a secondary tab.

For example, the [ z 4 ] tab refers to the screen displayed when the z

3

(Shooting) tab’s fourth dot “ ” from the left is selected.

Y

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the item, then press < 0 >.

COP

4

Select the setting.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the desired setting.

The current setting is indicated in blue.

5

Adjust the setting.

Press < 0 > to set it.

6

Exit the setting.

Press the < M > button to exit the menu and return to shooting-ready.

3 Menu Operations

The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the < M > button to display the menu screen.

You can also use < 9 > to operate and set menu functions. (Except for

[ 3 1: Erase images ] and [ 5 1: Format card ].)

To cancel the operation, press the < M > button.

Dimmed Menu Items

Example: When Multi Shot

Noise Reduction is set

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it.

Y

You can see the overriding function by COP

0 >.

If you cancel the overriding function’s setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable.

Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.

With [ 5 4: Clear all camera settings ], you can reset the menu functions to the default settings (p.61).

57

58

Before You Start

3

Formatting the Card

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera.

When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

1

Select [Format card].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Format card ], then press < 0 >.

3

Select the card.

Y

2

[ f ] is the CF card, and [ g ] is the SD COP

0 >.

Select [OK].

X The card will be formatted.

When [ g ] is selected, low-level formatting is possible (p.59).

For low-level formatting, press the

< L > button to append [ Low level format ] with a checkmark < X >, then select [ OK ].

Before You Start

Format the card in the following cases:

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full with images or data.

A card-related error is displayed .

Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card.

Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card, the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [ Cancel ]. Even in this case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as usual.

Y

COP

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the personal data from being leaked.

Before using a new Eye-Fi card, the software on the card must be installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

59

Before You Start

3

Disabling the Beeper

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or during self-timer operation.

1

Select [Beep].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Beep ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Disable].

Select [ Disable ], then press < 0 >.

X The beeper will not sound.

3

Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set Y automatically, set this to [ Disable ]. After the power turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other buttons.

1

COP

Select [Auto power off].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select [ Auto power off ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

60

Even if [ Disable ] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)

Before You Start

3

Setting the Image Review Time

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [ Hold ]. To not have the image displayed, set [ Off ].

1

Select [Image review].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Image review ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

If [ Hold ] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses.

Y

3

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings

N reverted to their defaults.

1

Select [Clear all camera settings].

Under the [ 5 4 ] tab, select [ Clear all camera settings ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [OK].

61

62

l

Displaying the Grid

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the shot.

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [VF grid display].

Select [Enable].

3

X When you exit the menu, the grid will Y

COP

Q

Displaying the Electronic Level

You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt.

Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor

1

Press the <

B

> button.

Each time you press the < B > button, the screen display will change.

Display the electronic level.

If the electronic level does not appear, set [ 5 3: z button display options ] so that the Y

Check the camera’s tilt.

The horizontal and vertical tilt are displayed in 1° increments.

When the red line turns green, it indicates that the tilt is almost corrected.

Vertical level Horizontal level

63

64

Q Displaying the Electronic Level

3

Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder

An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.

Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct the camera tilt while shooting.

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Viewfinder level].

3

Select [Show].

Y

4

COP

X The electronic level will be displayed in the viewfinder.

This also works with vertical shooting.

1°

1° 4° or greater

7°

7.5° or greater

3

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display

N

The shooting function settings (Shooting mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.

By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [ X ].

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].

3

Checkmark [

X

] the information to

Y

Select the information to display and press < 0 > to append a checkmark COP checkmark [ X ] to all the information to be displayed. Then select [ OK ].

X When you exit the menu, the checkmarked information will appear in the viewfinder.

65

66

Help

When [ z Help ] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is displayed only while you hold down the < B > button. If the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To scroll, hold down the < B > button and turn the < 5 > dial.

Example: [ 2 1: Case2]

B

Î

Example: [ 2

Y

B COP

Example: [ 8 3: Multi function lock]

B

Î

Scroll bar

2

Basic Shooting

In the < A > mode, all you do is point and shoot and the COP function settings cannot be changed.

Y

A

>

Scene Intelligent Auto

Auto Lighting Optimizer

In the < A > mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.100) will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast. It is also enabled by default in the < d >, < s >, or

< f > mode.

67

68

A

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

< A > is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.71).

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

A

>.

Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the lock release button at the center.

Area AF frame

Focus indicator

2

Aim the Area AF frame over the subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus, and the camera will focus on the closest object.

Aiming the center of the Area AF focusing easier.

Y

3

Focus on the subject.

COP focus.

X During the autofocus operation,

< i > will be displayed.

X The AF point that achieves focus will be displayed. At the same time, the beeper will sound and the focus indicator < o > will light up.

X In low light, the AF point(s) will light up briefly in red.

X If necessary, the built-in flash will be raised automatically.

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

X The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

After you finish shooting, push down the built-in flash with your fingers.

The < A > mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the mode to < d >, < s >, < f >, or < a >, set a Picture Style other than

< D >, then shoot again (p.98).

FAQ

The focus indicator < o

Y

Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (p.47). If you are too close to the subject, move away and try again.

COP

When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red in low-light conditions.

Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points. As long as the AF point covering the desired subject lights up, you can take the picture.

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator < o > does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject. (The focus indicator < o > does not light up.) You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that focus lock (p.71) will not work in this case.

69

70

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to < MF > (manual focus), set it to < AF > (autofocus).

The flash fired even though it was daylight.

For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control to set [ Flash firing ] to [ b ] (p.53).

The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.

Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.

Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to Y

The built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is normal and not a malfunction.

COP unnaturally dark.

The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.

A

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective.

In the < A > mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot Y

Shooting a Moving Subject

COP

In the < A > mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes) while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

71

72

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

A

Live View Shooting

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 127.

1

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

A

>.

2

Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor.

Press the < 0 > button.

3

X The Live View image will appear on

X the LCD monitor.

focus.

Y

Press the shutter button halfway to will turn green and the beeper will sound.

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

X The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

X When the playback display ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.

Press the < 0 > button to end the

Live View shooting.

3

Setting the AF and

Drive Modes

Y

suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes.

COP

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject.

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

In the < A > mode, the AF operation and AF area selection mode are set automatically.

< AF > stands for autofocus. < MF > stands for manual focus.

73

74

f

: Selecting the AF Operation

N

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In the < A > mode, “AI Focus AF” is set automatically.

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF>.

2

Set the <

d

> <

s

> <

f

> <

a

>

<

F

> mode.

3

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

4

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the COP

: One-Shot AF

9 : AI Focus AF

Z : AI Servo AF

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

AF point

Focus indicator

When focus is achieved, the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed, and the focus indicator < o > in the viewfinder will also light up.

With evaluative metering (p.121), the exposure setting will be set at the same time as focus is achieved.

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

Y

COP

75

76

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When the AF area selection mode (p.78) is set to 65-point automatic selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF frame covers the subject.

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically

AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI

Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts

Y operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving subject.

COP

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

AF Operation Indicator

When you press the shutter button halfway and the camera is focusing with

AF, the < i > icon will appear on the lower right of the viewfinder.

In the One-Shot AF mode, the icon also appears if you press the shutter button halfway after focus is achieved.

AF Points Lighting Up in Red

The AF points light up in red in low-light conditions.

Y the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to help autofocusing.

COP

77

78

S

Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

N

The camera has 65 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ. For details, see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 83.

AF Area Selection Mode

You can select one of seven AF area selection modes. For the setting procedure, see page 80.

Single-point Spot AF

(Manual selection)

For pinpoint focusing.

Y

(Manual selection)

COP

AF point expansion

(Manual selection )

The manually-selected AF point < S > and four adjacent AF points < w > (above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus.

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)

The manually-selected AF point < S > and the surrounding AF points < w > are used to focus.

Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

One of nine zones is used to focus.

Large Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

Y is used to focus.

AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set automatically in the < A > mode.

79

80

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

1

Press the <

S

> button.

( 9 )

2

Operate the <

p

> or <

B

> button.

Look through the viewfinder and operate the < p > or < B > button.

Each time you tilt < p > to the right, the AF area selection mode changes.

Each time you press the < B > Y changes.

COP

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

Selecting the AF Point Manually

You can manually select the AF point or zone.

1

Press the <

S

> button.

X The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder.

In AF point expansion modes, adjacent AF points will also be displayed.

In the Zone AF mode, the selected zone will be displayed.

Select an AF point.

2

The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt < 9 >. If you press < 9

Y

> straight down, the center

AF point (or center zone) will be selected.

You can also select a horizontal AF COP

6 > dial and select a vertical AF point by turning the < 5 > dial.

In the Zone AF mode, turning the

< 6 > or < 5 > dial will change the zone in a looping sequence.

81

82

AF Sensor

The camera’s AF sensor has 65 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. With f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture lenses, high-precision AF is possible with the center AF point.

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable AF points and AF pattern will differ. For details, see pages

83-86.

Diagram Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

Y

Dual cross-type focusing: COP

The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision focusing with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture lenses. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on subjects difficult for AF. It is provided at the center AF point.

The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a horizontal pattern, it can detect vertical lines. It covers all 65 AF points. The center AF point and the adjacent AF points at the top and bottom are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.

The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a vertical pattern, it can detect horizontal lines. It covers all 65 AF points.

The center AF point and the adjacent AF points on the left and on the right are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Although the camera has 65 AF points, the number of usable AF points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens. The lenses are thereby classified into seven groups from A to G.

When using a lens in Groups E to G, fewer AF points will be usable.

To see which group a lens belongs to, refer to “Camera Instruction

Manual” (PDF) in the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM.

When you press the < S > button, the AF points indicated by the mark will blink (The / AF points will stay lit).

Regarding new lenses marketed after the sales start of EOS 7D Mark II in the second half of 2014, check the Canon Web site to see which group they belong to.

Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

Group A

are selectable.

Y

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes

: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject

COP precision is higher than with other AF points.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

83

84

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group B

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

Group C

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and high-

Y

: AF points sensitive to horizontal

Group D

lines.

COP

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group E

Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible. (Not possible with all 65

AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group F

Y automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.

COP tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to vertical lines

(AF points in the horizontal array at the top and bottom) or horizontal lines (AF points in a vertical array on the left and right).

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

85

86

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group G

AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points above, below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point AF (manual selection),

Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), and AF point expansion

(manual selection ).

If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f/8

(between f/5.6 and f/8), AF will be possible.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF point sensitive to vertical lines

(top and bottom AF points adjacent to the center AF point) or horizontal Y

Not manually selectable. It works only when “AF point expansion COP

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

3

Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics

N

You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool.”

1

Select the [

2

1] tab.

2

Select a case.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select a case icon, then press < 0 >.

X The selected case will be set. The selected case is indicated in blue.

Case 1 to 6

Case 1 to 6 are six setting combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, Y

Refer to the table below to select the case applicable to the subject or scene.

Case Icon

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

Case 4

Case 5

Case 6

Versatile multi purpose setting

Applicable Subjects

For any moving subject.

Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles

Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points

For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly

For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction (disabled in Single-point AF mode)

For subjects that change speed and move erratically (disabled in

Single-point AF mode)

Tennis players, butterfly swimmers, freestyle skiers, etc.

Starting line of a bicycle race, alpine downhill skiers, etc.

Soccer, motor sports, basketball, etc.

Figure skaters, etc.

Rhythm gymnastics, etc.

87

88

MF: Manual Focus

Focusing ring

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

X < 4 L > will be displayed on the

LCD panel.

2

Focus on the subject.

Focus by turning the lens’s focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

COP

Y

o

Selecting the Drive Mode

Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject.

1

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

2

Select the drive mode.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial.

u : Single shooting be taken.

o : High-speed continuous shooting COP will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 10.0 shots/ sec.

i : Low-speed continuous shooting

While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be taken at a speed of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

B : Silent single shooting

Single shooting with less shooting sound than < u > during viewfinder shooting.

M : Silent continuous shooting

Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than < i > during viewfinder shooting. The continuous shooting speed will be approx. 4.0 shots/sec.

89

90

j

Using the Self-timer

Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.

1

2

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

Select the self-timer.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial.

Q : 10-sec. self-timer k : 2-sec. self-timer

Take the picture.

3

Look through the viewfinder, focus on

X the subject, then press the shutter Y operation with the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown display (in COP

X Two seconds before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will light up and the beeper will sound faster.

4

Image Settings

balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, anti-

COP

Y

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

91

92

3

Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you can start recording captured images. When only one card is inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on pages 92-94.

If you insert both a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images.

[ f ] indicates the CF card, and [ g ] the SD card.

Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted

1

Select [Record func+card/folder sel.].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Record func+card/folder sel.

], then press

< 0 >.

Y

2

Select [Record func.].

COP

3

Select the recording method.

Select the recording method, then press < 0 >.

3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

Standard

Images will be recorded to the card selected with [ Record/play ].

Auto switch card

Same as with the [ Standard ] setting, but if the card becomes full, the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will be created.

Rec. separately

You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.95). Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the imagerecording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording quality, such as to 73 and 1 , or c and 41 .

Rec. to multiple

Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously Y

COP

93

94

3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback

If [ Record func.

] is set to [ Standard ] or [ Auto switch card ], select the card for recording and playing images.

If [ Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. separately ] or [ Rec. to multiple ], select the card for playing images.

Standard / Auto switch card

Select [Record/play].

Select [ Record/play ], then press

< 0 >.

f : Record images to and play images back from the CF card.

g : Record images to and play card.

Y

Select the card, then press < 0 >.

Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple

COP

Select [ Playback ], then press < 0 >.

f : Play back the CF card’s images.

g : Play back the SD card’s images.

Select the card, then press < 0 >.

3

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG image-recording quality settings: 73 , 83 , 74 , 84 , 7 a , 8 a , b , c .

There are three RAW image quality settings: 1 , 41 , 61 .

1

Select [Image quality].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Image quality ], then press < 0 >.

Standard / Auto switch card / Rec. to multiple

Select the image-recording quality.

2

To select a RAW quality, turn the

< 6 > dial. To select a JPEG quality, turn the < 5 > dial.

Y

****x****

**M

” number indicates the recorded pixel count, and [ *** ] is the number of possible COP

Press < 0 > to set it.

Rec. separately

Under [ 5 1: Record func+card/ folder sel.

], if [ Record func.

] is set to

[ Rec. separately ], select CF card

[ f ] or SD card [ g ], then press

< 0 >.

Select the desired image-recording quality, then press < 0 >.

95

96

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Image

Quality

73

JPEG

83

74

84

7 a

8 a b

*1 c

*2

1

Pixels

Recorded

20M

8.9M

5.0M

2.5M

0.3M

20M

Printing

Size

A2

A3

A4

9x13 cm

-

A2

File Size

(MB)

6.6

3.5

3.6

1.8

2.3

1.2

1.3

0.3

24.0

Possible

Shots

1090

2060

2000

3810

3060

5800

5240

20330

290

41 RAW 11M A3 19.3

350

RAW

+

JPEG

61

1

73

41

73

61

73

5.0M

20M

20M

11M

20M

5.0M

20M

A4

A2

A2

A3

A2

A4

A2

13.3

24.0+6.6

19.3+6.6

COP

Y 510

220

260

340

*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.

*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.

Maximum

Burst

130 (1090)

2060 (2060)

2000 (2000)

3810 (3810)

3060 (3060)

5800 (5800)

5240 (5240)

20330 (20330)

24 (31)

28 (31)

35 (35)

18 (19)

18 (19)

18 (19) b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.

The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and

Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB CF card. These figures will vary by the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom

Functions, and other settings.

The maximum burst applies to < o > high-speed continuous shooting.

Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 7 CF card based on

Canon’s testing standards.

i

: Setting the ISO Speed

N

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. With the < A > mode selected, the ISO speed will be set automatically.

1

Press the <

m

> button.

( 9 )

2

Set the ISO speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

ISO speed can be set within ISO 100

- ISO 16000 in 1/3-stop increments.

“ A

Y

ISO Speed Guide

ISO speed

(No flash)

ISO 100 - ISO 400

ISO 400 - ISO 1600

Sunny outdoors

Overcast skies or evening time

ISO 1600 - ISO 16000, H1, H2 Dark indoors or night

Flash Range

The higher the ISO speed, the farther the flash range will be.

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

97

98

A

Selecting a Picture Style

N

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject.

The Picture Style is set automatically to [ D ] (Auto) in the < A > mode.

1

Press the <

b

> button.

Select [

A

].

2

X The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

Y

3

Select a Picture Style.

COP

B

: Setting the White Balance

N

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the [ Q ] (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If naturallooking colors cannot be obtained with [ Q ], you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

< A > is automatically set in the [ Q ] mode.

1

Press the <

n

> button.

( 9 )

Select a white balance setting.

2

While looking at the LCD panel or Y

5 > dial.

COP

99

3

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

N

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [ Standard ]. With JPEG images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.

[ Standard ] is automatically set in the < A > mode.

1

Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ Auto

Lighting Optimizer ], then press

< 0 >.

Select the setting.

2

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Y

3

Take the picture.

COP necessary.

100

3

Setting Noise Reduction

N

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) is further reduced.

1

Select [High ISO speed NR].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select [ High ISO speed NR ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the level.

Y

0 >.

COP

M : Multi Shot Noise Reduction

This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [ High ].

For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [ Multi Shot Noise Reduction ].

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied.

101

3 Setting Noise Reduction N

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.

1

Select [Long exp. noise reduction].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select [ Long exp. noise reduction ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Set the desired setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Y

Auto automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[ Auto ] setting is effective in most cases.

Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [ Enable ] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the [ Auto ] setting.

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied.

102

3

Highlight Tone Priority

N

You can reduce overexposed highlight areas.

1

Select [Highlight tone priority].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select

[ Highlight tone priority ], then press

< 0 >.

Select [Enable].

2

Highlight details are improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

Y

3

The image will be recorded with COP

103

3

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and Chromatic aberration correction are set to [ Enable ], and Distortion correction is set to [ Disable ].

Peripheral Illumination Correction

1

Select [Lens aberration correction].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Lens

2 aberration correction ], then press

< 0 >.

press < 0 >.

Y

Check that [ Correction data available ] is displayed for the COP

], then

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected.

104

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Chromatic Aberration Correction

1

2

Select the setting.

Check that [ Correction data available ] is displayed for the attached lens.

Select [ Chromatic aberration ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected.

Distortion Correction

1

Check that [

Y

Correction data available ] is displayed for the attached lens.

COP

Distortion ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

Take the picture.

2

The image will be recorded with the distortion corrected.

Lens Correction Data

The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for approx. 30 lenses. If you select [ Enable ], the peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.

With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS Utility

Instruction Manual (p.168) on the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM.

105

3

Reducing Flicker

N

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.

With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is minimal.

1

Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].

Under the [ z 4 ] tab, select [ Antiflicker shoot.

], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Enable].

Y

Take the picture.

3

The image will be taken with reduced COP

106

5

GPS Settings

navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),

GLONASS satellites (Russia), and the Quasi-Zenith

COP

Y

The GPS function is set to [ Disable ] by default.

This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite navigation function.

When [GPS] is set to [Enable] (p.109) , the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals even after the power is turned off. The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease. If you will not use

GPS, setting [GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.

When using GPS function, be sure to check the region of use and use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country.

107

GPS Precautions

Note the following when using the GPS function.

In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS may be restricted.

Therefore, be sure to use GPS in accordance with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country.

Be careful about using GPS functions where the operation of electronic devices is restricted.

Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as when posting them online where many people can view them.

GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.

COP

Y

108

Acquiring GPS Signals

To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping your hands, etc., away from the camera top.

When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to catch the GPS satellite signals after you set [ GPS ] to [ Enable ]. Check that [ r ] is displayed on the LCD panel, then shoot.

1

Select [GPS/digital compass settings].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select [ GPS/ digital compass settings ], then press < 0 >.

2

GPS acquisition status is indicated by the [ r ] icon on the LCD panel and on the shooting function settings screen.

Constant r : Signal acquired

Blinking r : Signal not acquired yet

When you shoot while [ r ] is displayed, the image will be geotagged.

109

Acquiring GPS Signals

Viewing GPS Information

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [GPS information display].

X Detailed GPS information is displayed.

Y

3

Take the picture.

COP acquisition are geotagged.

110

Acquiring GPS Signals

Geotagging Information

Play back the images and press the < B > button to display the shooting information screen (p.155). Then tilt < 9 > up or down to check the geotag information.

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Direction (Based on magnetic north, p.113)

COP

Y

West

270°

North

0°

South

180°

East

90°

111

Setting the Positioning Interval

The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.

Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will make it more accurate, it will reduce the number of possible shots.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Position update interval].

3

Select the desired update interval, then press < 0 >.

COP

112

Using the Digital Compass

Camera orientation information (the direction the camera is facing) can be appended to the image.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set [Digital compass] to [Enable].

Select [ Digital compass ], then press

< 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

If the [ Calibrate digital compass ] screen appears, follow the on-screen instructions.

Compass Display During Shooting

Y

The camera’s current orientation can be displayed on the LCD monitor.

COP

B > button to display the digital compass, the direction will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, you can confirm the direction using the arrow icon at the location circled in this sample screen.

113

Logging the Route Traveled

Map data ©2014 ZENRIN -

When using the GPS logging function, the geotag information of the route the camera traveled is automatically recorded in the camera’s internal memory.

Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer using the Map

Utility (EOS software, p.169).

Note that the GPS logging function will continue to log information even when the camera’s power is off, including auto power off.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [

Y

] is set to [ Enable ].

2

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

COP

3

Set [Log GPS position] to

[Enable].

Select [ Log GPS position ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

114

6

Advanced Operations

In the <

d

> <

s

> <

f

> <

a

>

<

F

> shooting modes, you can

COP

desired result.

Y

select the shutter speed, aperture, and other camera

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec. ( 0 ).

Set the < R > switch to the left.

115

d

: Program AE

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

* < d > stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

d

>.

Focus on the subject.

2

Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject. Then press the shutter button halfway.

X When focus is achieved, the focus

X indicator < o > in the viewfinder will light up (in One-Shot AF mode).

Y be set automatically and displayed in

3 the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

COP as long as the shutter speed and aperture displays do not blink.

4

Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

116

s

: Shutter-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.

* < s > stands for Time value.

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Y Frozen action

(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

s

>.

COP

2

Set the desired shutter speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the

< 6 > dial.

3

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The aperture is set automatically.

4

Check the viewfinder display and shoot.

As long as the aperture is not blinking, a standard exposure will be obtained.

117

f

: Aperture-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.

* < f > stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

118

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Y

1

2

Set the Mode Dial to <

f

>.

COP

Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

3

4

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The shutter speed is set automatically.

Check the viewfinder display and shoot.

As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, a standard exposure will be obtained.

a

: Manual Exposure

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure.

* < a > stands for Manual.

Shutter speed

Aperture

Bright (+)

Dark (-)

Standard exposure index < >

3

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

a

>.

2

Set the ISO speed

(p.97)

.

Set the shutter speed and aperture.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

< 6 > dial.

To set the aperture, turn the < 5 > dial.

Y

R >

6 > or < 5 > dial.

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel.

On the viewfinder’s right side, the exposure level indicator < > shows how far off the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level < >.

5

Set the exposure and take the picture.

Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed and aperture.

If the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops from the standard exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display < > or < >.

119

a : Manual Exposure

Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO

If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO), you can set exposure compensation (p.122) as follows.

• [ z 2: Expo. comp./AEB ]

• Under [ 8 3: Custom Controls ], use [ s : Expo comp (hold btn, turn ) ] or [ p : Expo comp (hold down lever, turn ) ].

• Quick Control (p.53)

Set the exposure compensation amount while checking the exposure level indicator on the lower part of the viewfinder or on the LCD panel.

COP

Y

120

q

Selecting the Metering Mode

N

You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.

In the < A > mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.

1

Press the <

n

> button.

( 9 )

Select the metering mode.

2

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

q :Evaluative metering w :Partial metering r :Spot metering e

Y

COP

121

O

Setting Exposure Compensation

N

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken

(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in the < d >, < s >, and < f > shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.53) or follow the instructions for [ z 2: Expo.comp./AEB ] on the next page.

If the < a > mode with the Auto ISO set, see page 120 to set the exposure compensation.

Increased exposure for a brighter image

Check the exposure.

1

Press the shutter button halfway

2

( 0 ) and check the exposure level indicator.

Y

amount.

While looking at the viewfinder or

COP

5 > dial.

If it cannot be set, set the < R > switch to the left, then turn the < 5 >

Decreased exposure for a darker image 3 dial.

Take the picture.

To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level indicator < h / N > to the standard exposure index (< a > or < C >).

122

h

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

N

By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three successive shots. This is called AEB.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

1

Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select

[ Expo.comp./AEB ], then press

< 0 >.

AEB range

Standard exposure

Decreased exposure

Increased exposure

Set the AEB range.

2

Turn the < 6 > dial to set the AEB range. If you turn < 5 >, you can set

Press < 0

Y

> to set it.

X When you exit the menu, < h > and

3 the AEB range will be displayed on COP

Take the picture.

Three bracketed shots will be taken according to the drive mode set in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.

AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step

2 to turn off the AEB range display.

123

A

AE Lock

N

Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the < A > button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects, etc.

1

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The exposure setting will be displayed.

Press the <

A

> button.

( 0 ) 2

X The < A > icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

Each time you press the < A > button,

3 the current exposure setting is locked.

Y right of the viewfinder will show the

AE lock exposure level and the COP

If you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots, hold down the < A > button and press the shutter button to take another shot.

124

D

Using the Built-in Flash

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > modes, just press the < D > button to raise the built-in flash for flash photography.

Before shooting, check that [ D ] is displayed in the viewfinder. After shooting, push the built-in flash back down with your fingers until it clicks into place.

In the < A > mode, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically in low-light or backlit conditions. You can also enable or disable the flash firing.

The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will be used with flash.

Shooting Mode

A d s f a

F

Shutter Speed Aperture

Automatically set

Automatically set

(1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.)

Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Automatically set

Automatically set

COP

Y

Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)

Exposure continues while you hold down the shutter button or while the bulb timer is operating.

Automatically set

Automatically set

Manually set

Manually set

Manually set

125

D Using the Built-in Flash

Effective Range of Built-in Flash

ISO Speed

(Approx. in meters/feet)

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

EF-S15-85mm f/3-5.6 IS USM

ISO 100

Wide Angle: f/3.5

1-3.1 / 3.3-10.3

Telephoto: f/5.6

1-2.0 / 3.3-6.4

ISO 200

ISO 400

ISO 800

ISO 1600

ISO 3200

ISO 6400

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600)

H2

(equivalent to ISO 51200)

1-4.4 / 3.3-14.6

1-6.3 / 3.3-20.6

1.1-8.9 / 3.6-29.2

1.6-12.6 / 5.2-41.2

2.2-17.8 / 7.3-58.3

3.1-25.1 / 10.3-82.5

4.4-35.6 / 14.6-116.7

1-2.8 / 3.3-9.1

1-3.9 / 3.3-12.9

1-5.6 / 3.3-18.2

1-7.9 / 3.3-25.8

1.4-11.1 / 4.6-36.5

2.0-15.7 / 6.4-51.6

2.8-22.2 / 9.1-72.9

3.1-24.9 / 10.2-81.8

5.0-39.9 / 16.4-130.9

6.3-50.3 / 20.6-165.0

Y

3.9-31.4 / 12.9-103.1

5.6-44.4 / 18.2-145.8

8.9-71.1 / 29.2-233.3

COP

126

7

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

COP

Y

Movie shooting switch to <

A

>.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended.

127

A

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

1

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

A

>.

2

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

The Live View image will closely match the brightness level of the actual image you capture.

3

Focus on the subject.

Y the current AF method (p.131).

4

COP

Press the shutter button completely.

X The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

X When the playback display ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.

Press the < 0 > button to exit the

Live View shooting.

128

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Enabling Live View Shooting

Set [ z 5: Live View shoot.

] (the [ z 3 ] tab in < A >) to [ Enable ].

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)

Temperature

No Flash

50% Flash Use

Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

270

250

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

260

240

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and Y possible for approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), or for approx. 2 hr. 10 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F).

COP

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.

129

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Information Display

Each time you press the < B > button, the information display will change.

Possible shots

HDR shooting/

Multiple exposures/

Multi Shot

Noise Reduction

Shooting mode

AF method

Drive mode

Metering mode/

Flash firing

( A mode)

AE lock

Maximum burst/

Number of remaining multiple exposures

Battery check

Temperature warning

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Histogram display

Card for recording/ playback

Image-recording quality

White balance/

White balance correction

COP

Y

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Exposure simulation

Flash ready/Flash off AEB/FEB

Shutter speed

Flash exposure compensation

ISO speed

Highlight tone priority

GPS connection indicator Aperture

Exposure compensation Digital compass

Eye-Fi card transmission status Exposure level indicator

130

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Changes in AF Speed Depending On the AF Control Method

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, the AF control method used

(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) will switch automatically depending on the lens and function used, such as magnified view. This can greatly affect the AF speed and the camera may take a longer time to focus (phase-difference detection generally allows faster AF focusing). For details, refer to the Canon Web site.

Selecting the AF Method

You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your subject. The following AF methods are provided: [ u (face)+Tracking ]

(p.132), [ FlexiZone - Multi ] (p.134), and [ FlexiZone - Single ] (p.136).

If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

< MF >, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.137).

Y

Under the [ z 5 ] tab (the [ z 3 ] tab in COP

AF method ].

Select the desired AF method, then press < 0 >.

When the Live View image is displayed, you can press the

< o > button to select the AF method.

131

Using AF to Focus (AF Method) u

(face)+Tracking:

c

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point < p > also moves to track the face.

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

Select an AF point.

2

When a face is detected, the < p > frame will appear over the face to be focused on.

If multiple faces are detected, < q > will be displayed. Use < 9 > to move the < q

Y want to focus on.

3

If no faces are detected, the camera COP

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

X When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

132

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.128).

Focusing on a subject other than a human face

Press < 9 > or < 0 >, and the AF frame < > will appear in the center. Then use < 9 > to move the AF frame over the desired subject. Once the AF frame achieves focus, it will track the subject even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.

COP

Y

133

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

FlexiZone - Multi:

o

You can focus over a wide area with up to 31 AF points (automatic selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing

(zone selection).

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

Area frame

Zone frame

3

2

Select the AF point.

N

Pressing < 9

Y

> or < 0 > will toggle between automatic selection and zone selection. In the < A > mode, automatic selection is set COP

> to select the zone. To return to the center zone, press < 9 > or < 0 > again.

Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.

X When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X If focus is not achieved, the area frame will turn orange.

134

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.128).

COP

Y

135

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

FlexiZone - Single:

d

The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you want to focus on a particular subject.

AF point

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

X The AF point < > will appear.

During movie shooting, if [ Movie

Servo AF ] is set to [ Enable ], the AF point will be displayed in a larger size.

2

Move the AF point.

Use < 9

Y be moved to the edge of the screen.)

3

Pressing < 9 > or < 0 > will return COP

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.

X When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.128).

136

MF: Focusing Manually

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus roughly.

2

Display the magnifying frame.

Press the < u > button.

X The magnifying frame will appear.

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification (Approx.)

3

Use < 9 > to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want COP

9 > will return the magnifying frame to the screen’s center.

4

Magnify the image.

Each time you press the < u > button, the magnification within the frame will change as follows:

Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x

While in magnified view, you can use

< 9 > to scroll around the magnified image.

137

MF: Focusing Manually

5

Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.

After achieving focus, press the < u > button to return to the normal view.

6

Take the picture.

Check the exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.128).

COP

Y

138

8

Shooting Movies

Y

Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

COP

For cards that can record movies, see page 5.

If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is recommended.

Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning lines).

139

k

Shooting Movies

/ Autoexposure Shooting

When the shooting mode is set to < A >, < d >, or < F >, autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Exposure control will be the same for all the shooting modes.

Recording movies

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

A

>, <

d

>, or <

F

>.

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

X The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

3

Focus on the subject.

Y

AF or manual focus (p.131-138).

4

When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with

COP

Shoot the movie.

Press the < 0 > button to start shooting a movie.

X While the movie is being shot, the

“ o ” mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen.

X Sound will be recorded by the built-in microphone.

To stop shooting the movie, press the

< 0 > button again.

Built-in microphone

140

k Shooting Movies

Shutter-priority AE

When the shooting mode is < s >, you can manually set the shutter speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

s

>.

Shutter speed

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the desired shutter speed.

3

While looking at the LCD monitor, turn the < 6 > dial. The settable rate.

Y

• 6 5 B 4 :

COP

7

1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

4

Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.140).

141

k Shooting Movies

Aperture-priority AE

When the shooting mode is < f >, you can manually set the aperture for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

f

>.

Aperture

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the desired aperture.

3

While looking at the LCD monitor, turn the < 6 > dial.

Y

4

COP

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.140).

142

k Shooting Movies

Manual Exposure Shooting

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.

Shutter speed

Aperture

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

a

>.

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the ISO speed.

3

Press the < m > button.

X The ISO speed setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor.

Turn the < 6 > dial to set the ISO speed.

Y

Set the shutter speed and

4

aperture.

COP

To set the shutter speed, turn the

< 6 > dial. The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate.

• 6 5 B 4 :

1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

• 8 7 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

To set the aperture, turn the < 5 > dial.

If it cannot be set, set the < R > switch to the left, then turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial.

5

Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.140).

143

k Shooting Movies

Information Display

Each time you press the < B > button, the information display will change.

Maximum burst

Possible shots

Movie shooting mode

: Autoexposure ( A )

: Autoexposure ( d / F )

: Shutter-priority

: Aperture-priority

: Manual exposure

Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Battery check

Temperature warning

Histogram ( a mode)

Time code

Writing indicator

Card for recording/ playback

AF method

Drive mode

Movie recording size

Frame rate

Compression method

Headphone volume

Movie Servo AF

Recording level: Manual

LED light

AE lock

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Shutter speed

Digital compass

Recording level meter

Aperture

GPS connection indicator

Exposure compensation

COP

Y Recording movie

Image-recording quality

White balance

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Exposure mode

L : Autoexposure

:Shutterpriority AE

: Aperturepriority AE

K : Manual exposure

MOV/MP4

ISO speed

Highlight tone priority

Attenuator

Wind filter

Exposure level indicator

* Applies to a single movie clip.

144

3

Setting the Movie Recording Size

With [ z 4: Movie rec quality ] (the [ z 2 ] tab in < A >), you can set the movie recording format, movie recording size

(size, frame rate, compression method), and other functions.

The frame rate displayed on the [ Movie rec. size ] screen switches automatically depending on the [ 5 3: Video system ] setting.

MOV/MP4

You can select the movie’s recording format.

MOV format (file extension: “.MOV”).

MP4

Convenient for editing with a computer.

COP

The movie is recorded in the MP4 format (file extension: “.MP4”). This format is compatible with a much larger range of playback systems than the MOV format.

145

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie Recording Size

You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.

Image Size

L 1920x1080

Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is

16:9.

w 1280x720

High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

x 640x480

Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.

Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)

6 29.97 fps / 8 59.94 fps

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

5 25.00 fps / 7 50.00 fps

Australia, etc.).

COP

4 23.98 fps / B 24.00 fps

Mainly for motion pictures. Regarding B , see page 148.

146

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Compression Method

W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)

Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file size is larger than with IPB (Standard) and IPB (Light), the movie is more suited for editing.

X IPB (Standard)

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Since the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), you can shoot longer (with the same card).

IPB (Light)

Selectable when the movie recording format is set to [ MP4 ]. The movie is recorded at bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard) resulting in a smaller file size and compatibility with a larger range of playback systems. Of the three methods available, this method allows the capacity.

Y

COP

147

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

24.00p

Records the movie at a frame rate of 24.00 fps. Applies to Full HD quality.

If [ Enable ] is set, the movie is recorded in LBW or LBX .

If you have set [ Movie rec. size ] and then set [ 24.00p

] to [ Enable ], set the

[ Movie rec. size ] again.

COP

Y

148

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

In MOV Format (Approx.)

Movie Recording

Quality

File Size

Total Recording Time on Card

4 GB 8 GB 16 GB

8 min.

17 min.

34 min.

87 X

L

65

B4

W 5 min.

11 min.

23 min.

440 MB/min.

654 MB/min.

Movie Recording

Quality

87 X

16 min.

33 min.

1 hr. 7 min.

225 MB/min.

65

B4

X w

87 W

87 X x 65 X

In MP4 Format

6 min.

13 min.

26 min.

583 MB/min.

19 min.

38 min.

1 hr. 17 min. 196 MB/min.

50 min.

1 hr. 41 min.

3 hr. 22 min.

75 MB/min.

Y

Total Recording Time on Card

16 GB 4 GB

8 min.

8 GB COP

5 min.

11 min.

35 min.

23 min.

(Approx.)

File Size

431 MB/min.

645 MB/min.

L

65

B4

65

B4

W

X 17 min.

35 min.

1 hr. 10 min. 216 MB/min.

w

65

87 W

87 X

65 x

65 X

65

43 min.

6 min.

1 hr. 26 min.

2 hr. 53 min.

87 MB/min.

13 min.

26 min.

574 MB/min.

20 min.

40 min.

1 hr. 21 min. 187 MB/min.

2 hr. 5 min.

4 hr. 10 min.

8 hr. 20 min.

30 MB/min.

57 min.

1 hr. 55 min.

3 hr. 50 min.

66 MB/min.

2 hr. 43 min.

5 hr. 26 min. 10 hr. 53 min. 23 MB/min.

149

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting without interruption.

During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed in the movie-shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie and play it back.

Movie Shooting Time Limit Y will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the < 0 > button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.) COP

150

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

9

Image Playback

This chapter explains basic procedures to play back images and movies.

Y

COP

Images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their file names changed.

151

x

Image Playback

Single-Image Display

1

Play back the image.

Press the < x > button.

X The last image captured or played back will appear.

Select an image.

2

To play back images starting with the last image captured, turn the < 5 > dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise.

Each time you press the < B > Y change.

COP

No information Basic information display

Shooting information display

152

x Image Playback

3

Exit the image playback.

Press the < x > button to exit the image playback and return to shooting-ready state.

Shooting Information Display

With the shooting information screen displayed (p.152), you can tilt

< 9 > up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 155-156.

Detailed information

GPS information

Lens aberration correction information

Lens / Histogram information Y

Color space / Noise reduction information COP Picture Style information

153

B

: Shooting Information Display

Sample Information for Still Photos

Basic information display

Eye-Fi transfer completed Rating

Eye-Fi card transmission status Protect images

Battery check Card

Playback number/

Total images recorded

Folder number -

File number

Shutter speed

Aperture

Exposure compensation amount

Y

Image-recording quality

COP

ISO speed

Highlight tone priority

154

B : Shooting Information Display

Shooting information display

• Detailed information

Aperture

Exposure compensation amount

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

Shutter speed

Shooting mode/

Multiple exposure

Shooting date and time

ISO speed

Scroll bar

Highlight tone priority

White balance Metering mode

File size

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Y

Flash exposure compensation amount / HDR Mode /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Color temperature when < P > is set

White balance correction

Image-recording quality

AF Microadjustment

COP

155

B : Shooting Information Display

• Lens/Histogram information

Lens name

Focal length

• White balance information

Histogram display

(Brightness)

Histogram display

(RGB)

• Picture Style information

• Color space / Noise reduction information

Y

• Lens aberration correction information

COP

• GPS information

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

156

UTC (Coordinated

Universal Time)

Direction

Sample Movie Information Display

Playback

Aperture

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

B : Shooting Information Display

ISO speed

Movie file size

Movie recording format

Movie recording size

Shooting time, Playback time/

Time code

Frame rate

• < > and <

Y displayed.

Compression method

• < > mode: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.

• <

• <

COP

157

x

Searching for Images Quickly

H

Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)

You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9,

36, or 100 images on one screen.

1

Press the <

u

> button.

During image playback or when the camera is ready to shoot, press the

< u > button.

X [ 6 u ] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen.

Switch to the index display.

2

Turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise.

X The 4-image index display will Y

Turning the < 6 > dial further counterclockwise will switch the COP clockwise, it will rotate through 100,

36, 9, 4, and single-image display.

B B B B

3

Select an image.

Turn the < 5 > dial to move the orange frame and select the image.

Press the < u > button to turn off the

[ 6 u ] icon, then turn the < 6 > dial to go to the next screen or previous image.

Press < 0 > in the index display to display the selected image in the single-image display.

158

u

Magnifying Images

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.

Magnified area position

Magnify the image.

1

The image can be magnified as follows: 1. During image playback

(single-image display), 2. During the image review after image capture, and 3. From the shooting-ready state.

Press the < u > button.

X The magnified view will appear. The magnified area and [ 6 u ] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen.

The image magnification increases Y

6 > dial clockwise.

You can magnify the image up to 10x.

The image magnification decreases as you turn the < 6 > dial COP display the index display (p.158).

2

Scroll around the image.

Use < 9 > to scroll around the magnified image.

To exit the magnified view, press the

< u > button or < x > button and the single-image display will return.

159

k

Playing Movies

1

Play back the image.

Press the < x > button to display an image.

Speaker (for sound)

Select a movie.

2

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the movie to be played.

With the single-image display, the

< s1 > icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie.

In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie.

Y

0 > to switch to the single-image display.

4

3

In the single-image display, press <

0

>.

COP at the bottom of the screen.

Play back the movie.

Select [ 7 ] (Play), then press < 0 >.

X The movie will start playing.

You can pause the movie playback by pressing < 0 >.

You can adjust the sound volume during movie playback by turning the

< 6 > dial.

For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.

160

k Playing Movies

Movie Playback Panel

Operation

7 Play

8 Slow motion

5 First frame

3 Previous frame

6 Next frame

4 Last frame

X Edit mm’ ss” hh:mm:ss.ff (DF) hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)

9 Volume

3 2

Playback Description

Pressing < 0 > toggles between play and stop.

Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < 5 > dial.

The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen.

Displays the movie’s first frame.

Each time you press < 0 >, the previous frame is displayed. If you hold down < 0 >, it will rewind the movie.

Each time you press < 0 >, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down < 0 >, it will fast forward the movie.

Displays the movie’s last frame.

Displays the editing screen.

Playback position

Y

Movie play count:

Rec time ] set)

Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [ Movie

Turn the <

COP

] set)

> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in speaker (p.160) or headphones.

To return to the single-image display, press the < M > button.

161

L

Erasing Images

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images will not be erased.

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a

RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.

Erasing a Single Image

1

Play back the image to be erased.

2

Press the <

L

> button.

X The Erase menu will appear.

3

Select [ Erase

Y

], then press < image displayed will be erased.

COP

0 >. The

162

10

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer

This chapter explains how to install the Camera

Instruction Manual CD-ROM to your computer, download images from the camera to your computer, gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL

COP

Y

the PDF files on the Software Instruction Manual CD-

ROM.

Camera

Instruction Manual

EOS DIGITAL

Solution Disk

(Software)

Software

Instruction Manual

163

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

The Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM contains the following electronic manuals (PDF):

Camera Instruction Manual

Explains all the camera functions and procedures, including basic content.

Quick Reference Guide

Simple and portable guide covering basic function settings, shooting instructions, and playback instructions.

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

must be installed in your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet. After installing Adobe Reader, follow the procedure below.

COP

1

MANUAL” CD-ROM into your computer.

2

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

With Windows, double-click on the CD-ROM icon in

[ (My) Computer ]. With Macintosh, double-click on the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your computer’s operating system.

164

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

3

Double-click the START file.

X The screen shown in step 4 will appear.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your computer’s operating system.

4

Click your language.

5

read.

COP

X The instruction manual will be displayed.

You can save the PDF file to your computer.

The Camera instruction manuals (PDF files) have page links to make it quick to open the page referred to. Click on a page number in the

Contents or Index to jump to that page.

To learn how to use Adobe Reader, refer to Adobe Reader’s Help section.

165

Downloading Images to a Computer

You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to your computer. There are two ways to do this.

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

1

Install the software

(p.170)

.

2

Use the provided interface cable to connect the camera to your computer.

Use the interface cable provided with the camera.

Y

When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector COP

< camera.

> icon facing the back of the

Connect the cord’s plug to the computer’s USB terminal.

3

Use EOS Utility to transfer the images.

For details, refer to the Software

Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM

(p.171).

166

Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon. When connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.27).

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

You can use a card reader to download images to your computer.

1

Install the software

(p.170)

.

2

Insert the card into the card reader.

3

the images.

X Use Digital Photo Professional.

COP

Instruction Manual (p.171).

When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to your computer.

167

Software Overview

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk

This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras.

EOS Utility

With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot remotely from the computer connected to the camera.

Digital Photo Professional

images. You can quickly view, edit, process and print RAW images. You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images.

COP

Picture Style Editor

You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images.

168

Software Overview

An Internet connection is necessary to install the software below.

Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your Internet-connected computer. Click [ Easy installation ] ([ Install ] on a Macintosh), and the software will be installed automatically.

ImageBrowser EX

Connect to the Internet to download and install the software*.

This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images. You can easily view still photos and play back MOV and MP4 movies, and also edit and print JPEG images.

* EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing

ImageBrowser EX.

Map Utility

Y

Connect to the Internet to download and install the software.

Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by COP

The ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser programs that came with previous cameras does not support the EOS 7D Mark II’s still photos, MOV, and MP4 files. Use ImageBrowser EX.

169

Installing the Software

Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the software. The software will not be installed correctly.

Follow the procedure below to install ImageBrowser EX, Map Utility, and other software on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk. Software installation requires an Internet connection. You cannot download and install the software without an Internet connection.

Even if a previous version of ImageBrowser EX and Map Utility are installed in your computer, follow the procedure below to install/update

ImageBrowser EX and Map Utility. They are optimized for this camera.

You can also use the auto update feature to add the latest functions.

If previous versions of software other than ImageBrowser EX and Map

Utility are installed in your computer, follow the procedure below to update (overwrite) the software.

1

Insert EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM).

Y on the desktop, then double-click on [ Canon EOS Digital

2

Installer ].

Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to install.

COP

For Macintosh, click [ Install ].

If the install screen for “Microsoft Silverlight” is displayed during installation, install “Microsoft Silverlight”.

3

Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the computer restarts.

When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.

170

Software Instruction Manual

Contains the Software Instruction Manuals.

Copying and Viewing the Software Instruction Manual PDFs

1

Insert the [Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL] CD-ROM into your computer.

2

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

For Windows, the icon is displayed in [ (My) Computer ].

3

For Macintosh, the icon is displayed on the desktop.

Y

Macintosh

EOS Utility

Digital Photo Professional

COP Windows

EUx.xW_E_xx

DPPx.xW_E_xx

PSEx.xW_E_xx

Picture Style Editor

EUx.xM_E_xx

DPPx.xM_E_xx

PSEx.xM_E_xx

Map Utility MUx.x_E_xx

Instruction manual for ImageBrowser EX (ImageBrowser EX

User Guide) is included in the software.

4

Double-click the copied PDF file.

Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be installed on your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.

171

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Google ™ , Google Maps ™ , and Google Earth ™ are trademarks of Google Inc.

Map Utility uses Google Maps ™ to display images and routes traveled on a map.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

Y

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a

COP

* Notice displayed in English as required.

172

Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories

(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine

Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

COP

Y

173

Safety Warnings

Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death, and material damage.

Preventing Serious Injury or Death

• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the safeguards below:

- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.

- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries.

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera, accessories, connecting cables, etc.

Y immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)

• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent fire or an explosion.

• If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted during battery pack recharging, and prevent a fire.

COP immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging

• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.

• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a physician immediately.

• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.

• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.

• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.

174

• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and fire.

• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or fire.

• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock.

• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.

Doing so may damage your vision.

• Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when using it.

Straps or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.

• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.

Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

Y

• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

- Always insert the power plug all the way in.

- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.

COP

Also do not twist or tie the cords.

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

175

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage

• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.

• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.

• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.

• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera, promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.

• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.

Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

Y

COP

176

Digital Camera Model DS126461 Systems

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

Y

— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part

15 of the FCC rules.

COP

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)

CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)

When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC

Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:

8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or electrical shock.

177

178

USA and Canada only:

The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery.

For CA, USA only

Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

Y

COP

MEMO

COP

Y

179

COP

Y

The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of August 2014. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any lenses and accessories introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.

CPH-E105-000 © CANON INC. 2014

EOS 7D Mark II (G)

COP

Y

E

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

2

Introduction

The EOS 7D Mark II (G) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 20.2 effective megapixels, Dual

DIGIC 6, approx. 100% viewfinder coverage, high-precision and highspeed 65-point AF (Cross-type AF point: Max. 65 points), approx. 10.0 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full

HD) movie shooting, Dual Pixel CMOS AF, and GPS function.

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety

Warnings” (p.526-528) and “Handling Precautions” (p.20-21).

Refer to This Manual While Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera.

Y

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the COP

Copyrights

Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images of people and certain subjects for anything but private enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

Item Check List

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

Camera

(with body cap)

Eyecup Eg Battery Pack

LP-E6N

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E6/LC-E6E*

Interface Cable

IFC-150U II

Y

Wide Strap Cable protector power cord.)

The Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs provided are listed on the next page.

If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

Depending on the Lens Kit type, a lens instruction manual may also be included.

Be careful not to lose any of the above items.

Connecting to Peripheral Devices

When connecting the camera to a computer or printer, use the provided interface cable or one from Canon. When connecting an interface cable, also

use the provided cable protector (p.34).

In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory cards used to record images or movies.

* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/ movies. Please purchase it separately.

3

4

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs

The instruction manual consists of a booklet, leaflets, and electronic manuals (PDF files on the CD-ROM).

GPS Cautions

Quick Reference Guide

Camera Basic

Instruction Manual

Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

Contains the following manuals in PDF format:

• Camera Instruction Manual (Detailed version)

• Quick Reference Guide

Instructions for viewing the Camera Instruction Manual

CD-ROM are on pages 532-533.

Y

Software CD-ROM (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk) COP

538.

Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM

Contains software manuals in PDF format. Instructions for viewing the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM are on

page 539.

Compatible Cards

The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, it is recommended that you format the card with this camera

(p.67).

CF (CompactFlash) cards

* Type I, UDMA mode 7-compatible.

SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards supported.

Cards that Can Record Movies

When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/ writing speed as shown in the table.

IPB (Standard)

L : 8 7

Other than above

CF Card: Recording Formats

Movie Recording Size

(p.330)

ALL-I (For editing)

MOV Y MP4

30 MB/sec. or faster

10 MB/sec. or faster

10 MB/sec. or faster IPB (Light)

Movie Recording Size

COP

-

SD Card: Recording Formats

ALL-I (For editing)

MOV MP4

20 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Standard)

L : 8 7

Other than above

IPB (Light) -

20 MB/sec. or faster

6 MB/sec. or faster

4 MB/sec. or faster

If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.

If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need an even faster card.

To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.

5

6

Quick Start Guide

1

Insert the battery

(p.40)

.

To charge the battery, see page 38.

5

2

4

Insert the card

(p.41)

.

The camera-front side slot is for a CF card, and the camera-back side slot is for an SD card.

3

* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.

White index Red index

Y

(p.50)

.

Align the lens’s white or red mount index with the camera’s index of the COP

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <

f

>

(p.50)

.

Set the power switch to <

1

>

(p.45)

.

6

7

8

Quick Start Guide

While holding down the center of the Mode Dial, set it to <

A

>

(Scene Intelligent Auto)

(p.29)

.

All the necessary camera settings will be set automatically.

Focus on the subject

(p.55)

.

Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject.

raised.

Y

Take the picture

(p.55)

.

COP

9

Review the picture.

The image just captured will be displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

To display the image again, press the < x

> button (p.354).

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View

Shooting” (p.285).

To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.354).

To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.392).

7

8

Conventions Used in this Manual

Icons in this Manual

< 6 >

< 5 >

< p >

< 9 >

< 0 >

0 / 9 / 7 / 8

: Indicates the Main Dial.

: Indicates the Quick Control Dial.

: Indicates the AF area selection lever.

: Indicates the Multi-controller.

: Indicates the Setting button.

: Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. respectively after you let go of the button.

* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials, and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the

LCD monitor.

3

M

(p.**)

: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the

< M > button to change its settings.

Y the function is available only in the < d >, < s >, < f >,

< a >, or < F > mode.

COP

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions

All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch is set to < 1 > and the < R > switch is set to the left (Multi

function lock released) (p.45, 59).

It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are set to their defaults.

The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

Chapters

For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s basic operations and shooting procedures.

Introduction

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

16

Getting Started

Basic Shooting

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

Image Settings

GPS Settings

Advanced Operations

Flash Photography

Y

Shooting Movies

COP

(Live View Shooting)

Image Playback

Post-Processing Images

Sensor Cleaning

Reference

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer

37

79

85

145

197

215

253

285

313

353

397

405

Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer

411

Customizing the Camera

431

467

531

9

2

10

Contents

Introduction 2

Item Check List................................................................................. 3

Instruction Manual and CD-ROMs ................................................... 4

Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5

Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6

Conventions Used in this Manual ..................................................... 8

Chapters........................................................................................... 9

Index to Features ........................................................................... 17

Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 20

Nomenclature ................................................................................. 22

1

Getting Started 37

Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 40

Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 41

COP

Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 49

Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 50

Lens Image Stabilizer ..................................................................... 53

Basic Operation.............................................................................. 54

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 61

3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 64

Before You Start............................................................................. 67

Formatting the Card..................................................................... 67

Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 69

Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 69

Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 70

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ............................. 70

Contents

l Displaying the Grid. .................................................................. 74

Q Displaying the Electronic Level ............................................... 75

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display ..................................... 77

Help .......................................................................................... 78

2

Basic Shooting 79

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ................... 80

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................... 83

3

Setting the AF and Drive Modes

f : Selecting the AF Operation ..................................................... 86

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ......................................... 90

AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................... 95

Y

Lenses and Usable AF Points....................................................... 100

Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics .......................................... 108 COP

Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ........................................ 133

When Autofocus Fails ................................................................... 139

85

MF: Manual Focus ..................................................................... 140

o Selecting the Drive Mode ...................................................... 141

j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 143

4

Image Settings 145

Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ........................... 146

Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 149

i : Setting the ISO Speed .......................................................... 154

A Selecting a Picture Style ....................................................... 160

A Customizing a Picture Style .................................................. 163

A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 166

11

Contents

5

B : Setting the White Balance ................................................... 168

O Custom White Balance........................................................ 169

P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................ 171

u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 172

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast ................................. 175

Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 176

Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 180

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 181

Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 185

Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 187

Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 188

Changing the File Name............................................................... 190

Y

GPS Settings 197

GPS Precautions.......................................................................... 200

Acquiring GPS Signals ................................................................. 201

Setting the Positioning Interval ..................................................... 205

Using the Digital Compass ........................................................... 206

Setting Time from GPS on the Camera........................................ 209

Logging the Route Traveled ......................................................... 210

6

Advanced Operations 215

d : Program AE ............................................................................ 216

s : Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 218

f : Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 220

Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 221

a : Manual Exposure ................................................................... 222

12

Contents

7

q Selecting the Metering Mode .................................................. 224

O Setting Exposure Compensation ............................................. 226

h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ........................................... 227

A AE Lock ................................................................................... 229

F : Bulb Exposures ....................................................................... 230

w : HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting............................... 233

P Multiple Exposures.................................................................. 238

2 Mirror Lockup ......................................................................... 246

Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................ 247

F Using a Remote Switch............................................................. 248

R Remote Control Shooting........................................................... 248

H Interval Timer Shooting ...................................................... 250

Flash Photography

Y

253

D Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 254

D Using an External Speedlite...................................................... 259

COP

Using Wireless Flash .................................................................... 272

8

Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) 285

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 286

Shooting Function Settings ........................................................... 292

Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 294

Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 299

MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 308

9

Shooting Movies 313

k Shooting Movies ..................................................................... 314

Autoexposure Shooting .............................................................. 314

Shutter-priority AE ...................................................................... 315

13

14

Contents

Aperture-priority AE ................................................................... 316

Manual Exposure Shooting........................................................ 320

Shooting Still Photos.................................................................. 327

Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 329

Setting the Movie Recording Size ................................................ 330

Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 336

Silent Control................................................................................ 338

Setting the Time Code.................................................................. 339

Menu Function Settings................................................................ 342

10

Image Playback 353

x Image Playback ..................................................................... 354

B : Shooting Information Display ............................................ 356

x

Y

H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)..... 361

I Jump through Images (Jump Display).................................. 362

u

COP

X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)............................... 366

b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 367

K Protecting Images................................................................... 368

Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 371

Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 374

k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 376

k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 378

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 380

Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 382

Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 385

a Copying Images ...................................................................... 388

L Erasing Images........................................................................ 392

Contents

Changing Image Playback Settings .............................................. 394

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 394

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................ 395

11

Post-Processing Images 397

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ........................... 398

S Resizing JPEG Images ........................................................... 403

13

12

Sensor Cleaning

f Automatic Sensor Cleaning................................................... 406

Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................ 407

Manual Sensor Cleaning............................................................... 409

Y

411

Preparing to Print .......................................................................... 412

w Printing ................................................................................... 414

W

W

COP

d Transferring Images to a Computer........................................ 425

p Specifying Images for a Photobook ......................................... 429

405

14

Customizing the Camera 431

Custom Functions ......................................................................... 432

Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 434

C.Fn1: Exposure ........................................................................ 434

C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive ............................................................... 438

C.Fn3: Display/Operation ........................................................... 440

C.Fn4: Others............................................................................. 443

8 3: Custom Controls .................................................................. 445

Registering My Menu .................................................................... 459

w : Registering Custom Shooting Modes..................................... 464

15

16

Contents

16

15

Reference 467

B Button Functions ................................................................ 468

Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 470

Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 474

H Using Eye-Fi Cards................................................................. 475

System Map ................................................................................. 478

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode ............. 480

Menu Settings .............................................................................. 484

Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 495

Error Codes .................................................................................. 510

Specifications ............................................................................... 511

Handling Precautions: EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM............. 523

Y

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

531 Downloading Images to Your Computer

COP

Downloading Images to a Computer ............................................ 534

Software Overview ....................................................................... 536

Installing the Software .................................................................. 538

Software Instruction Manual ......................................................... 539

Index............................................................................................. 540

Index to Features

Power LCD Monitor

Charging the battery Î

p.38

Î

p.46

Brightness adjustment Î

p.394

Electronic level Î

p.75

Battery check

Help Î

p.78

Battery information check

Household power outlet Î

p.474

Auto power off

Î

p.470

Î

p.69

AF

AF operation

AF area selection mode Î

p.90

Card

AF point selection

Formatting Î

p.67

AF point registration

Recording function Î

p.146

Lens group

Select card Î

p.148

AF points lighting up

Release shutter without card

Lens

Attaching

Zoom

Hood

Image Stabilizer

Î

p.42

in red Y

Î

p.50

Î

Î

COP

Î

p.53

AF Custom Functions

AF Microadjustment

Focusing manually

Metering

Metering mode

Basic Settings

Drive

Language Î

p.49

Î

p.86

Î

p.93

Î

p.450

Î

p.100

Î

p.131

Î

p.108

Î

p.117

Î

p.133

Î

p.140

Î

p.224

Î

p.141

Date/Time/Zone Î

p.47

Drive mode

Î

p.143

Beeper Î

p.69

Self-timer

Î

p.153

Copyright information Î

p.195

Maximum burst

Clear all camera settings Î

p.70

Recording Images

Î

p.146

Viewfinder

Dioptric adjustment

Eyepiece cover

Î

p.54

Î

p.247

Î

p.74

Grid display

Electronic level Î

p.76

Show/hide in viewfinder Î

p.77

Recording function

Creating/Selecting a folder

File name

File numbering

Î

p.188

Î

p.190

Î

p.193

17

18

Index to Features

Image Quality Exposure

Image-recording quality Î

p.149

Exposure compensation Î

p.226

ISO speed Î

p.154

Exposure compensation with M+Auto ISO Î

p.223

Picture Style Î

p.160

AEB Î

p.227

White balance Î

p.168

AE lock Î

p.229

Auto Lighting Optimizer Î

p.175

Safety shift Î

p.436

Noise reduction for high ISO speeds Î

p.176

GPS

Noise reduction for long

GPS Î

p.197

exposures Î

p.178

Digital compass Î

p.206

Highlight tone priority Î

p.180

Logging Î

p.210

Lens aberration correction

Anti-flicker

Color space

Shooting

Shooting mode

HDR

Multiple exposures

Mirror lockup

Bulb timer

Interval timer

Î

p.181

Î

p.185

Î

p.187

Flash Y

Î

p.254

Î

p.259

Î

Î

COP

Î

p.238

Flash exposure compensation

FE lock

Flash function settings Î

p.262

Wireless shooting

Î

p.246

Î

p.257

Î

p.258

Î

p.272

External Speedlite Custom

Î

p.231

Functions Î

p.271

Î

p.250

Live View Shooting

Depth-of-field preview Î

p.221

Live View shooting Î

p.285

Remote control Î

p.248

AF method Î

p.299

Quick Control Î

p.61

Continuous AF Î

p.294

Focusing manually Î

p.308

Î

p.295

Aspect ratio

Î

p.297

Silent LV shooting

Index to Features

Movie Shooting

Movie shooting

AF method

Î

p.313

Î

p.299

Movie Servo AF Î

p.342

Movie Servo AF speed Î

p.345

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity Î

p.346

Movie recording quality Î

p.330

Sound recording Î

p.336

Time code

HDMI output

Still photo shooting

Î

p.339

Î

p.348

Î

p.327

Playback

Image review time

Single-image display

Shooting information

Index display

Image browsing

(Jump display)

Magnified view

Two-image display

Image rotation

Protect

Rating

Movie playback

Slide show

Viewing images on a

TV set

Copying

Erase

Quick Control

Î

p.70

Î

p.354

Î

p.362

Î

p.364

Î

p.366

Î

p.367

Î

p.368

Î

p.371

Î

p.378

Î

p.382

Î

p.385

Î

p.388

Î

p.392

Î

p.374

Image Editing

RAW image processing Î

p.398

Resizing JPEG Î

p.403

Printing and Transferring

Images

PictBridge

Print Order (DPOF)

Image transfer

Photobook Set-up

Î

p.411

Î

p.421

Î

p.425

Î

p.429

Customization

Custom Functions (C.Fn) Î

p.432

Custom Controls Y

Î

p.445

Î

p.459

Î

p.464

Sensor Cleaning and Dust

Reduction

Sensor cleaning Î

p.406

Append Dust Delete Data Î

p.407

Interface

Cable protector

Software

Overview

Installation

Î

p.34

Î

p.536

Î

p.538

19

Handling Precautions

20

Camera Care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock.

The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you accidentally drop the camera into water, promptly consult the nearest Canon

Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry and clean cloth. If the camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth.

Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.

Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself.

Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Y the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest

Canon Service Center.

Do not remove the focusing screen unless you are changing it. When

COP separately).

Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation.

If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before using the camera.

If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working.

Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

Handling Precautions

If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.

If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.

LCD Panel and LCD Monitor

Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.

Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.

If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.

Y

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following: physical shock, or vibration.

COP

Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic.

Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.

Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity.

Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

Store the card in a case.

Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.

Contacts

21

Nomenclature

< m > Flash exposure compensation/ISO speed

setting button (p.257/154)

< U > LCD panel

illumination button (p.60)

< B > AF area selection/

Multi-function button

(p.92/258)

< 6 > Main Dial

(p.56)

Shutter button

(p.55)

Self-timer lamp

(p.143)

Remote control

sensor (p.248)

Grip

(Battery compartment)

DC coupler cord hole

(p.474)

Depth-of-field preview button

(p.221)

< o > Drive mode selection/

AF operation/AF method selection button (p.141/86/299)

< n > White balance selection/

Metering mode selection button (p.168/224)

EF lens mount index (p.50)

Built-in flash/AF-assist beam (p.254/89)

EF-S lens mount index (p.50)

GPS antenna

Flash sync contacts

Hot shoe (p.259)

Mode Dial lock-release

button (p.56)

Mode Dial

(p.29, 56)

COP

Y

Strap mount

(p.33)

Built-in microphone

(p.337)

< D > Flash

button (p.254)

Lens release button (p.51)

Lens lock pin

Lens mount

Contacts (p.21)

Mirror (p.246, 409)

22

Body cap (p.50)

Nomenclature

< p

> AF area selection lever (p.58)

LCD panel (p.25-26)

Eyecup (p.247)

Viewfinder eyepiece

< p >

AF start button

(p.55, 86, 287, 325)

< A > AE lock

button (p.229)

< S >

AF point selection button

(p.92-93)

< B > Info button

(p.60, 75, 78, 204, 206,

288, 323, 354, 468)

Power switch (p.45)

< M > Menu button

(p.64)

Terminal cover

COP

Touch pad (p.59)

Y

< Q > Quick

Control

button (p.61,

293, 329,

374)

< Y

> External microphone IN terminal (p.337)

< n

> Headphone terminal (p.337)

< g

> Digital terminal (p.412, 425, 534)

< D

> PC terminal (p.260)

< D

> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.385)

Cable protector socket

< F

> Remote control terminal (N3 type) (p.248)

< 5 > Quick

Control Dial (p.57)

< 0 > Setting button

(p.64)

When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, also use the

provided cable protector (p.34).

23

24

Nomenclature

Dioptric adjustment knob (p.54)

<

V

> Focal plane mark

Speaker (for sound)

< b / X >

Creative Photo/

Comparative playback

(Two-image display)

button (p.160, 233,

238/366)

< A / k > Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch

(p.285/313)

< 0 > Start/Stop button

(p.286, 314)

< 9 > Multi-controller

(p.58)

< c >

Rating button

(p.370, 371)

Strap mount

(p.33)

< u >

Index/Magnify/

Reduce button

(p.361/364)

< x > Playback

button (p.354)

< L > Erase button

(p.392)

Speaker (for beeper)

LCD monitor (p.64, 286,

314, 354, 394)

Tripod socket

COP

Y

Card slot

cover (p.41)

Battery compartment cover release

lever (p.40)

Battery compartment

cover (p.40)

Access lamp (p.44)

Multi function lock switch (p.59)

Ambient light sensor (p.394)

Serial number

SD card slot (p.41)

CF card slot (p.41)

CF card eject button (p.43)

Nomenclature

LCD Panel

Shutter speed

FE lock ( FEL )

Busy ( buSY )

Built-in flash recycling ( buSY )

Multi function lock warning ( L )

No card warning ( Card )

Error code ( Err )

Cleaning image sensor ( CLn )

Logging function ( LOG )

White balance

(p.168)

Q Auto

W Daylight

E Shade

R Cloudy

Y Tungsten light

U White fluorescent light

I Flash

O Custom

P Color temperature

< h

> AEB (p.227)

Aperture

AF point selection

( [ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF )

AF point registration

( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP )

Card warning ( Card 1/2 )

Card full warning ( FuLL 1/2 )

COP

Y

Possible shots

Self-timer countdown

Bulb exposure time

Card error warning ( Err )

Error number

Remaining images to record

Metering mode (p.224)

q Evaluative metering w Partial metering r Spot metering e Center-weighted average metering

Battery check (p.46)

< r > GPS acquisition

status (p.201)

< u > White balance correction

(p.172)

< N > Auto Lighting Optimizer

(p.175)

< J > Bulb timer shooting

(p.231)

< H > Interval timer shooting

(p.250)

< w

> HDR shooting (p.233)

< P > Multiple-exposure

shooting (p.238)

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

25

26

Nomenclature

< f > CF card indicator

< J > CF card selection icon < J > SD card selection icon

ISO speed (p.154)

< g > SD card indicator

< i > ISO speed

(p.154)

< A >

Highlight tone priority

(p.180)

AF operation (p.86)

X

One-Shot AF

9

AI Focus AF

Z

AI Servo AF

4 L

Manual focus

Exposure level indicator

(Setting value)

Exposure compensation amount (p.226)

AEB range (p.227)

Flash exposure compensation amount

COP

(p.257)

Y

Drive mode (p.141)

u Single shooting o High-speed continuous shooting i Low-speed continuous shooting

B Silent single

< y > Flash exposure

compensation (p.257)

< z > Warning symbol

(p.441)

shooting

M Silent continuous shooting

Q Self-timer: 10 sec./ remote control k Self-timer: 2 sec./ remote control

Nomenclature

Viewfinder Information

Electronic level (p.76)

Spot metering circle (p.224)

Large Zone AF frame (p.91, 97)

Focusing screen

Grid (p.74)

< S > Single AF point

< O > Spot AF point

(p.95)

Exposure level indicator (Metering/

Flash metering)

Area AF frame

(p.91, 97)

Flicker detection

(p.185)

Shooting mode

White balance (p.168)

Drive mode (p.141)

COP

Y

AF operation (p.86)

Metering mode (p.224)

Standard exposure index

Exposure level scale

: 1 stop

: 1/3 stop

Overexposure

Flash overexposure

JPEG/RAW (p.149)

< i > AF status

indicator (p.89)

< z >

Warning symbol

(p.441)

Exposure level

Flash exposure level

* The display will show only the settings currently applied.

Flash underexposure

Underexposure

27

Nomenclature

28

< z > Battery check

(p.46)

< A

> AE lock (p.229)

AEB in-progress

(p.227)

< D > Flash-ready

(p.254, 259)

Improper FE lock warning

< d

> FE lock (p.259)

FEB in-progress (p.269)

< e

> High-speed sync (p.269)

< y > Flash exposure

compensation (p.257)

< i > ISO speed

(p.154)

< o > Focus indicator

(p.80, 87)

< e > AF status indicator

(p.132)

Y

Maximum burst (p.153)

Number of remaining

multiple exposures (p.240)

COP

ISO speed (p.154)

< A

> Highlight tone priority (p.180)

Exposure level indicator

Exposure compensation amount (p.226)

AEB range (p.227)

Flash exposure compensation (p.257)

Red-eye reduction lamp ON (p.256)

Shutter speed (p.218)

FE lock ( FEL )

Busy ( buSY )

Built-in flash recycling ( buSY )

Multi function lock warning ( L )

No card warning ( Card )

Error code ( Err )

Aperture (p.220)

AF point selection

( [ ] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF )

AF point registration

( [ ] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP )

Card warning ( Card 1/2 )

Card full warning ( FuLL 1/2 )

Nomenclature

Mode Dial

You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).

F

: Bulb (p.230)

a

: Manual exposure (p.222)

f

: Aperture-priority AE (p.220)

s

: Shutter-priority AE (p.218)

d

: Program AE (p.216)

A

: Scene Intelligent Auto (p.80)

Y

Custom shooting mode

COP

You can register the shooting mode ( d / s / f / a / F ), AF operation, menu settings, etc., to w , x , y Mode Dial positions

(p.464).

29

30

Nomenclature

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM Lens

Focusing ring (p.140, 308)

Focus mode switch (p.50)

Hood mount (p.52)

Zoom position index

Zoom ring lock lever

(p.51)

Filter thread

(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.51)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.53)

Lens mount index (p.50)

COP

Y

Contacts (p.21)

Nomenclature

EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM Lens

Hood mount (p.52)

Focus mode switch (p.50)

Zoom position index

Distance scale

Filter thread

(front of lens)

Zoom ring (p.51)

Focusing ring (p.140, 308)

Image Stabilizer switch (p.53)

COP

Contacts (p.21)

Y

Lens mount index (p.50)

31

Nomenclature

Battery Charger LC-E6

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.38).

Power plug

Battery pack slot

Charge lamp

32

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Y

For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Battery Charger LC-E6E

COP

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.38).

Power cord

Charge lamp

Battery pack slot

Power cord socket

Nomenclature

Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

The eyepiece cover is also attached to

the strap (p.247).

COP

Y

Eyepiece cover

33

Nomenclature

Using the Cable Protector

When connecting the camera to a computer, printer or Wireless File

Transmitter, use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (shown

in the System Map on page 478).

When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.

Using a Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable (sold separately)

1 2

Y

Cable protector Clamp

3

Provided interface cable

5

34

HDMI cable (sold separately)

Nomenclature

Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)

If you use a genuine interface cable (sold separately, p.

478), run the cable through the

clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable protector.

Clamp

COP

Y

Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may damage the digital terminal.

Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may damage the camera’s digital terminal.

As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.

To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is recommended even when connecting an HDMI cable.

35

36

MEMO

COP

Y

1

Getting Started

shooting and basic camera operations.

COP

Minimizing Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

37

Charging the Battery

1

Remove the protective cover.

Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.

LC-E6

LC-E6E

2

Attach the battery.

As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger.

To detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse.

Recharge the battery.

3

For LC-E6

As shown by the arrow, flip out the Y

For LC-E6E

COP power outlet.

X Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.

Charge Level

0-49%

50-74%

75% or higher

Fully charged

Color

Orange

Green

Charge Lamp

Display

Blinks once per second

Blinks twice per second

Blinks three times per second

Lights up

It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.

For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /

41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

38

Charging the Battery

Tips for Using the Battery and Charger

Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.

Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.

After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet.

You can attach the cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery has been recharged or not.

If the battery has been recharged, attach the cover so that the battery-shaped hole < > is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is

Y

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount COP the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.470) and purchase a new battery.

After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 10 sec.

If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.470) is 94% or higher, the battery

will not be recharged.

The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.

39

Installing and Removing the Battery

Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.

The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and darkens when the battery is removed.

Installing the Battery

1

Open the cover.

Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover.

Insert the battery.

2

Insert the end with the battery contacts.

place.

Y

3

Close the cover.

COP

Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.

Removing the Battery

Open the cover and remove the battery.

Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery.

To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts, be sure to attach the

provided protective cover (p.38) to

the battery.

40

Installing and Removing the Card

The camera can use a CF card and an SD card. Images can be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.

If both types of card are inserted, you can select which card to record

images to, or simultaneously record images on both cards (p.146-148).

If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable writing/erasing.

Installing the Card

1

Open the cover.

Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it.

CF card

SD card

Write-protect switch

2

The camera-front side slot is for a CF card, and the camera-back side slot is for an SD card.

you and insert the end with the small holes into the camera.

If the card is inserted in the wrong way, it may damage the camera.

X

The CF card eject button will stick out.

With the SD card’s label facing you, push in the card until it clicks in place.

41

Installing and Removing the Card

Card selection icon

Possible shots

3

Close the cover.

Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut.

X

When you set the power switch to

< 1

> (p.45), the number of possible

shots and the loaded card(s) will be displayed on the LCD panel.

The images will be recorded to the card indicated by the arrow < > icon.

CF card indicator

SD card indicator

COP

Y

The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk-type cards.

42

Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA cards enable faster data writing.

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or SDXC memory cards can also be used.

The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.

Even if shooting 2,000 or more shots is possible, the indicator will display only up to 1999.

Setting [ z 1: Release shutter without card ] to [ Disable ] will prevent

you from forgetting to insert a card (p.484).

Installing and Removing the Card

Removing the Card

1

Open the cover.

Set the power switch to < 2 >.

Make sure the access lamp is off, then open the cover.

If [ Recording...

] is displayed, close the cover.

Access lamp

CF card eject button

Remove the card.

2

To remove the CF card, push the eject button.

To remove the SD card, push it in gently and release it. Then pull it out.

the cover.

Y

COP

43

44

Installing and Removing the Card

When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or banging the camera around.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not

start from 0001 (p.193).

If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.

If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all

the images and then format the card with the camera (p.67). The card

may then return to normal.

Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects. contacts, contact failure may result.

Y

Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).

COP

Turning on the Power

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting

screen appears, see page 47 to set the date/time/zone.

< 1 > : The camera turns on.

< 2 > : The camera is turned off and does not operate. Set to this position when not using the camera.

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Whenever you set the power switch to < 1 > or < 2 >, sensor cleaning will be executed automatically. (A small sound may be

Y the LCD monitor will display < f >.

You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter

COP

If you repeatedly turn the power switch < 1 >/< 2 > at a short interval, the < f > icon may not be displayed. This is normal and not a malfunction.

3

Auto Power Off

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1 minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the shutter button halfway.

You can set the auto power off time with [ 5 2: Auto power off ]

(p.69).

If you set the power switch to < 2 > while an image is being recorded to the card, [ Recording...

] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording finishes.

45

Turning on the Power z

Checking the Battery Level

When the power switch is set to < 1 >, the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon ( b ) indicates that the battery will be exhausted soon.

Display

Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10 9 - 1 0

Number of Possible Shots (Approx. number of shots)

Temperature

No Flash

50% Flash Use

Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

800

670

Y

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

760

640

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

COP

• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx. 270 shots with no flash, approx. 210 shots with 50% flash use.

46

Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor often.

The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions.

The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on the lens used, the battery may exhaust faster.

For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 287.

See [ 5 3: Battery info.

] to check the battery’s condition in detail (p.470).

With Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) loaded with size AA/LR6 batteries, a four-level indicator will be displayed. ([ x ] [ m ] will not be displayed.)

3

Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the camera will automatically adjust the date/time.

Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.

1

Display the menu screen.

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

2

Under the [

Time/Zone].

Y

5

2] tab, select [Date/

Press the < Q > button and select the

[ 5 ] tab.

COP

6 > dial to select the [ 5 2 ] tab.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Date/

Time/Zone ], then press < 0 >.

3

Set the time zone.

[London] is set by default.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Time zone ].

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the time zone, then press < 0 >.

47

3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone

4

Set the date and time.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the number.

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the desired setting, then press < 0 >

(Returns to < s >).

Set the daylight saving time.

5

Set it if necessary.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Y ].

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ Z ], then press < 0 >.

When the daylight saving time is set to [ Z ], the time set in step 4 will

Y

Y ] is set, the daylight saving time will be canceled

6 and the time will go back by 1 hr.

COP

Turn the < 5 > dial to select [ OK ], then press < 0 >.

X The date/time/zone and daylight saving time will be set and the menu will reappear.

48

The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this happens, set the date/time/zone again.

After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time are set.

When performing [ Sync time between cameras ] via Wireless File

Transmitter, using another EOS 7D Mark II is recommended. If you perform [ Sync time between cameras ] using different models, the time zone or time may not be set correctly.

3 Selecting the Interface Language

The date/time that were set will start from when you press < 0 > in step

6.

In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC.

The time can be set using the GPS auto time setting function (p.209).

3

Selecting the Interface Language

Display the menu screen.

1

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

Y

2

Under the [

5

2] tab, select

[Language

K

].

COP

Q > button and select the

[ 5 ] tab.

Turn the < 6 > dial to select the [ 5 2 ] tab.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select

[ Language K ], then press < 0 >.

3

Set the desired language.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the language, then press < 0 >.

X The interface language will change.

49

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Attaching a Lens

1

Remove the caps.

Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.

White index

Red index

Attach the lens.

2

Align the lens’s red or white mount index with the camera’s mount index of the same color. Turn the lens as Y place.

3

COP

to <AF>.

< AF > stands for autofocus.

< MF > stands for manual focus.

Autofocus will not operate.

4

Remove the front lens cap.

50

Image Conversion Factor

Since the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm film format, the angle of view of an attached lens will be equivalent to that of a lens with approx. 1.6x of the focal length indicated.

Image sensor size (Approx.)

(22.4 x 15.0 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)

35mm image size

(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Zooming

Turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers.

If you want to zoom, do it before focusing. Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus.

Detaching the Lens

While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.

detach it.

Y

Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens.

COP

You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it around. Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle end, then slide the zoom ring lock lever to < LOCK >. The zoom ring can be locked only at the wide-angle end.

Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.

When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to

< 2 >.

If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.

If you purchased a lens kit with the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

lens, see “Handling Precautions” on page 523.

51

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens Hood

A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain, snow, dust, etc. adhering to the front of the lens. Before storing the lens in a bag, etc., you can attach the hood in reverse.

If the Lens and the Lens Hood Have a Mount Index

1

Align the red dots, then turn the hood as shown by the arrow.

Align the red dots on the hood and lens edge, then turn the hood as shown by the arrow.

Turn the hood as shown in the

2

illustration.

Y

COP

52

If the hood is not attached properly, it may obstruct the image’s periphery, making the image look dark.

When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood when turning it. Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the hood, resulting in failure to turn.

Lens Image Stabilizer

When you use the IS lens’s built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is based on the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens as an example.

* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.

1

Set the IS switch to <

1

>.

Also set the camera’s power switch to

< 1 >.

2

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The Image Stabilizer will operate.

Take the picture.

3

When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder, press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

Y

COP

The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the exposure.

For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to < 2 >. If < 1 > is set, Image

Stabilizer misoperation may occur.

The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat.

The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens’s focus mode switch set to either < AF > or < MF >.

When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to < 1 > with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to

< 2 > is recommended.

The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod.

With the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM or EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

USM lens, the Image Stabilizer mode may switch automatically to suit the shooting conditions.

53

Basic Operation

Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.

Turn the knob left or right so that the

AF points in the viewfinder look sharp.

If the knob is difficult to turn, remove

the eyecup (p.247).

If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is recommended.

Holding the Camera

shake.

COP

Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.

To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 285.

54

Basic Operation

Shutter Button

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway

This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec.

(metering timer/ 0 ).

Pressing Completely

picture.

Y

Preventing Camera Shake

COP

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:

• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.

• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button completely.

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > shooting modes, pressing the

< p > button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway.

If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.

Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.

55

Basic Operation

Mode Dial

Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial.

Use it to set the shooting mode.

6

Main Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<

6

> dial.

When you press a button such as

< n > < o > < m >, the Y

6 sec. ( 9 ). During this time, you can turn the < 6 > dial to change the setting.

When the function selection ends or if

COP camera will be ready to shoot.

Use this dial to select or set the metering mode, AF operation, ISO speed, AF point, etc.

(2) Turn the <

6

> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel, turn the < 6 > dial to change the setting.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture, etc.

56

The operations in (1) are possible even when the < R > switch is set to

the right (Multi function lock, p.59).

Basic Operation

5

Quick Control Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<

5

> dial.

When you press a button such as

< n > < o > < m >, the respective function remains selected for

6 sec. ( 9 ). During this time, you can turn the < 5 > dial to change the setting.

When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will be ready to shoot.

Use this dial to select or set the white

(2)

balance, drive mode, flash exposure

Turn the <

5

Y

> dial only.

While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel, turn the < 5 > dial to change the

COP

Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount, the aperture setting for manual exposures, etc.

The operations in (1) are possible even when the < R > switch is set to

the right (Multi function lock, p.59).

57

58

Basic Operation p

AF Area Selection Lever

The < p > lever can be tilted to the right. Use it to select the AF area selection mode.

After pressing the <

S

> button, tilt the <

p

>.

Pressing the < S > button will make the AF area selection mode and AF point selectable for 6 sec. ( 9 ).

Then, when you tilt the < p > to the right within that time, you can change the AF area selection mode.

You can also press the < S > button and then press the < B > button to select the AF area selection mode.

Y

9

Multi-controller

The < 9

COP

Use it to select the AF point, correct the white balance, move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View shooting, scroll around magnified images during playback, operate the

Quick Control screen, etc.

You can also use it to select and set menu items.

For menus and Quick Control, the

Multi-controller works only in the vertical and horizontal directions

< V > < U >. It does not work in diagonal directions.

Basic Operation h

Touch Pad

During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, sound

recording level, and headphone volume (p.338).

This function works when [ z 5: Silent Control ] is set to [ Enable h ].

After pressing the <

Q

> button, tap the <

5

> dial’s inner ring at the top, bottom, left, or right.

R

Multi Function Lock

By setting [ 8 3: Multi function lock

Y

R > switch to the right, you can prevent the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial,

Multi-controller, and AF area selection lever from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.

COP

> switch set to the left:

Lock released

< R > switch set to the right:

Lock engaged

If the < R > switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked camera controls, < L > will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD

panel. On the shooting settings display (p.60), [

LOCK ] will be displayed.

59

60

Basic Operation

U

LCD Panel Illumination

Turn on ( 9 ) or off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the < U > button.

During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the

LCD panel illumination.

Displaying Shooting Function Settings

After you press the < B > button a number of times, the shooting function settings will be displayed.

With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode

Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.469).

Pressing the < Q

function settings (p.61).

Y

Press the < B > button again to turn off the display.

COP

Q

Quick Control for Shooting Functions

You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the

LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.

1

Press the <

Q

> button

( 7 )

.

X The Quick Control screen will appear.

< A > mode

Set the desired functions.

2

Use < 9 > to select a function.

X

The setting of the selected function is displayed.

Turn the < 5 > or < 6 > dial to change the setting.

< d

Y

/ s / f / a / F > modes

COP

3

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

X The captured image will be displayed.

In the < A > mode, you can only select the recording function and card, and set the image-recording quality, drive mode, and flash firing.

61

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen

Aperture (p.220)

AE lock* (p.229)

Shutter speed (p.218)

Highlight tone priority* (p.180)

Shooting mode* (p.29)

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting

(p.226/227)

ISO speed (p.154)

Flash exposure

compensation (p.257)

Picture Style (p.160)

Custom Controls (p.445)/

Flash firing ( A mode)

AF operation (p.86)

Image-recording quality

(p.149)

White balance (p.168)

Metering mode (p.224)

Recording function/Card selection

(p.146)

White balance correction /

White balance bracketing

(p.172/173)

(p.175)

Y

Drive mode (p.141)

COP

62

* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control screen.

Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions

Function Setting Screen

Ð

< 0 >

Select a function and press < 0 >.

The function setting screen will appear.

Turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to change some of the settings. There are also functions that are set by pressing the button.

Press < 0 > to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen.

When you select <

> (p.445) and

press the < M > button, the previous screen will reappear.

Y

COP

63

64

3

Menu Operations

You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-recording quality, date/time, etc.

< M > button

< 6 > Main Dial

LCD monitor

< 5 > Quick Control Dial

< Q > button

< 0 > button

A

Mode Menu Screen

Y

COP

* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the < A > mode.

d

/

s

/

f

/

a

/

F

Mode Menu Screen

3 : Playback

2 : AF z : Shooting

5 : Set-up

8 : Custom Functions

9 : My Menu

Main tabs

Secondary tabs

Menu settings

Menu items

3 Menu Operations

Menu Setting Procedure

1

Display the menu screen.

Press the < M > button to display the menu screen.

Select a tab.

2

Each time you press the < Q > button, the main tab will switch.

Turn the < 6 > dial to select a secondary tab.

For example, the [ z 4 ] tab refers to the screen displayed when the z

3

(Shooting) tab’s fourth dot “ ” from the left is selected.

Y

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the item, then press < 0 >.

COP

4

Select the setting.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the desired setting.

The current setting is indicated in blue.

5

Adjust the setting.

Press < 0 > to set it.

6

Exit the setting.

Press the < M > button to exit the menu and return to shooting-ready.

65

3 Menu Operations

The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the < M > button to display the menu screen.

You can also use < 9 > to operate and set menu functions. (Except for

[ 3 1: Erase images ] and [ 5 1: Format card ].)

To cancel the operation, press the < M > button.

For details about each menu item, see page 484.

Dimmed Menu Items

Example: When Multi Shot

Noise Reduction is set

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The menu item is dimmed if another function setting is overriding it.

Y selecting the dimmed menu item and pressing < 0 >.

If you cancel the overriding function’s setting, the dimmed menu item will become settable.

Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.

66

With [ 5 4: Clear all camera settings ], you can reset the menu functions to

the default settings (p.70).

Before You Start

3

Formatting the Card

If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera.

When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the card.

1

Select [Format card].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Format card ], then press < 0 >.

Y

Select the card.

2

[ f ] is the CF card, and [ g ] is the SD COP

0 >.

3

Select [OK].

X The card will be formatted.

When [ g ] is selected, low-level

formatting is possible (p.68).

For low-level formatting, press the

< L > button to append [ Low level format ] with a checkmark < X >, then select [ OK ].

67

Before You Start

Format the card in the following cases:

The card is new.

The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.

The card is full with images or data.

A card-related error is displayed

(p.510).

Low-level Formatting

Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card.

Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card, the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.

You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [ Cancel ]. Even in this case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as usual.

Y

COP

When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the personal data from being leaked.

Before using a new Eye-Fi card

(p.475)

, the software on the card must be installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.

68

The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card.

This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

Before You Start

3

Disabling the Beeper

You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or during self-timer operation.

1

Select [Beep].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Beep ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Disable].

Select [ Disable ], then press < 0 >.

X The beeper will not sound.

3

Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off

To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set Y automatically, set this to [ Disable ]. After the power turns off, you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other buttons.

1

COP

Select [Auto power off].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select [ Auto power off ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Even if [ Disable ] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30 min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)

69

70

Before You Start

3

Setting the Image Review Time

You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [ Hold ]. To not have the image displayed, set [ Off ].

1

Select [Image review].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Image review ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the desired time.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

If [ Hold ] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses.

Y

3

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings

N reverted to their defaults.

1

Select [Clear all camera settings].

Under the [ 5 4 ] tab, select [ Clear all camera settings ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [OK].

X Clearing all the camera settings will reset the camera to the default

settings on pages 71-73.

Before You Start

Shooting Function Settings AF Settings

AF operation

AF area selection mode

One-Shot AF

Single-point AF

(Manual Selection)

Case 1 - 6

AF point selection Center

Registered AF point Canceled

Metering mode

AI Servo 1st image priority q (Evaluative metering) AI Servo 2nd

ISO speed Auto image priority

ISO speed range

Minimum limit: 100

Maximum limit: 16000

Lens electronic

MF

Case1/Parameter settings of all cases cleared

Equal priority

Equal priority

Enable after

One-Shot AF

AF-assist beam firing Enable

Auto ISO range

Minimum limit: 100

Maximum limit: 6400

Minimum shutter speed

Flash exposure compensation

One-Shot AF release priority

Drive mode

Exposure compensation/AEB

Auto u (Single shooting)

Canceled

Canceled

Lens drive when

AF impossible

Selectable AF point

Y selection mode

Red-eye reduction Disable

Multiple exposure Disable

HDR Mode Disable HDR

AF area selection COP

Interval timer

Bulb timer

Disable

Disable

AF point

Initial AF point,

AI Servo AF Anti-flicker shooting Disable

Focus priority

Continue focus search

65 points

All items selected

M-Fn button

Same for both vertical/horizontal

Auto

Mirror lockup

Viewfinder display

Disable Automatic AF point selection:

EOS iTR AF

Enable

Viewfinder level Hide

VF grid display Disable

Show/hide in viewfinder

Only Flicker checkmarked

Manual AF point selection pattern

Stops at AF area edges

AF point display during focus

Selected

(constant) Custom Functions Unchanged

Flash control

Flash firing

E-TTL II

Flash metering

Flash sync. speed in Av mode

Enable

Evaluative flash metering

Auto

VF display illumination Auto

AF point during

AI Servo AF

Non illuminated

AF status in viewfinder

Show in field of view

AF

Microadjustment

Disable/

Adjustment amount retained

71

Before You Start

72

Image Recording Settings

Image quality 73

Picture Style Standard

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Standard

Camera Settings

Auto power off

Beep

1 min.

Enable

Release shutter without card

Enable

Peripheral illumination correction

Enable/Correction data retained

Chromatic aberration correction

Enable/Correction data retained

Image review time 2 sec.

Highlight alert

AF point display

Playback grid

Disable

Disable

Off

Distortion correction

Disable/Correction data retained

Histogram display Brightness

Movie playback count Unchanged

White balance Q (Auto) Magnification 2x (magnify

Custom White Balance Canceled

White balance shift Canceled

White balance bracketing

Color space

Long exposure from center) (Approx.) Y

Disable

Image jump w/ 6 e (10 images)

On z D

Canceled sRGB

Auto rotate

LCD brightness

COP

Eye-Fi settings

Disable

Auto noise reduction

Unchanged

Disable

Language Unchanged High ISO speed noise reduction

Standard

GPS and digital compass settings Highlight tone priority Disable

Disable

Record function Standard Video system Unchanged

File numbering

File name

Auto cleaning

Dust Delete Data

Continuous

Preset code

Enable

Erased z button display options

All items selected m button function Rating

Custom shooting mode Unchanged

Copyright information Unchanged

Configure:

MY MENU*

Menu display

Unchanged

Normal display

Before You Start

Live View Shooting Settings

Live View shooting Enable

AF method u +Tracking

Continuous AF

Grid display

Disable

Off

3:2 Aspect ratio

Exposure simulation

Enable

Silent LV shooting

Metering timer

Movie Shooting Settings

Movie Servo AF Enable

AF method u +Tracking

Grid display Off

Movie recording quality

MOV/MP4

Movie recording size

MOV

NTSC: L6X

PAL: L5X

Mode 1

8 sec.

24.00P

Disable

Sound recording Auto

Wind filter Disable

Attenuator Disable

Movie Servo AF speed

When active Y

Movie Servo AF

Always on

Standard

0 (Standard) tracking sensitivity

Silent LV shooting Mode 1

COP

8 sec.

Time code

Count up Unchanged

Start time setting Unchanged

Movie recording count

Unchanged

Movie playback count

Unchanged

HDMI

Drop frame

Silent control

V button function

Unchanged

Unchanged

Disable h

/ z

HDMI output +

LCD

No mirroring

HDMI frame rate Auto

73

l

Displaying the Grid

You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the shot.

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [VF grid display].

Select [Enable].

3

X

When you exit the menu, the grid will Y

COP

74

You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and

before you start shooting a movie (p.295, 344).

Q

Displaying the Electronic Level

You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt.

Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor

1

Press the <

B

> button.

Each time you press the < B > button, the screen display will change.

Display the electronic level.

If the electronic level does not appear, set [ 5 3: z button display options ] so that the

(p.468).

Y

Check the camera’s tilt.

The horizontal and vertical tilt are displayed in 1° increments.

When the red line turns green, it indicates that the tilt is almost corrected.

Vertical level Horizontal level

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.

±1°.

If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.

During Live View shooting and before movie shooting (except with u +

Tracking), you can also display the electronic level as described above.

75

Q Displaying the Electronic Level

3

Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder

An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.

Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct the camera tilt while shooting.

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Viewfinder level].

3

Select [Show].

Y

4

Press the shutter button halfway.

COP

This also works with vertical shooting.

1°

1° 4° or greater

7°

7.5° or greater

76

Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.

±1°.

3

Setting the Viewfinder Information Display

N

The shooting function settings (Shooting mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation, Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.

By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [

X

].

1

Select [Viewfinder display].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select

[ Viewfinder display ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].

3

Checkmark [

X

] the information to

Y

Select the information to display and press < 0 > to append a checkmark COP checkmark [ X ] to all the information to be displayed. Then select [ OK ].

X When you exit the menu, the checkmarked information will appear

in the viewfinder (p.27).

If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality will not be displayed in the viewfinder.

When you press the < n > or < o > button, operate the lens’s focus mode switch, or when a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing is

used and the AF/MF switches as the lens’s focusing ring is turned (p.119),

the respective information will appear in the viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked.

77

78

Help

When [ z Help ] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is displayed only while you hold down the < B > button. If the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To scroll, hold down the < B > button and turn the < 5 > dial.

Example: [ 2 1: Case2]

B

Î

Example: [ 2

Y

B COP

Example: [ 8 3: Multi function lock]

B

Î

Scroll bar

2

Basic Shooting

Y

A >

In the < A > mode, all you do is point and shoot and the COP shooting function settings cannot be changed.

Scene Intelligent Auto

Auto Lighting Optimizer

In the < A

> mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175) will adjust

the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast. It is also enabled by default in the < d >, < s >, or

< f > mode.

79

80

A

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

< A > is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus

automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.83).

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

A

>.

Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the lock release button at the center.

Area AF frame

Focus indicator

2

Aim the Area AF frame over the subject.

All the AF points will be used to focus, and the camera will focus on the closest object.

Aiming the center of the Area AF Y

3

Focus on the subject.

COP focus.

X

During the autofocus operation,

< i > will be displayed.

X

The AF point that achieves focus will be displayed. At the same time, the beeper will sound and the focus indicator < o > will light up.

X

In low light, the AF point(s) will light up briefly in red.

X

If necessary, the built-in flash will be raised automatically.

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

X The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.

After you finish shooting, push down the built-in flash with your fingers.

The < A > mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the mode to < d >, < s >, < f >, or < a >, set a Picture Style other than

< D

>, then shoot again (p.160).

FAQ

The focus indicator < o

Y

> blinks and focus is not achieved.

Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press

the shutter button halfway (p.55). If you are too close to the subject,

COP

When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red in low-light conditions.

Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points. As long as the AF point covering the desired subject lights up, you can take the picture.

The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator < o > does not light up.)

It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject. (The focus indicator < o > does not light up.) You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject.

Note that focus lock (p.83) will not work in this case.

81

82

A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to < MF > (manual focus), set it to < AF > (autofocus).

The flash fired even though it was daylight.

For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control to set [ Flash firing ] to [ b

] (p.61).

The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.

Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture may come out extremely bright (overexposure).

In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.

Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to Y

The built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is normal and not a malfunction.

COP unnaturally dark.

The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture.

A

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective.

In the < A > mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot Y

Shooting a Moving Subject

COP

In the < A > mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes) while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.

When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.

83

84

A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

A

Live View Shooting

You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is

called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 285.

1

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

A

>.

2

Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor.

Press the < 0 > button.

3

X

The Live View image will appear on

X the LCD monitor.

focus.

Y

Press the shutter button halfway to will turn green and the beeper will sound.

4

Take the picture.

Press the shutter button completely.

X The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

X When the playback display ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.

Press the < 0 > button to end the

Live View shooting.

3

Setting the AF and

Drive Modes

Y suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes.

COP

You can also select the AF operation and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject.

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

In the < A > mode, the AF operation and AF area selection mode are set automatically.

< AF > stands for autofocus. < MF > stands for manual focus.

85

f

: Selecting the AF Operation

N

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In the < A > mode, “AI Focus AF” is set automatically.

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF>.

2

Set the <

d

> <

s

> <

f

> <

a

>

<

F

> mode.

3

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

4

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the COP

: One-Shot AF

9 : AI Focus AF

Z : AI Servo AF

86

In the < d >, < s >, < f >, < a >, or < F > mode, AF is also possible by pressing the < p > button.

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

AF point

Focus indicator

When focus is achieved, the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed, and the focus indicator < o > in the viewfinder will also light up.

With evaluative metering (p.224), the

exposure setting will be set at the same time as focus is achieved.

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.

Y

COP

If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator < o > in the viewfinder will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again

or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.139).

If [ z 1: Beep ] is set to [ Disable ], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved.

After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered by the Area AF frame.

87

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

When the AF area selection mode (p.90) is set to 65-point automatic

selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF frame covers the subject.

With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

Also, the focus indicator < o > in the viewfinder will not light up.

AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically

Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.

After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts COP subject.

88

When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active, the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator < o > in the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.

f : Selecting the AF Operation N

AF Operation Indicator

When you press the shutter button halfway and the camera is focusing with

AF, the < i > icon will appear on the lower right of the viewfinder.

In the One-Shot AF mode, the icon also appears if you press the shutter button halfway after focus is achieved.

The AF operation indicator can be displayed outside the viewfinder’s image

area (p.132).

AF Points Lighting Up in Red

< f >, < a >, or < F

Y d >, < s >,

> mode, you can set whether to have the AF points

light up in red (p.131).

COP

Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway, the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to help autofocusing.

In the < A > mode, if [ Flash firing ] is set to < b >, the built-in flash will not emit the AF-assist beam.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.

The built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is normal and not a malfunction.

The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.

In the < d >, < s >, < f >, < a >, or < F > mode, press the < I > button to raise the built-in flash. Then it will fire the AF-assist beam when necessary.

89

90

S

Selecting the AF Area and AF Point

N

The camera has 65 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ. For details,

see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 100.

AF Area Selection Mode

You can select one of seven AF area selection modes. For the setting

procedure, see page 92.

Single-point Spot AF

(Manual selection)

For pinpoint focusing.

Y

Single-point AF

(Manual selection)

COP

AF point expansion

(Manual selection )

The manually-selected AF point < S > and four adjacent AF points < w > (above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus.

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)

The manually-selected AF point < S > and the surrounding AF points < w > are used to focus.

Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

One of nine zones is used to focus.

Large Zone AF

(Manual selection of zone)

Y is used to focus.

AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set automatically in the < A > mode.

91

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode

1

Press the <

S

> button.

( 9 )

2

Operate the <

p

> or <

B

> button.

Look through the viewfinder and operate the < p > or < B > button.

Each time you tilt < p > to the right, the AF area selection mode changes.

Each time you press the < B >

Y changes.

COP

92

With [ 2 4: Select AF area selec. mode ], you can limit the selectable

AF area selection modes (p.124).

If you set [ 2 4: AF area selection method ] to [ S 9 Main Dial ], you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the < S > button, then turning the < 6

> dial (p.125).

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

Selecting the AF Point Manually

You can manually select the AF point or zone.

1

Press the <

S

> button.

X The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder.

In AF point expansion modes, adjacent AF points will also be displayed.

In the Zone AF mode, the selected zone will be displayed.

Select an AF point.

2

The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt < 9 >. If you press < 9

Y

> straight down, the center

AF point (or center zone) will be selected.

You can also select a horizontal AF COP

6 > dial and select a vertical AF point by turning the < 5 > dial.

In the Zone AF mode, turning the

< 6 > or < 5 > dial will change the zone in a looping sequence.

When [ 2 4: Initial AF pt, AI Servo AF ] is set to [ Initial pt selected

] (p.127), you can use this method to manually select the AI

Servo’s AF starting position.

When you press the < S > button, the LCD panel displays the following:

• 65-point automatic selection AF, Zone AF, Large Zone AF: AF

• Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF, and AF point expansion: SEL

(Center)/ SEL AF (Off-center)

With [ 2 5: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern ], you can set either [ Stops at

AF area edges ] or [ Continuous

] (p.129).

93

94

S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point N

AF Point Display Indications

Pressing the < S > button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are

horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 99-103.

Registering the AF point

You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.

When you use the button or lever set with the [ 8 3: Custom Controls ]

(p.445) menu’s detailed settings screens for [

Metering and AF start ],

[ Switch to registered AF point ], [ Selected AFpt z Cent/Reg AFpt ],

[ Direct AF point selection ], or [ Register/recall shooting func ], you can instantly switch from the current AF point to the registered AF point.

For details on registering the AF point, see page 450.

Y

COP

AF Area Selection Modes

N

Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)

For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than with single-point AF (manual selection). Select one

AF point < > to focus.

Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.

Since Single-point Spot AF (manual selection) covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult during hand-held shooting or for a moving subject.

Single-point AF (Manual selection)

Select one AF point < S > to be used for focusing.

Y

COP

)

The manually-selected AF point < S > and adjacent AF points < w >

(above, below, on the left and on the right) are used to focus. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.

With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point < S > must focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in focusing on the target subject.

With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points, the expanded AF points < S > will also be displayed along with the manually-selected AF point < S >.

95

96

AF Area Selection Modes N

AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)

The manually-selected AF point < S > and surrounding AF points < w > are used to focus. The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point expansion (manual selection ), so the focusing is executed over a wider area. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.

AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point expansion (manual selection

) mode (p.95).

Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)

points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point selection. It is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.

COP point expansion.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as < S >.

AF Area Selection Modes N

Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF, it is superior in focusing on the subject. Since auto selection AF is used, it is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in achieving focus, making it effective for moving subjects.

However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on a specific target may be more difficult than with single-point AF.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as < S >.

65-point automatic selection AF

Y

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set automatically in the < A > mode.

COP

S > that achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed, it means they all have achieved focus. This mode tends to focus on the nearest subject.

With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s starting position with [ Initial AF pt, AI Servo

AF

] (p.127). As long as the Area AF frame can

track the subject during shooting, focusing will continue.

The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as

< S >.

97

98

AF Area Selection Modes N

When AI Servo AF mode is set with 65-point automatic selection AF,

Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or Zone AF (manual selection of zone), the active AF point < S > will keep switching to track the subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject. Also, in low temperatures, the tracking response may become slower.

With Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), focusing with the

Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.

If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.

In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.

When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in red. This is a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).

In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).

With [ 2 4: Orientation linked AF point

Y selection mode + AF point (or only the AF point) separately for the

horizontal and vertical orientations (p.125).

With [ 2 4: Selectable AF point ], you can change the number of

COP

AF Sensor

The camera’s AF sensor has 65 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. With f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture lenses, high-precision AF is possible with the center AF point.

Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable AF points and AF pattern will differ. For details, see pages

100-107.

Diagram Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal

Y

Dual cross-type focusing: f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal

COP

The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision focusing with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture lenses. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on subjects difficult for AF. It is provided at the center AF point.

The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a horizontal pattern, it can detect vertical lines. It covers all 65 AF points. The center AF point and the adjacent AF points at the top and bottom are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.

The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a vertical pattern, it can detect horizontal lines. It covers all 65 AF points.

The center AF point and the adjacent AF points on the left and on the right are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.

99

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Although the camera has 65 AF points, the number of usable AF points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens. The lenses are thereby classified into seven groups from A to G.

When using a lens in Groups E to G, fewer AF points will be usable.

See which group each lens belongs to on pages 104-107. Check

which group the lens in use belongs to.

When you press the < S > button, the AF points indicated by the mark will blink (The / AF points will stay lit). Regarding lighting up or

blinking of the AF points, see page 94.

Regarding new lenses marketed after the sales start of EOS 7D Mark II in the second half of 2014, check the Canon Web site to see which group they belong to.

Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

Group A

Y

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

COP tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

100

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group B

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

Group C

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

Group D

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and high-

Y

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

COP

Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

101

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group E

Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible. (Not possible with all 65

AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

Group F

Y

AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area

(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.

COP tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF points sensitive to vertical lines

(AF points in the horizontal array at the top and bottom) or horizontal lines (AF points in a vertical array on the left and right).

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

102

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Group G

AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points above, below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable: Single-point AF (manual selection),

Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), and AF point expansion

(manual selection ).

If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f/8

(between f/5.6 and f/8), AF will be possible.

: Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.

: AF point sensitive to vertical lines

(top and bottom AF points adjacent to the center AF point) or horizontal Y adjacent to the center AF point).

Not manually selectable. It works only when “AF point expansion

COP

)” is selected.

: Disabled AF points (not displayed).

If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/5.6 (maximum aperture number is between f/5.6 and f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low-contrast or low-light subjects.

When Extender EF2x is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM lens, AF is not possible.

If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/8 (maximum aperture number exceeds f/8), AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting.

103

Lenses and Usable AF Points

Lens Group Designations

EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM

EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM

EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM

EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM

EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM

EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II

EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II

EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

EF14mm f/2.8L USM

EF14mm f/2.8L II USM

EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye

EF20mm f/2.8 USM

EF24mm f/1.4L USM

EF24mm f/1.4L II USM

EF24mm f/2.8

EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM

EF28mm f/1.8 USM

EF28mm f/2.8

EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM

EF35mm f/1.4L USM

EF35mm f/2

EF35mm f/2 IS USM

EF40mm f/2.8 STM

EF50mm f/1.0L USM

EF50mm f/1.2L USM

EF50mm f/1.4 USM

EF50mm f/1.8

EF50mm f/1.8 II

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro

EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro

+ LIFE SIZE Converter

EF85mm f/1.2L USM

104

B

C

C

C

C

C

B

E

C

B

A

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM

EF85mm f/1.8 USM

EF100mm f/2 USM

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro

EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM

EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM

EF135mm f/2L USM

EF135mm f/2L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

A

EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF2x B

EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus) A

A

A

A

B

E

B

A

EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM C

C EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

C

B EF200mm f/1.8L USM

B

B

B

B

B

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

Y

B*

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

A*

A

A

A

A

A

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF200mm f/2L IS USM

COP

A

A

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

EF200mm f/2.8L USM

B

A

B

A + Extender EF1.4x

A

A EF200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x

F

B

A

A

A

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

B

A

B

A

A EF200mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x

B

A

A EF300mm f/2.8L USM A

A

A

B

A

A

A

A

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

B*

B*

A

B

B

EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM A

B

A

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF300mm f/4L USM

B

B

B

EF300mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

B

EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x G (f/8)

EF300mm f/4L IS USM B

B

EF300mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF500mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF500mm f/4.5L USM

EF500mm f/4.5L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF600mm f/4L USM

EF600mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x G (f/8)*

G (f/8)

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

EF600mm f/4L IS USM A

+ Extender EF1.4x

B*

EF600mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

B*

A

B*

B*

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

Y

+ Extender EF2x

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM

A

B

EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

COP

B

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

A EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM

B

B

G (f/8)

B

B

G (f/8)

E

G (f/8)

E

G (f/8)*

B

A

A

B

EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM

EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM

B

B

G (f/8)

B

G (f/8)*

B

B*

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF400mm f/5.6L USM

B

B

B

G (f/8)

EF400mm f/5.6L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF500mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

B

G (f/8)

B

B

G (f/8)

EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM

EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM

EF17-40mm f/4L USM

EF20-35mm f/2.8L

EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM

EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM

EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM

EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM

EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM

EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM

EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5

EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II

A

E

E

B

D

B

C

F

A

A

B

A

B

A

105

Lenses and Usable AF Points

EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM

EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM

EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM

EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6

EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6

EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM

EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5

EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II

EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III

EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6

EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5

EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM

EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5

EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

106

A

B*

B*

G

B

C

D

E

E

F

B

G

D

D

B

B

A

F

F

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

E

E

E

E

B

E

E

E

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

EF70-200mm f/4L USM

+ Extender EF2x

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

B

B

B

B

E

EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM

+ Extender EF2x

Y

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM

E

F

E

F

EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM

EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM

EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM

EF80-200mm f/2.8L

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6

EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF100-200mm f/4.5A

EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM

EF100-300mm f/5.6

EF100-300mm f/5.6L

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM

EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM

+ Extender EF1.4x

B

B

B

G (f/8)

B

B

G (f/8)

D

E

E

B

B

B

A

B

C

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

D

D

B

C

G (f/8)

B

B

A

B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x + Extender EF1.4x

B

B

B

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x + Extender

EF1.4x

G (f/8)

EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender

1.4x + Extender EF2x

TS-E17mm f/4L

TS-E24mm f/3.5L

TS-E24mm f/3.5L II

TS-E45mm f/2.8

TS-E90mm f/2.8

G (f/8)

B

B

B

A

A

COP

Y

Lenses and Usable AF Points

When using a lens and an Extender in the combination marked with *, precise focus may not be achieved with AF. Refer to the instruction manual of the lens or Extender used.

Both “Extender EF1.4x” and “Extender EF2x” apply to all the I/II/III models

(under this grouping).

107

3

Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics

N

You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool.”

1

Select the [

2

1] tab.

2

Select a case.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select a case icon, then press < 0 >.

X The selected case will be set. The selected case is indicated in blue.

Case 1 to 6

As explained on pages 113 to 115, case 1 to 6 are six setting

Y tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to select the case applicable to the subject or scene.

Case Icon

COP

Applicable Subjects Page

Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting For any moving subject.

109

Tennis players, butterfly

Continue to track subjects,

Case 2 swimmers, freestyle

109

ignoring possible obstacles skiers, etc.

Case 3

Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points

Starting line of a bicycle race, alpine downhill skiers, etc.

110

Case 4

Case 5

Case 6

For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly

Soccer, motor sports, basketball, etc.

For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction (disabled in Single-point AF mode)

For subjects that change speed and move erratically (disabled in Single-point AF mode)

Figure skaters, etc.

110

111

Rhythm gymnastics, etc.

112

108

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: 0

• Accel./decel. tracking: 0

• AF pt auto switching: 0

Standard setting suited for any moving subject. Works with many subjects and scenes.

Select [ Case 2 ] to [ Case 6 ] for the following: When an obstacle cuts across the AF points or the subject tends to stray from the AF points, when you want to focus on a subject appearing suddenly, when the speed of a moving subject changes suddenly, or when the subject dramatically moves horizontally or vertically.

Y

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle enters COP the AF points. Effective when there may be an obstacle blocking the subject or when you do not want to focus on the background.

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: -1

• Accel./decel. tracking: 0

• AF pt auto switching: 0

If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the target subject, setting [ Tracking sensitivity ] to [ -2 ] may give better results

(p.113).

109

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points

Once an AF point starts tracking the subject, this setting enables the camera to consecutively focus on subjects at different distances. If a new subject appears in front of the target subject, the camera will start focusing on the new subject. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1

• Accel./decel. tracking: +1

• AF pt auto switching: 0

If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting

[ Tracking sensitivity ] to [ +2

] may give better results (p.113).

Y

Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly

whose speed can change dramatically and suddenly.

Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration, sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: 0

• Accel./decel. tracking: +1

• AF pt auto switching: 0

110

If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed, setting [ Accel./decel. tracking ] to [ +2

] may give better results (p.114).

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction

(disabled in Single-point AF mode)

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: 0

• Accel./decel. tracking: 0

• AF pt auto switching: +1

Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right, the

AF point will switch automatically to focus-track the subject. Effective for shooting subjects that move dramatically up, down, left, or right.

This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF

Y automatic selection AF.

This setting is not available with the

Single-point Spot AF (manual

COP

(manual selection) modes.

If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting

[ AF pt auto switching ] to [ +2

] may give better results (p.115).

111

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically

(disabled in Single-point AF mode)

Default settings

• Tracking sensitivity: 0

• Accel./decel. tracking: +1

• AF pt auto switching: +1

Geared for tracking moving subjects whose speed can change dramatically and suddenly. Also, if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left or right and it is difficult to focus, the AF point switches automatically to track the subject.

This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), Zone AF (manual

Y

(manual selection of zone), or 65-point automatic selection AF.

This setting is not available with the

COP selection) and Single-point AF

(manual selection) modes.

112

If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed, setting [ Accel./decel. tracking ] to [ +2 ] may give better results

(p.114).

If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting [ AF pt auto switching ] to [ +2

] may give better results (p.115).

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Parameters

Tracking sensitivity

Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during AI Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points or when the AF points stray from the subject.

0

Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.

Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an Y longer than with the -1 setting.

However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take COP

Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1

The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more responsive when focusing on the next subject than +1.

However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject.

[ Tracking sensitivity ] is the feature named [ AI Servo tracking sensitivity ] in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.

113

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Acceleration/deceleration tracking

This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving subjects whose speed can suddenly change dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly, etc.

0

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minimal change in moving speed).

+2 / +1

Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera

Y approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the COP with +1.

However, since the camera will be sensitive even to the slight movements of the subject, the focusing may momentarily become unstable.

114

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

AF point auto switching

This sets the switching sensitivity of the

AF points as they track the subject moving dramatically up, down, left, or right.

This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF

(manual selection of zone), or 65-point automatic selection AF.

0

+2 / +1

Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to COP subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.

Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with +1.

However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the wrong AF point.

115

3 Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics N

Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings

You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto switching.

1

Select a case.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the icon of the case you want to adjust.

2

Press the <

c

> button.

The selected parameter will have a purple frame.

Select the parameter to adjust.

3

Select the parameter to adjust, then press < 0 >.

Y

4 the setting screen will appear.

COP

Adjust the setting, then press < 0 >.

X The adjustment is saved.

The default setting is indicated by the light gray [ C ] mark.

To return to the screen in step 1, press the < c > button.

116

In step 2, if you press the < c > button and then press the < L > button, you can revert the 1, 2 and 3 parameter settings above for each case.

You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu

(p.459). Doing so will change the selected case’s settings.

When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the adjusted case and then take the picture.

3

Customizing AF Functions

N

With the [ 2 2 ] to [ 2 5 ] menu tabs, you can set the AF functions to suit your shooting style or subject.

2

2: AI Servo

AI Servo 1st image priority

You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the first shot with AI Servo AF.

: Equal priority

Y

: Release priority

COP not been achieved. It is effective when you want to give priority to capturing the image rather than achieving focus.

: Focus priority

Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image.

117

3 Customizing AF Functions N

AI Servo 2nd image priority

You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF.

: Equal priority

Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed. In low light or with low-contrast subjects, shooting speed may slow down.

: Shooting speed priority

Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus.

: Focus priority

shooting speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.

COP

118

Under shooting conditions which activate anti-flicker shooting (p.185), even

if [ Shooting speed priority ] is set, the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.

3 Customizing AF Functions N

2

3: One Shot

Lens electronic MF

With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electronic focusing ring, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing.

EF50mm f/1.0L USM

EF85mm f/1.2L USM

EF85mm f/1.2L II USM

EF200mm f/1.8L USM

EF300mm f/2.8L USM

EF400mm f/2.8L USM

EF400mm f/2.8L II USM

EF500mm f/4.5L USM

EF600mm f/4L USM

EF1200mm f/5.6L USM

EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM

EF40mm f/2.8 STM EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM

EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-6.3 IS STM EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

OFF: Disable in AF mode

: Enable after One-Shot AF

Y you can adjust the focus manually.

: Disable after One-Shot AF

COP adjustment is disabled.

When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to < AF >, manual focusing is disabled.

119

3 Customizing AF Functions N

AF-assist beam firing

Enables or disables the AF-assist beam from the built-in flash or EOSdedicated external Speedlite.

ON: Enable

The AF-assist beam is emitted when necessary.

OFF: Disable

The AF-assist beam is not emitted.

Prevents the AF-assist beam from disturbing others.

1

: Enable external flash only

The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary only if an

AF-assist beam.

Y

IR: IR AF assist beam only

When an external Speedlite is attached, only infrared AF-assist

COP a burst of small flashes.

With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.

120

If an external Speedlite’s [ AF-assist beam firing ] Custom Function is set to

[ Disabled ], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam regardless of this setting.

3 Customizing AF Functions N

One-Shot AF release priority

You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for One-Shot AF.

: Focus priority

The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot.

: Release priority

Priority is given to taking the picture instead of achieving focus. This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus.

Y achieved.

COP

121

3 Customizing AF Functions N

2

4

Lens drive when AF impossible

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.

ON: Continue focus search

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the correct focus.

OFF: Stop focus search

If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the lens drive stops. This prevents the Y

COP

122

Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can become grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to achieve focus next time. Setting [ Stop focus search ] is recommended.

3 Customizing AF Functions N

Selectable AF point

You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. If 65point automatic selection AF is set, the Area AF frame (entire AF area) will be used for AF regardless of the setting below.

: 65 points

All 65 AF points will be manually selectable.

: 21 points

Twenty-one major AF points will be manually selectable.

: 9 points

Nine major AF points will be manually selectable.

Y

COP

With a lens from Groups E to G (p.102-103), the number of manually

selectable AF points will be fewer.

Even with settings other than [ 65 points ], AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points),

Zone AF (manual selection of zone) and Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) are still possible.

When you press the < S > button, the AF points which are not manually selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.

123

3 Customizing AF Functions N

Select AF area selection mode

You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press

< 0 > to append a checkmark < X >. Then select [ OK ] to register the setting.

: Manual select.:Spot AF

For pinpoint focusing with a narrower area than single-point AF (manual selection).

: Manual selection:1 pt AF

One of the AF points set by

[ Selectable AF point ] setting can be selected.

: Expand AF area:

adjacent AF points (above, below, on the left, and on the right).

COP surrounding AF points.

: Manual select.:Zone AF

The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.

: Manual select.:Large Zone AF

The AF area is divided into three focusing zones for focusing.

: Auto selection:65 pt AF

The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.

124

The < X > mark cannot be deleted from [ Manual selection:1 pt AF ].

If the attached lens belongs to group G (p.103), you can only select

[ Manual select.:Spot AF ], [ Manual selection:1 pt AF ], and [ Expand

AF area: ].

3 Customizing AF Functions N

AF area selection method

You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.

p

/ :

S 9

M-Fn button

After you press the < S > button, operating the < p > or < B > button changes the AF area selection mode.

p

/ :

S 9

Main Dial

After you press the < S > button, operating the < p > or < 6 > dial changes the AF area selection mode.

When [ S 9 Main Dial ] is set, use the < 9 > to move the AF point horizontally.

Orientation linked AF point

Y

You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point COP

: Same for both vert/horiz

The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.

125

3 Customizing AF Functions N

: Separate AF pts: Area+pt

The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom).

When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be set for the respective orientation. Whenever you change the camera orientation during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set for that orientation.

: Separate AF pts: Pt only

The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation

(1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area respective camera orientation.

Y

This works with Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,

Expand AF area: , and Expand AF area:Surround.

COP shooting, the manually-selected AF point will switch to match the respective camera orientation. Even if you change the AF area selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,

Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround, the AF point set for the respective orientation will be retained.

If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), the zone will switch to match the respective camera orientation.

126

If you clear the camera settings to their defaults (p.70), the setting will be

[ Same for both vert/horiz ]. Also, your settings for the three camera orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Singlepoint AF (Manual selection) with the center AF point selected.

If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.100-

103, particularly Group G), the setting may be cleared.

3 Customizing AF Functions N

Initial AF Point, AI Servo AF

You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.

: Initial AF pt selected

AI Servo AF will start with the manually-selected AF point when the

AF operation is set to AI Servo AF and the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.

: Manual AF pt

If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,

Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection: Y start with the AF point which was selected before the AF area selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.

with the [ 8

COP

Metering and AF start ]

(p.450), [

Switch to registered AF func.

] (p.452), or [

Register/ recall shooting func

] (p.457), you can press the assigned button

during Manual select: Spot AF, Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand

AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround to switch to AI Servo AF using Auto selection: 65 pt AF instead of the AF point used immediately before.

AUTO: Auto

The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to suit the shooting conditions.

When [ Manual AF pt ] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone that corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or Large Zone

AF (manual selection of zone).

127

3 Customizing AF Functions N

Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF

EOS iTR* AF executes autofocus by recognizing faces and subject colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to

Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or 65-point automatic selection AF.

* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: The metering sensor recognizes the subject and the AF points track it.

ON: Enable

The AF point is automatically selected based not only on AF information, but also faces and other details. it focused on first, then continues to track and focus the subject by switching AF points to track that color. This makes it easier to keep track of the subject than when only AF information is available.

COP

OFF: Disable

AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.

(The AF will not use information based on faces, subject colors and other details.)

128

If [ Enable ] is set, the camera will take longer to focus than when

[ Disable ] is set.

When EOS iTR AF is operating, maximum continuous shooting speed with < o > set will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also, under low-light conditions, the continuous shooting speed may decrease.

Even if you set [ Enable ], expected result may not be obtained depending on the shooting conditions and subject.

Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,

AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information.

Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light conditions.

3 Customizing AF Functions N

2

5

Manual AF point selection pattern

During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side. This function works in AF area selection modes other than Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), and 65point automatic selection AF (works with AI Servo AF).

: Stops at AF area edges

Convenient if you often use an AF point at the periphery.

: Continuous

Instead of stopping at the outer edge, Y

COP

129

3 Customizing AF Functions N

AF point display during focus

You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following cases: 1. When selecting the AF point(s), 2. When the camera is ready to shoot (before AF operation), 3. During AF operation, and 4. When focus is achieved.

: Selected (constant)

The selected AF point(s) is always displayed.

: All (constant)

All AF points are always displayed.

: Selected (pre-AF, focused)

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.

: Selected (focused)

Y

The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4 and for when AF starts.

OFF: Disable display

COP

For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.

130

3 Customizing AF Functions N

VF display illumination

You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red when focus is achieved.

AUTO: Auto

The AF points automatically light up in red under low light.

ON: Enable

The AF points light up in red regardless of the ambient light level.

OFF: Disable

The AF points do not light up in red.

AF.

With [ Auto ] or [ Enable ] set, you can set whether the AF point is to be light up in red (blink) when you press the < Q

Y

> button during AI Servo

OFF: Non illuminated

COP

ON: Illuminated

AF points used for focusing light up in red during AI Servo AF. This will not work if [ VF display illumination ] is set to [ Disable ].

When you press the < S > button, the AF points will light up in red regardless of this setting.

The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set with [ Show/hide in viewfinder

] (p.77) will also light up in red.

131

3 Customizing AF Functions N

AF status in viewfinder

The AF status icon indicating AF operation can be displayed in the viewfinder’s field of view or outside the field of view.

: Show in field of view

The AF status icon < i > is displayed in the lower right of the viewfinder’s field of view.

: Show outside view

The < e > icon is displayed below the focus indicator < o > outside the viewfinder’s field of view.

The AF status icon is displayed while you press the shutter button halfway Y p > button.

AF Microadjustment

see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.

132

3

Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus

N

Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the

adjustment, read “Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page 138.

Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent accurate focusing from being achieved.

Adjust All by Same Amount

Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the result. Repeat this until appropriate adjustment is made. During AF, regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

1

Select [AF Microadjustment].

Under the [

Y

2 5 ] tab, select [ AF

], then press < 0 >.

COP

2

Select [All by same amount].

3

Press the <

B

> button.

X The [ All by same amount ] screen will appear.

133

3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus N

4

Make the adjustment.

Set the adjustment amount. The adjustable range is ±20 steps.

Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus.

Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus.

After making the adjustment, press

< 0 >.

Select [ All by same amount ], then press < 0 >.

5

adjustment.

Y

Take a picture and play back the

image (p.354) to check the COP

If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted point, adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it comes out with focus behind the targeted point, adjust toward the

“-: ” side.

If necessary, repeat the adjustment.

134

If [ All by same amount ] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.

3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus N

Adjust by Lens

You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.

When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.

Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. If you use a zoom lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.

1

Select [Adjust by lens].

Registered number

Press the <

Y

B

> button.

2

3

X

The [ Adjust by lens ] screen will appear.

COP

information.

Check the lens information.

Press the < B > button.

X The screen will show the lens name and a 10-digit serial number. When the serial number is displayed, select

[ OK ] and go to step 4.

If the lens’s serial number cannot be confirmed, “0000000000” will be displayed. In this case, enter the number by following the instructions on the next page.

Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed in front of some lens serial numbers, see the next page.

135

3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus N

Entering the Serial Number

Select the digit to be entered, then press < 0 > so that < r > appears.

Enter the number, then press < 0 >.

After entering all the digits, select

[ OK ].

Lens Serial Number

In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.

Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.

The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.

Y ten digits.

The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.

COP lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.

136

If [ Adjust by lens ] is selected and an Extender is used, the adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.

If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you can register another lens.

Single focal length lens

Zoom lens

3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus N

Make the adjustment.

4

For a zoom lens, select the wide-angle

(W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing

< 0 > will turn off the purple frame and make the adjustment possible.

Set the adjustment amount, then press < 0 >. The adjustable range is

±20 steps.

Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus.

Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus.

Y angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.

After completing the adjustment, COP

M > button to return to the screen in step 1.

Select [ Adjust by lens ], then press

< 0 >.

5

Check the result of the adjustment.

Take a picture and play back the

image (p.354) to check the

adjustment result.

If the shooting result comes out with focus in front of the targeted point, adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it comes out with focus behind the targeted point, adjust toward the

“-: ” side.

If necessary, repeat the adjustment.

137

3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus N

When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the

AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range.

Clearing All AF Microadjustments

When [ Clear all ] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the

< L > button will clear all the adjustments made for [ All by same amount ] and [ Adjust by lens ].

Y

Cautions for AF Microadjustment COP conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.

Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not be achieved at the suitable position.

The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.

The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or movie shooting.

The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings

(p.70). However, the setting itself will be [

Disable ].

138

Notes for AF Microadjustment

It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.

Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.

For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is recommended.

When Autofocus Fails

Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator < o > blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:

Subjects Difficult to Focus

Subjects with very low contrast

(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)

Subjects in very low light

Strongly backlit or reflective subjects

(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)

Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point

(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)

Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point

(Example: Night scenes, etc.)

Repetitive patterns

(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.) Y

(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the

subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.83).

(p.140).

COP

MF > and focus manually

Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.

Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting

or movie shooting are listed on page 306.

139

When Autofocus Fails

MF: Manual Focus

Focusing ring

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

X < 4 L > will be displayed on the

LCD panel.

2

Focus on the subject.

Focus by turning the lens’s focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

COP

Y

140

If you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually, the focus indicator < o > will light up when focus is achieved.

With 65-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves focus, the focus indicator < o > will light up.

o

Selecting the Drive Mode

Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject.

1

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

2

Select the drive mode.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial.

u : Single shooting be taken.

o : High-speed continuous shooting

COP will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 10.0 shots/ sec.

i : Low-speed continuous shooting

While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be taken at a speed of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.

B : Silent single shooting

Single shooting with less shooting sound than < u > during viewfinder shooting.

M : Silent continuous shooting

Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than < i > during viewfinder shooting. The continuous shooting speed will be approx. 4.0 shots/sec.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, shooting will not be silent even if < B > or < M > is set.

141

o Selecting the Drive Mode

Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control k : 2-sec. self-timer/remote control

For self-timer shooting, see page 143. For remote control

shooting, see page 248.

When EOS iTR AF is operating (p.128), maximum continuous shooting

speed with < o > will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also, under low-light conditions, the continuous shooting speed may decrease.

If < B > or < M > is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter button completely until the picture is shot will be slightly longer than standard.

If you perform high-speed continuous shooting in low temperatures when be slow.

Y

In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the subject and the lens used.

o

COP speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), EOS iTR AF:

OFF, and Anti-flicker shooting: Disable. The continuous shooting speed may decrease depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, remaining battery capacity, etc.

* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS

USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.

If the [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

] menu’s [ Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. separately

] (p.146) and the recording quality setting for the CF

card [ f ] and SD card [ g

] is different, the maximum burst (p.151) will

decrease. When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since

shooting will be temporally disabled (p.153).

142

By setting [ 8 2: Continuous shooting speed

] (p.439), you can manually

set the continuous shooting speed.

j

Using the Self-timer

Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.

1

2

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

Select the self-timer.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial.

Q : 10-sec. self-timer k : 2-sec. self-timer

Take the picture.

3

Look through the viewfinder, focus on

X the subject, then press the shutter Y

X operation with the self-timer lamp, beeper, and countdown display (in COP

Two seconds before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will light up and the beeper will sound faster.

If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,

attach the eyepiece cover (p.247). If stray light enters the viewfinder when

the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.

The < k > enables you to shoot while not touching the camera mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or long exposures.

After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.354) to check

focus and exposure is recommended.

When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.83) on an

object at the same distance as where you will stand.

To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the < o > button.

143

MEMO

COP

Y

144

4

Image Settings

Y balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, antiCOP

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

145

3

Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you can start recording captured images. When only one card is inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on

pages 146-148.

If you insert both a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images.

[ f ] indicates the CF card, and [ g ] the SD card.

Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted

1

Select [Record func+card/folder sel.].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Record func+card/folder sel.

], then press

< 0 >.

Y

2

Select [Record func.].

COP

3

Select the recording method.

Select the recording method, then press < 0 >.

146

3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

Standard

Images will be recorded to the card selected with [ Record/play ].

Auto switch card

Same as with the [ Standard ] setting, but if the card becomes full, the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will be created.

Rec. separately

You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.149). Each

image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the imagerecording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording quality, such as to 73 and 1 , or c and 41 .

Rec. to multiple

Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously Y

COP

If [ Rec. separately ] is set and different recording qualities are set for the

CF card and SD card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will

decrease (p.151).

Even if [ Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. to multiple ], movies cannot be recorded to both the CF card and SD card at the same time. If [ Rec. separately ] or [ Rec. to multiple ] is set, the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for [ Playback ].

[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]

The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD card.

The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card having the lower number.

If one of the cards becomes full, [ Card* full ] will be displayed and shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set

[ Record func.

] to [ Standard ] or [ Auto switch card ], and select the card with remaining capacity to continue shooting.

147

3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback

Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback

If [ Record func.

] is set to [ Standard ] or [ Auto switch card ], select the card for recording and playing images.

If [ Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. separately ] or [ Rec. to multiple ], select the card for playing images.

Standard / Auto switch card

Select [Record/play].

Select [ Record/play ], then press

< 0 >.

f : Record images to and play images back from the CF card.

g : Record images to and play card.

Y

Select the card, then press < 0 >.

Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple

COP

Select [ Playback ], then press < 0 >.

f : Play back the CF card’s images.

g : Play back the SD card’s images.

Select the card, then press < 0 >.

148

3

Setting the Image-Recording Quality

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG image-recording quality settings: 73 , 83 , 74 , 84 , 7 a , 8 a , b , c .

There are three RAW image quality settings: 1 , 41 , 61

(p.152).

1

Select [Image quality].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Image quality ], then press < 0 >.

Standard / Auto switch card / Rec. to multiple

Select the image-recording quality.

2

To select a RAW quality, turn the

< 6 > dial. To select a JPEG quality, turn the < 5 > dial.

Y

****x****

**M

” number indicates the recorded pixel count, and [ *** ] is the number of possible COP

Press < 0 > to set it.

Rec. separately

Under [ 5 1: Record func+card/ folder sel.

], if [ Record func.

] is set to

[ Rec. separately ], select CF card

[ f ] or SD card [ g ], then press

< 0 >.

Select the desired image-recording quality, then press < 0 >.

149

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Image-recording Quality Setting Examples

73 only 1 only

1 + 73 61 + 84

COP

Y

150

If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.

The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD panel.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)

Image

Quality

73

83

74

JPEG

84

7 a

8 a b

*1 c

*2

1

Pixels

Recorded

20M

8.9M

5.0M

Printing

Size

A2

A3

A4

File Size

(MB)

6.6

3.5

3.6

1.8

2.3

1.2

1.3

0.3

24.0

Possible

Shots

1090

2060

2000

3810

3060

5800

5240

20330

290

2.5M

0.3M

20M

9x13 cm

-

A2

41 RAW 11M A3 19.3

350

RAW

61

1

73

5.0M

20M

20M

A4

A2

A2

13.3

24.0+6.6

Y 510

220

+

JPEG

41

73

61

73

11M

20M

5.0M

20M

A3

A2

A4

A2

19.3+6.6

13.3+6.6

260

340

*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.

*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site.

Maximum

Burst

130 (1090)

2060 (2060)

2000 (2000)

3810 (3810)

3060 (3060)

5800 (5800)

5240 (5240)

20330 (20330)

24 (31)

28 (31)

35 (35)

18 (19)

18 (19)

18 (19) b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.

The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and

Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB CF card. These figures will vary by the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom

Functions, and other settings.

The maximum burst applies to < o > high-speed continuous shooting.

Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 7 CF card based on

Canon’s testing standards.

Even if you use a UDMA card, the maximum burst indicator will not change.

The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.

151

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).

The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41

(Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine), 8

(Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).

RAW Images

A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as follows: 1 , 41 , or 61 .

A 1 image can be processed with [ 3 1: RAW image processing ]

(p.398) and saved as a JPEG image. (

41

Y

61 images cannot be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not change, you can process the RAW image according to different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.

COP and generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those adjustments.

152

RAW Image Processing Software

To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional

(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.

Previous versions of DPP may not be able to process RAW images taken with this camera. If your computer has a previous version of DPP, update it with the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM provided with this camera. (The previous version will be overwritten.)

Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.

3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality

One-touch Image Quality Setting

With Custom Controls, you can assign the image-recording quality to the < B > button or depth-of-field preview button so you can switch to it momentarily. If you assign [ One-touch image quality setting ] or

[ One-touch image quality (hold) ] to the < B > button or depth-offield preview button, you can quickly switch to the desired imagerecording quality and shoot.

For details, see Custom Controls (p.445).

Under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

], if [ Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. separately ], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.

Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

displayed on the bottom right both in the viewfinder and on the shooting function settings screen.

COP displayed.

The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.

If the maximum burst is displayed as “ 99 ”, it indicates that you can shoot 99 or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “ buSY ” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.

If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous

shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed on page 151.

153

i

: Setting the ISO Speed

N

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. With the < A > mode selected, the ISO speed will

be set automatically (p.156).

Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 317 and

321.

1

Press the <

m

> button.

( 9 )

Set the ISO speed.

2

While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

Y

- ISO 16000 in 1/3-stop increments.

“ A ” indicates Auto ISO. The ISO speed will be set automatically

COP

ISO Speed Guide

ISO speed

Shooting Situation

(No flash)

Flash Range

ISO 100 - ISO 400

ISO 400 - ISO 1600

Sunny outdoors

Overcast skies or evening time

ISO 1600 - ISO 16000, H1, H2 Dark indoors or night

The higher the ISO speed, the farther the flash range will be.

* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.

154

i : Setting the ISO Speed N

As H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200) are expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower than usual.

If [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] is set to [ Enable

] (p.180), ISO 100/125/

160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600), and H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200) cannot be selected.

Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.

Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable.

When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images may not be recorded properly.

If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure may result.

Y

Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to H2.

Under [ z

COP

ISO speed range ] to expand the settable ISO speed range up to H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200)

(p.157).

Even if [ 8 1: ISO speed setting increments ] is set to [ 1-stop ], you can still select ISO 16000.

155

i : Setting the ISO Speed N

Auto ISO

If the ISO speed is set to “ A ” (Auto), the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway.

As indicated below, the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode.

Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting

A d / s / f / a

Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400

Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 16000

*1

F ISO 400

*1

With flash ISO 400

*1*2*3*4

*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [ settings set in [ Auto ISO range ].

Y

] and [ Maximum ]

*2: If fill flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to a possible minimum of ISO 100 (except in the < a > and < F > modes).

*3: Except in the < A > mode.

*4: In the < d

COP

ISO 1600 will be set automatically.

156

i : Setting the ISO Speed N

3

Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range

You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600), and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2

(equivalent to ISO 51200).

1

Select [ISO speed settings].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ ISO speed settings ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [ISO speed range].

Y

Set the minimum limit.

Select the minimum limit box, then press < 0 >.

Select the ISO speed, then press

< 0 >.

4

Set the maximum limit.

Select the maximum limit box, then press < 0 >.

Select the ISO speed, then press

< 0 >.

5

Select [OK].

157

i : Setting the ISO Speed N

3

Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO

You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100

- ISO 16000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 12800, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 16000.

1

Select [Auto ISO range].

Set the minimum limit.

2

Select the minimum limit box, then press < 0 >.

Y

< 0 >.

3

COP

Select the maximum limit box, then press < 0 >.

Select the ISO speed, then press

< 0 >.

4

Select [OK].

158

The [ Minimum ] and [ Maximum ] settings will also apply to the ISO speed

safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.436).

i : Setting the ISO Speed N

3

Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO

You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set automatically will not be too slow when Auto ISO is set.

This is convenient in the < d > and < f > modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.

It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.

1

Select [Min. shutter spd.].

Automatically set

Manually set

Set the desired minimum shutter

2

speed.

Select [ Auto ] or [ Manual ].

Y

Auto ], turn the < 6 > dial to set the desired speed (slower or faster) compared to the standard speed, then press < 0 >.

COP

Manual ], turn the < 6 > dial to select the shutter speed, then press < 0 >.

If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with [ Auto ISO range ], a shutter speed slower than the [ Min. shutter spd.

] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.

This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.

When [ Auto: 0 ] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [ Slower ] to [ Faster ] is equivalent to a single shutter speed stop.

159

A

Selecting a Picture Style

N

By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject.

The Picture Style is set automatically to [ D ] (Auto) in the < A > mode.

1

Press the <

b

> button.

2

Select [

A

].

X The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

Y

3

Select a Picture Style.

COP

160

You can also select the Picture Style with [ z 3: Picture Style ].

A Selecting a Picture Style N

Picture Style Characteristics

D Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.

If the desired color tone is not obtained with [ Auto ], use another Picture

Style.

P Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose

Picture Style suitable for most scenes.

Q Portrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.

Y

By changing the [ Color tone

] (p.163), you can adjust the skin tone.

R Landscape

Effective for impressive landscapes.

S Neutral

Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and subdued images.

U Faithful

Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. Images will appear subdued.

161

A Selecting a Picture Style N

V Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [ Monochrome ] setting is canceled.

You can display < z > in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when

[ Monochrome

] is set (p.441).

W User Def. 1-3

You can register a basic style such as [ Portrait ], [ Landscape ], a

Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.166). Any User

Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as the [ Standard ] Picture Style.

Symbols

The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters such as [ Sharpness ] and [ Contrast ]. The numerals indicate the COP

] and [ Contrast ], for each

Picture Style.

Symbols

Y g Sharpness h Contrast i Saturation j Color tone k Filter effect (Monochrome) l Toning effect (Monochrome)

162

A

Customizing a Picture Style

N

You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters such as [ Sharpness ] and [ Contrast ]. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To customize [ Monochrome

], see page 165.

1

Press the <

b

> button.

2

Select [

A

].

X

The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

3

Select a Picture Style.

Select a Picture Style, then press

< B

Y

Select a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

[ Sharpness ], then press < 0 >.

163

A Customizing a Picture Style N

5

Set the parameter.

Adjust the parameter as desired, then press < 0 >.

Press the < M > button to save the adjusted parameters. The Picture

Style selection screen will reappear.

X

Any parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue.

Parameter Settings and Effects g Sharpness h Contrast i Saturation j Color tone

0: Less sharp outline +7: Sharp outline

-4: Low contrast +4: High contrast

-4: Low saturation

-4: Reddish skin tone

COP

Y +4: High saturation

+4: Yellowish skin tone

164

By selecting [ Default set.

] in step 4, you can revert the respective

Picture Style to its default parameter settings.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted

Picture Style, then shoot.

A Customizing a Picture Style N

V

Monochrome Adjustment

For Monochrome, you can also set [ Filter effect ] and [ Toning effect ] in addition to [ Sharpness ] and [ Contrast ] explained on the preceding pages.

k

Filter effect

With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more.

Filter

N: None

Ye: Yellow

Or: Orange

R: Red

G: Green

Sample Effects

Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.

The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look crisper.

Y

The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.

The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.

COP

Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.

Increasing the [ Contrast ] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

l

Toning effect

By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in that color. It can make the image look more impressive.

The following can be selected: [ N:None ],

[ S:Sepia ], [ B:Blue ], [ P:Purple ] or

[ G:Green ].

165

A

Registering a Picture Style

N

You can select a base Picture Style such as [ Portrait ] or [ Landscape ], adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [ User Def. 1 ],

[ User Def. 2 ], or [ User Def. 3 ].

You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for parameters such as sharpness and contrast.

You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered

to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.536).

1

2

Press the <

b

> button.

Select [

A

].

X The Picture Style selection screen will appear.

Y

Select [User Def. *].

3

Select [ User Def. * ], then press COP

4

Press <

0

>.

With [ Picture Style ] selected, press

< 0 >.

5

Select the base Picture Style.

Select the base Picture Style, then press < 0 >.

To adjust the parameters of a Picture

Style that is registered to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software), select the Picture Style here.

166

A Registering a Picture Style N

6

Select a parameter.

Select a parameter such as

[ Sharpness ], then press < 0 >.

7

Set the parameter.

Adjust the parameter as desired, then press < 0 >.

For details, see “Customizing a

Picture Style” (p.163).

Press the < M > button to register the modified Picture Style. The

Picture Style selection screen will

Y

X

The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [ User Def. * ].

COP

If a Picture Style has already been registered under [ User Def. * ], changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style.

If you execute [ Clear all camera settings

] (p.70), all the [

User Def. * ] settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style registered via EOS

Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to the default setting.

To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [ User

Def. * ], then shoot.

Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,

refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual (p.536).

167

B

: Setting the White Balance

N

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the [ Q ] (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If naturallooking colors cannot be obtained with [ Q ], you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

< A > is automatically set in the [ Q ] mode.

1

Press the <

n

> button.

( 9 )

Display

Y

U

D

O

P

Q

W

E

R

Select a white balance setting.

2

While looking at the LCD panel or Y

5 > dial.

Mode

COP

(Approx.)

Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)

3000-7000 Auto

Daylight

Shade

Cloudy, twilight, sunset

5200

7000

6000

3200 Tungsten light

White fluorescent light 4000

Automatically set* Flash use

Custom (p.169)

Color temperature (p.171)

2000-10000

2500-10000

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.

Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.

168

You can also set this with [ z 2: White balance ].

B : Setting the White Balance N

White Balance

To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting. With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as the basis for the color correction. With this function, pictures with natural color shades can be taken.

O

Custom White Balance

Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure under the actual light source to be used.

1

Shoot a white object.

Y the illustration) over a plain, white object.

standard exposure set for the white object.

You can use any white balance setting.

2

Select [Custom White Balance].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ Custom

White Balance ], then press < 0 >.

X The custom white balance selection screen will appear.

169

B : Setting the White Balance N

3

Import the white balance data.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image captured in step 1, then press

< 0 >.

X

On the dialog screen that appears, select [ OK ] and the data will be imported.

Press the < M > button to exit the menu.

4

Press the <

n

> button.

( 9 )

Select the custom white balance.

5

Look at the LCD panel and turn the

< 5

Y

O >.

COP

If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.

In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured while the Picture Style was set to [ Monochrome ], multiple-exposure images, and images shot with another camera.

170

Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector

(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.

The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be registered under < O >. If you perform step 3, the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased.

B : Setting the White Balance N

P

Setting the Color Temperature

You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is for advanced users.

1

Select [White balance].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ White balance ], then press < 0 >.

Set the color temperature.

2

Select [ P ].

Turn the < 6 > dial to set the color Y

0 >.

The color temperature can be set from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in

100 K increments.

COP

When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.

If you set [ P ] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the camera’s color temperature reading.

171

u

White Balance Correction

N

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels.

This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters.

White Balance Correction

1

Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ WB

Shift/Bkt.

], then press < 0 >.

Sample setting: A2, G1

2

Use < 9 > to move the “ ” mark to the appropriate position.

magenta, and G for green. The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color.

On the right of the screen, “ Shift ” indicates the direction and correction amount, respectively.

Pressing the < L > button will cancel all the [ WB Shift/Bkt.

] settings.

Press < 0 > to exit the setting.

172

During the white balance correction, < u > will be displayed on the LCD panel.

You can display < z > in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when

white balance correction is set (p.441).

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

u White Balance Correction N

White Balance Auto Bracketing

With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing

(WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in single-level increments.

B/A bias ±3 levels

Set the white balance bracketing amount.

In step 2 for “White Balance

Correction”, when you turn the < 5 > dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will change to “ ” (3 points).

Y sets the M/G bracketing.

X On the right, “ Bracket ” indicates the COP amount.

Pressing the < L > button will cancel all the [ WB Shift/Bkt.

] settings.

Press < 0 > to exit the setting.

Bracketing Sequence

The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

173

u White Balance Correction N

During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third the normal number.

Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the image to the card.

You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.

When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.

You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing

(p.435).

“ Bkt.

” stands for bracketing.

COP

Y

174

3

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast

N

If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto

Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [ Standard ]. With JPEG images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.

[ Standard ] is automatically set in the < A > mode.

1

Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ Auto

Lighting Optimizer ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select the setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Y

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary.

Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.

If the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too bright, set [ Low ] or [ Disable ].

If a setting other than [ Disable ] is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [ Disable ].

If [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] is set to [ Enable ], the Auto Lighting

Optimizer will be set automatically to [ Disable ].

In step 2, if you press the < B > button and uncheck < X > the [ Disabled in M or B modes ] setting, the [ Auto Lighting Optimizer ] can also be set in the < a > and < F > modes.

175

3

Setting Noise Reduction

N

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high

ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) is further reduced.

1

Select [High ISO speed NR].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select [ High ISO speed NR ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the level.

Y

0 >.

COP

M : Multi Shot Noise Reduction

This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [ High ].

For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [ Multi Shot Noise Reduction ].

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied.

176

When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display < z > in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).

3 Setting Noise Reduction N

Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction

If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise reduction effect may be minimal.

If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.

The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.

Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal shooting. During the processing of the images, “ buSY ” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.

The [ Distortion

Y

Disable ].

If [ z 3: Long exp. noise reduction ], [ z 3: Multiple exposure ], [ z 3:

HDR Mode ], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [ Multi Shot Noise

Reduction ] cannot be set.

according to the [ 2

COP

] setting.

You cannot set [ Multi Shot Noise Reduction ] for bulb exposures and movie shooting.

The setting will automatically switch to [ Standard ] if you do any of the following: Turn the power switch to < 2 >, change the battery, replace the card, select the < A > or < F > shooting mode, set or switch the image-recording quality to RAW or RAW+JPEG, or switch to movie shooting.

177

3 Setting Noise Reduction N

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.

1

Select [Long exp. noise reduction].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select [ Long exp. noise reduction ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Set the desired setting.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Y

Auto automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This

[ Auto ] setting is effective in most cases.

Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.

The [ Enable ] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the [ Auto ] setting.

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied.

178

3 Setting Noise Reduction N

With [ Auto ] and [ Enable ], the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.

Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [ Enable ] setting than with the [ Disable ] or [ Auto ] setting.

With [ Enable ], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed, “ BUSY ” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.

The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed. (You cannot take another picture.)

COP

Y

179

3

Highlight Tone Priority

N

You can reduce overexposed highlight areas.

1

Select [Highlight tone priority].

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select

[ Highlight tone priority ], then press

< 0 >.

Select [Enable].

2

Highlight details are improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother.

Y

Take the picture.

3

The image will be recorded with highlight tone priority applied.

COP

When [ Enable ] is set, noise may increase slightly.

180

With [ Enable ], the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000. Also, the

< A > icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled.

3

Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and Chromatic aberration correction are set to [ Enable ], and Distortion correction is set to [ Disable ].

If [ Correction data not available ] is displayed, see “Lens Correction

Data” on page 183.

Peripheral Illumination Correction

1

Select [Lens aberration correction].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Lens

Y

], then press

< 0 >.

Select the setting.

Check that [ Correction data available ] is displayed for the attached lens.

Select [ Peripheral illumin.

], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

3

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected.

Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.

The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software, p.536).

The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

181

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Chromatic Aberration Correction

1

Select the setting.

Check that [ Correction data available ] is displayed for the attached lens.

Select [ Chromatic aberration ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

2

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected.

Distortion Correction

1

Select the setting.

Check that [ Correction data available ] is displayed for the COP

Select [ Distortion ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

2

Take the picture.

The image will be recorded with the distortion corrected.

182

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image range narrower than that seen through the viewfinder. (Image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution slightly lowered.)

If you set [ Distortion ] to [ Enable

], the maximum burst (p.153) during

continuous shooting will decrease.

Distortion will not be corrected if you shoot a movie or set the HDR mode, multiple exposures, or Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect the angle of view.

When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, if the image periphery is magnified, a part of the image range that will not be recorded in the actual image may be displayed.

Dust Delete Data (p.407) will not be appended to images recorded with

distortion correction enabled. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed

(p.359) when you play back the image.

Lens Correction Data

Y correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for approx. 30 lenses. If you select [ Enable ], the peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.

With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS

Utility Instruction Manual (p.536) on the Software Instruction Manual

CD-ROM.

183

3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations

Cautions for Lens Correction

Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.

When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [ Disable ] is recommended, even if [ Correction data available ] is displayed.

If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will not be reflected in the image shown on the screen.

The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have distance information.

Notes for Lens Correction

If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after shooting and check it again.

Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size

Converter is attached.

Y camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to

[ Disable ].

COP

184

3

Reducing Flicker

N

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.

With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the exposure or color is minimal.

1

Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].

Under the [ z 4 ] tab, select [ Antiflicker shoot.

], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Enable].

Y

Take the picture.

3

The image will be taken with reduced COP

When [ Enable ] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutter-release time lag may become slightly longer. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.

This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting.

In the < d > or < f > mode, if the shutter speed changes during continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid inconsistent color tones, use the < s > or < a > mode at a fixed shutter speed.

The color tone of images shot when [ Anti-flicker shoot.

] is set to

[ Enable ] may look different from when [ Disable ] is set.

Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.

Also, if the light’s flicker frequency changes during continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.

185

3 Reducing Flicker N

If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image, flicker may not be detected.

Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to reduce the effects of the flicker even while < G > is displayed.

Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.

If you recompose a shot, < G > may appear and disappear intermittently.

Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result may not be obtained even if you use this function.

Taking test shots is recommended.

If < G > is not displayed in the viewfinder, checkmark [ Flicker detection ] in [ Show/hide in viewfinder

] (p.77). When the camera

reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, < G > will light.

Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,

< G > will not be displayed.

If [ Flicker detection ] is checkmarked and [ z

Y

] is set to [ Disable ], metering under flickering light source will cause

< G > to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [ Enable ] before shooting is recommended.

In the < A shoot, but < G

COP

Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.

186

3

Setting the Color Space

N

The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or

Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

The color space is set automatically to [ sRGB ] in the < A > mode.

1

Select [Color space].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select [ Color space ], then press < 0 >.

2

Set the desired color space.

Select [ sRGB ] or [ Adobe RGB ], then press < 0 >.

Adobe RGB

Y

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other COP

System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with

Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be required.

If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.

The ICC profile is not appended. Refer to explanations about the ICC

profile in the Software Instruction Manual (p.539) on the CD-ROM.

187

3

Creating and Selecting a Folder

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved.

This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images.

Creating a Folder

1

Select [Record func+card/folder sel.].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Record func+card/folder sel.

], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Folder].

Y

3

COP

Select [Create folder].

4

Select [OK].

X

A new folder with the folder number increased by one is created.

188

3 Creating and Selecting a Folder

Selecting a Folder

Lowest file number

Number of images in folder

Select a folder on the folder selection screen, then press < 0 >.

X

The folder where the captured images will be saved is selected.

Subsequently captured images will be recorded into the selected folder.

Folder name

Highest file number

Y

Folders

COP

As with “ 100EOS7D ” for example, the folder name starts with three digits

(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is

created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.194) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created.

Creating Folders with a Computer

With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “ DCIM ”. Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images. The folder name must follow the format

“ 100ABC_D ”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.

The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the remaining five characters in each name are different.

189

3

Changing the File Name

The file name has four alphanumeric characters followed by a four-digit image

number (p.193) and extension. The first

(Example)

BE3B0001.JPG

four alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique to the camera. However, you can change them.

With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate the image size.

Registering or Changing the File Name

Select [File name].

1

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ File name ], then press < 0 >.

Y

2

COP

3

Enter any alphanumeric characters.

For User setting1, enter four characters. For User setting2, enter three characters.

Press the < L > button to delete any unnecessary characters.

Press the < Q > button. The text palette will be highlighted with a color frame, and text can be entered.

190

Settings

3 Changing the File Name

Operate the < 5 > dial or < 9 > to move the and select the desired character. Then press < 0 > to enter it.

4

Exit the setting.

After entering the correct number of characters, press the < M > button, then select [ OK ].

X The registered file name will be saved.

5

Select the registered file name.

Select [

Y

], then press < 0 >.

Select the registered file name, then press < 0 >.

If User setting2 is registered, select COP

191

3 Changing the File Name

The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.

User setting2

When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and take pictures, the image-recording quality character will be automatically appended as the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of the image-recording quality characters is as follows:

“*** L ” = 73 / 83 / 1 “*** M ” = 7 4 / 8 4 / 4 1

“*** S ” = 7

“*** U ” = c a / 8 a / 61 “*** T ” = b

When the image is transferred to a computer, the automatically appended fourth character will be included. You can then see the image size without having to open the image. RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with the extension.

and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.

Y

When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth character will be an underscore “_”.

COP

192

3

File Numbering Methods

The four-digit file number is like the frame number on a roll of film. The captured images are assigned a sequential file

(Example)

BE3B0001.JPG

number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can change how the file number is assigned.

1

Select [File numbering].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ File numbering ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select the file numbering method.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Continuous

replaced or a new folder is created.

Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card (such as f 9 g

COP images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on your computer.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended that you use a newly-formatted card each time.

File numbering after replacing the card

File numbering after creating a folder

Card A ( f ) Card B ( g ) Card A

100 101

0051 0052 0051 0052

Next sequential file number

193

3 File Numbering Methods

Auto Reset

Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card

(such as f 9 g ), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001 for the images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from

0001, use a newly formatted card each time.

File numbering after replacing the card

Card A ( f ) Card B ( g )

File numbering after

100 creating a folder Y

Card A

101

Manual Reset

0051 0001 COP 0051 0001

Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder.

When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001.

This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.

(There will be no manual reset confirmation screen.)

194

If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

3

Setting Copyright Information

N

When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information.

1

Select [Copyright information].

Under the [ 5 4 ] tab, select [ Copyright information ], then press < 0 >.

3

2

Select the option to be set.

Select [ Enter author’s name ] or

[ Enter copyright details ], then press

< 0 >.

Enter text.

Press the <

Y

Q > button. The text palette will be highlighted with a color frame, and text can be entered.

5 > dial or < 9 > to move the and select the desired character. Then press < 0 > to enter it.

You can enter up to 63 characters.

To delete a character, press the < L > button.

To cancel the text entry, press the

< B > button, then select [ OK ] on the confirmation screen.

4

Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

< M > button, then select [ OK ].

X The information is saved.

195

3 Setting Copyright Information N

Checking the Copyright Information

When you select [ Display copyright info.

] in step 2, you can check the

[ Author ] and [ Copyright ] information that you entered.

Deleting the Copyright Information

When you select [ Delete copyright information ] in step 2 on the preceding page, you can delete the [ Author ] and [ Copyright ] information.

COP

Y

If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely when you select [ Display copyright info.

].

196

You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS

software, p.536).

5

GPS Settings

Y navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),

GLONASS satellites (Russia), and the Quasi-Zenith COP

The GPS function is set to [ Disable ] by default.

This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite navigation function.

When [GPS] is set to [Enable]

(p.201)

, the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at regular intervals even after the power is turned off. The battery will thereby drain faster and the number of possible shots will decrease. If you will not use

GPS, setting [GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.

When using GPS function, be sure to check the region of use and use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country.

197

GPS Features

Geotagging Images

Geotag information*

1

(latitude, longitude, elevation) and coordinated universal time*

2

can be appended to images.

Using the digital compass (based on magnetic north), the shooting direction can be appended to images.

These information can be used to show the shooting location and shooting direction on a map displayed on a computer.

*1: Certain travel conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images.

Y

Greenwich Mean Time.

COP

You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the camera’s location information at set intervals. This geotag information can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer.

* Certain traveling conditions, locations, or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images.

Setting the Camera Time

The camera time can be set using GPS signals.

198

GPS Features

Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map

Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map

displayed on a computer, using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.537).

COP

199

GPS Precautions

Note the following when using the GPS function.

In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS may be restricted.

Therefore, be sure to use GPS in accordance with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country.

Be careful about using GPS functions where the operation of electronic devices is restricted.

Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as when posting them online where many people can view them.

GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.

COP

Y

200

Acquiring GPS Signals

To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping your hands, etc., away from the camera top.

When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to catch the GPS satellite signals after you set [ GPS ] to [ Enable ]. Check that [ r ] is displayed on the LCD panel, then shoot.

1

Select [GPS/digital compass settings].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select [ GPS/ digital compass settings ], then press < 0 >.

2

GPS acquisition status is indicated by the [ r ] icon on the LCD panel and on the shooting function settings screen.

Constant r : Signal acquired

Blinking r : Signal not acquired yet

When you shoot while [ r ] is displayed, the image will be geotagged.

201

Acquiring GPS Signals

If [ Enable ] is selected, < r > will still be displayed on the LCD panel even when you turn the camera’s power switch to < 2 >. Also, since the camera will receive GPS signals at regular intervals, the battery will drain quickly and the number of possible shots will decrease. If you will not use the camera for a prolonged period, set to [ Disable ].

The GPS antenna is built-in around the hot shoe. Although the GPS signal can be acquired while an external Speedlite is attached to the hot shoe, the acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease.

GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) cannot be used.

Poor GPS Coverage

Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or inaccurate geotag information may be recorded.

Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in valleys.

GHz band.

Y

The camera is left inside a bag, etc.

When traveling a long distance.

When traveling through different environments.

COP interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate geotag information even in conditions other than the above. Additionally, the geotag information may also include the route travelled even if the camera was used only at one location.

The camera can receive GPS signals even in the vertical orientation.

202

Acquiring GPS Signals

Viewing GPS Information

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [GPS information display].

X

Detailed GPS information is displayed.

Y

Take the picture.

Shots taken after GPS signal acquisition are geotagged.

Generally, elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the nature of GPS.

The < A > icon indicates signal conditions. When < C > is displayed, elevation can also be recorded. However, elevation cannot be recorded when < B > is displayed.

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is essentially the same as Greenwich

Mean Time.

In the sample screen, the NE45° direction indicates northeast 45°.

203

Acquiring GPS Signals

Geotagging Information

Play back the images and press the < B > button to display the

shooting information screen (p.357). Then tilt <

9 > up or down to check the geotag information.

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)

Direction (Based on magnetic north,

p.206)

COP

Y

West

270°

North

0°

South

180°

East

90°

204

When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting begins is recorded. Note that signal reception conditions are not recorded.

Shooting locations can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer,

using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.537).

Setting the Positioning Interval

The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.

Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will make it more accurate, it will reduce the number of possible shots.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Position update interval].

3

Set the desired update interval.

Y then press < 0 >.

COP

The shorter the interval, the lower the number of possible shots will be.

If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good, the number of possible shots will decrease.

The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in positioning intervals.

205

Using the Digital Compass

Camera orientation information (the direction the camera is facing) can be appended to the image.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

Set [Digital compass] to [Enable].

2

Select [ Digital compass ], then press

< 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

If the [ Calibrate digital compass ] screen appears, perform steps 2 and

3 on page 208.

Compass Display During Shooting

Y

The camera’s current orientation can be displayed on the LCD monitor.

COP

B > button to display the digital compass, the direction will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, you can confirm the direction using the arrow icon at the location circled in this sample screen.

206

During continuous shooting, if you change the camera direction or tilt the camera up or down, the correct direction information may not be recorded.

The direction information is not recorded to the log file (p.211).

Using the Digital Compass

Since the digital compass uses geomagnetism for direction sensing, correct directions may not be obtained or calibration may not be possible in the following environments.

• In or near buildings (including office buildings, residences built using reinforced concrete or masonry, and underground shopping malls), vehicles (including cars, trains, planes, and boats), or metal structures such as elevators

• Near metals (including steel desks and furnishings), permanent magnets (including magnetic jewelry), or home electronics (including televisions, computers, speakers, or mobile phones)

• Near high-voltage lines (including transmission towers), overhead power lines (including those powering trains), or metal facilities

(including footbridges and guardrails)

• At high latitudes

Calibrating the Digital Compass

Y

While you are using the GPS function, if the [ Calibrate digital compass ] screen appears or if the direction indicated looks COP

1

Select [Calibrate digital compass].

Check that [ Digital compass ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Calibrate digital compass ], then press < 0 >.

X

The camera will be ready for calibration.

207

Using the Digital Compass

Move the camera.

2

(1) Swing the camera to the left and right by at least 180°.

(2) Tilt the camera up and down by at least 180°.

(3) Turn the camera by at least 180°.

Be careful not to drop the camera.

Steps (1), (2), and (3) can be performed in any order. Keep moving the camera until the calibration is completed.

If the compass is not calibrated after you perform this, turn your body to the right or left and move the camera again.

Y

3

Exit the calibration.

COP screen indicating completion will be displayed.

Calibration will be completed normally even if the completion message appears while you are still moving the camera in step 2.

208

For safety reasons, detaching the lens from the camera is recommended before you perform the calibration.

Setting Time from GPS on the Camera

The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set in the camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Auto time setting].

3

Select the desired setting.

Select [

Y

0 >.

] or [ Set now ],

[ Auto update ] updates the time when the camera is turned on and a GPS COP

If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired, the time cannot be auto updated. [ Set now ] will be grayed out and not selectable.

Even if [ Set now ] is selected, updating the time may not be possible due to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition.

When [ Auto time setting ] is set to [ Auto update ], the date or time cannot be manually set with [ Date/Time/Zone ] under the [ 5 2 ] tab.

If you use Wireless Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2/sold separately) and do not want to change the time after performing [ Sync time between cameras ], set [ Auto time setting ] to [ Disable ] in step 2.

209

Logging the Route Traveled

Map data ©2014 ZENRIN -

When using the GPS logging function, the geotag information of the route the camera traveled is automatically recorded in the camera’s internal memory.

Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer using the Map

Utility (EOS software, p.537).

Note that the GPS logging function will continue to log information even when the camera’s power is off, including auto power off.

1

Select [Set up].

Check that [

Y

GPS ] is set to [ Enable ].

2

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

COP

3

Set [Log GPS position] to

[Enable].

Select [ Log GPS position ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

210

When the GPS logging function is enabled, the [ ] icon will appear on

the shooting function settings screen (p.201).

When you set the power switch to < 2 > or when auto power off takes effect, < > will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Logging the Route Traveled

Geotag Information Logs

Geotag information for the route the camera traveled is recorded at the intervals set with [ Position update interval

] (p.205). The log data is

saved in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how many days’ worth of data can be saved.

Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval (Approx.)

Update Interval

Every 1 sec.

Every 5 sec.

Every 10 sec.

Log Data

4.1 days

20 days

41 days

Update Interval

Every 30 sec.

Every 1 min.

Every 2 min.

Log Data

100 days

100 days

100 days

Every 15 sec.

61 days Every 5 min.

100 days

* Assuming 8 hr. of data logged per day.

Y

log file to a card (p.212).

One log file is created for each day. The log file name has the date COP

If the camera’s internal memory becomes full, the oldest log data will be overwritten with the newest log data.

Battery Consumption During Logging

When [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ], the camera will continue to receive GPS signals at set intervals even while the camera’s power is switched off.

This will drain the battery faster, reducing the number of shots that can be taken. Additionally, when [ Log GPS position ] is set to [ Enable ], shorter update intervals will drain the battery more quickly.

When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak, setting

[ GPS ] to [ Disable ] is recommended.

211

Logging the Route Traveled

Downloading Log Data to a Computer

The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a computer with EOS Utility (EOS software) or downloaded from a card after transferring the data to the card.

When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.537) to open a log file

saved on your computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on a map.

Importing the log data using EOS software

With the camera connected to a computer via the provided interface cable, you can download the log data to the computer with EOS Utility

(EOS software). For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual

(CD-ROM).

When [

Y

Transfer log data to card ] is selected, you can transfer the log data in the internal memory as log

COP f ] or SD card [ g ].

Note that when log files are transferred to a card, that log data is permanently deleted from the camera’s internal memory.

The log files imported to the card will be stored in the “GPS” folder in the “MISC” folder. The extension is “.LOG”.

Selecting [ Delete log data ] will completely delete the log data saved in the internal memory. Deleting data may take approx. one minute.

212

Logging the Route Traveled

Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When

connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).

The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera’s body. For this reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it.

Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also, set correct time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.

Since the geotag information, date, and time are constantly recorded even when the camera is turned off, the battery will keep draining. When you use the camera again, the battery level may already be low. If necessary, recharge the battery or prepare a charged, spare battery

(sold separately).

COP

Y

213

MEMO

COP

Y

214

6

Advanced Operations

In the <

< F d > < s

Y

> < f > < a >

> shooting modes, you can select the shutter speed, aperture, and other camera COP exposure and obtain the desired result.

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel for 4 sec. ( 0 ).

For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page

480.

Set the < R > switch to the left.

215

d

: Program AE

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

* < d > stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

d

>.

Focus on the subject.

2

Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject. Then press the shutter button halfway.

X When focus is achieved, the focus

X indicator < o > in the viewfinder will light up (in One-Shot AF mode).

Y be set automatically and displayed in

3 the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.

COP as long as the shutter speed and aperture displays do not blink.

4

Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

216

d : Program AE

If the “ 30" ” shutter speed and the lower f/number blink, it indicates underexposure.

Increase the ISO speed or use flash.

If the “ 8000 ” shutter speed and the higher f/number blink, it indicates overexposure.

Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens.

Differences Between < d > and < A > Modes

In the < A > mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set are limited. With < d

Y

other functions (p.480).

Program Shift COP maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.

To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the

< 6 > dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.

Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer

( 0 ) ends (exposure setting display turns off).

Program shift cannot be used with flash.

217

s

: Shutter-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.

* < s > stands for Time value.

218

Blurred motion

(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen action Y

1

2

Set the Mode Dial to <

s

>.

COP

Set the desired shutter speed.

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the

< 6 > dial.

3

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X

The aperture is set automatically.

4

Check the viewfinder display and shoot.

As long as the aperture is not blinking, a standard exposure will be obtained.

s : Shutter-Priority AE

If the lower f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the < 6 > dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher

ISO speed.

If the higher f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the < 6 > dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.

Shutter Speed Display

The shutter speeds from “ 8000 ” to “ 4 ” indicate the denominator of the fractional shutter speed. For example, “ 125 ” indicates 1/125 sec., “ 0"5 ” indicates 0.5 sec. and “ 15" ” is 15 sec.

Y

COP

219

f

: Aperture-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.

* < f > stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

220

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Y

1

2

Set the Mode Dial to <

f

>.

COP

Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

3

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X

The shutter speed is set automatically.

4

Check the viewfinder display and shoot.

As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, a standard exposure will be obtained.

f : Aperture-Priority AE

If the “ 30" ” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the < 6 > dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed.

If the “ 8000 ” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the < 6 > dial to set a smaller aperture

(higher aperture f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.

Aperture Display

The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, “ 00 ” will be displayed for the aperture.

Y

Depth-of-Field Preview

N the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.

Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the

LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.

Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of field (range of acceptable focus).

A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.

While looking at the Live View image (p.286), you can change the

aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button to see how the depth of field changes.

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview button is pressed.

221

a

: Manual Exposure

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure.

* < a > stands for Manual.

Shutter speed

Aperture

Bright (+)

Dark (-)

Standard exposure index < >

222

Set the Mode Dial to <

a

>.

1

2

Set the ISO speed

(p.154)

.

Set the shutter speed and aperture.

3

To set the shutter speed, turn the

< 6 > dial.

To set the aperture, turn the < 5 > dial.

Y

R >

6 > or < 5 > dial.

4

Focus on the subject.

COP

X The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel.

On the viewfinder’s right side, the exposure level indicator < > shows how far off the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level < >.

5

Set the exposure and take the picture.

Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed and aperture.

If the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops from the standard exposure, the end of the exposure level indicator will display < > or < >.

a : Manual Exposure

Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO

If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO), you can set exposure

compensation (p.226) as follows.

• [ z 2: Expo.comp./AEB ]

• Under [ 8 3: Custom Controls ], use [ s : Expo comp (hold btn, turn )

] (p.455) or [

p : Expo comp (hold down lever, turn ) ]

(p.455).

• Quick Control (p.61)

Set the exposure compensation amount while checking the exposure level indicator on the lower part of the viewfinder or on the LCD panel.

Y speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore, you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the exposure compensation.

COP applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.

Under [ z 2: Auto Lighting Optimizer ], if the checkmark <

X

> for

[ Disabled in M or B modes ] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set even in the < a

> mode (p.175).

When Auto ISO is set, you can press the < A > button to lock the ISO speed.

If you press the < A > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when you pressed the < A > button.

If exposure compensation (p.226) was applied in <

d >, < s >, or < f > mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to < a > with Auto ISO set, the exposure compensation amount already set will be maintained.

With Auto ISO set and [ 8 1: ISO speed setting increments ] set to [ 1/2stop ], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the

ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will not change.

223

q

Selecting the Metering Mode

N

You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.

In the < A > mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.

1

Press the <

n

> button.

( 9 )

Select the metering mode.

2

While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder, turn the < 6 > dial.

q :Evaluative metering w :Partial metering r :Spot metering e

Y metering q Evaluative metering

COP even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

w Partial metering

Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial metering covers approx. 6% of the viewfinder area at the center.

224

q Selecting the Metering Mode N r Spot metering

This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx. 1.8% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.

e Center-weighted average metering

The metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene.

COP

Y

With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w

(Partial metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the moment the photo is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)

When < r > (Spot metering) is set, you can display < z > in the

viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).

225

O

Setting Exposure Compensation

N

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken

(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in the < d >, < s >, and < f > shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the

LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the

exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.61) or

follow the instructions for [ z 2: Expo.comp./AEB ] on the next page.

If the < a

> mode with the Auto ISO set, see page 223 to set the

exposure compensation.

Check the exposure.

1

Press the shutter button halfway ( 0 )

Increased exposure for a brighter image

Decreased exposure for a darker image and check the exposure level indicator.

2

Set the exposure compensation amount.

Y

LCD panel, turn the < 5 > dial.

3

If it cannot be set, set the < R > switch to the left, then turn the < 5 > dial.

COP

To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level indicator < h / N > to the standard exposure index (< a > or < C >).

If [ z 2: Auto Lighting Optimizer

] (p.175) is set to any setting other than

[ Disable ], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker image is set.

226

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to < 2 >.

After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting the < R > switch to the right.

If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display < J / > or < I / >.

h

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

N

By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three successive shots. This is called AEB.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

1

Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

Under the [ z 2 ] tab, select

[ Expo.comp./AEB ], then press

< 0 >.

AEB range

Standard Decreased Increased exposure exposure exposure

Set the AEB range.

2

Turn the < 6 > dial to set the AEB range. If you turn < 5 >, you can set

Press < 0

Y

> to set it.

X

When you exit the menu, < h > and the AEB range will be displayed on COP

3

Take the picture.

Three bracketed shots will be taken according to the drive mode set in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.

AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step

2 to turn off the AEB range display.

227

h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) N

During AEB, < A > in the viewfinder and < h > on the LCD panel will blink.

If the drive mode is set to < u > or < B >, press the shutter button three times for each shot. When < o >, < i >, or < M > is set and you hold down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.

When < Q > or < k > is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.

You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.

If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level indicator will display < J / > or < I / >.

AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [ Multi Shot

Noise Reduction ] or [ HDR Mode ] is set.

AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to

< 2 > or when the flash is ready to fire.

Y

COP

228

A

AE Lock

N

Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the < A > button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects, etc.

1

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway.

X The exposure setting will be displayed.

2

Press the <

A

> button.

( 0 )

X

The < A > icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked (AE lock).

Each time you press the < A > button,

3 the current exposure setting is locked.

Y

The exposure level indicator on the right of the viewfinder will show the

AE lock exposure level and the

COP

If you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots, hold down the < A > button and press the shutter button to take another shot.

AE Lock Effects

Metering Mode

(p.224)

q * wre

AF Point Selection Method

(p.93)

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

AE lock is applied at the AF point that achieved focus.

AE lock is applied at the selected AF point.

AE lock is applied at the center AF point.

* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to < MF >, AE lock is applied at the center AF point.

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

229

F

: Bulb Exposures

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long exposures.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

F

>.

2

Set the desired aperture.

While looking at the LCD panel or the viewfinder, turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial.

Elapsed exposure time 3

The exposure will continue for as long

X as you keep the shutter button COP displayed on the LCD panel.

230

Long exposures produce more noise than usual.

If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.156).

For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely

(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the same shooting conditions, you need not hold down the shutter button completely.

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.

F : Bulb Exposures

With [ z 3: Long exp. noise reduction ], you can reduce the noise

generated during long exposures (p.178).

For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.

Using mirror lockup (p.246) with bulb exposures is also possible.

You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or

Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.248).

You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.248) for

bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button, the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure.

J

Bulb Timer

N

You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer, you need not hold down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.

This reduces camera shake.

Y

The bulb timer can be set only in the < F > (Bulb) shooting mode. It cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.

1

COP

Under the [ z 4 ] tab, select [ Bulb timer ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Enable].

Select [ Enable ], then press < B > button.

231

F : Bulb Exposures

3

Set the desired exposure time.

Select the hour, minute, or second.

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Set the desired number, then press

< 0 > (Returns to < s >).

4

Select [OK].

X

The set time will be displayed on the menu screen.

X

< J > will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Elapsed exposure time

5

Take the picture.

X

Y and the bulb exposure will start and

[ continue until the set time elapses.

To cancel the timer setting, set

COP

] in step 2.

Bulb timer

232

If you press the shutter button completely while the bulb timer is operating, the bulb exposure will stop.

Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to

[ Disable ]): Set the power switch to < 2 >, display the movie shooting screen, or change the shooting mode from < F >.

w

: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

N

Highlight detail and shadow detail are retained for a high dynamic range of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots.

With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured for each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Press the <

b

> button.

1

Select the HDR mode.

2

3

Select [ w ], then press < 0 >.

X

The HDR mode screen will appear.

Y setting, then press < 0 >.

Selecting [ Auto ] will have the COP tonal range.

The higher the number, the wider the dynamic range will be.

To exit HDR shooting, select [ Disable

HDR ].

4

Set [Effect].

Select the desired effect, then press

< 0 >.

You can also set HDR shooting with [ z 3: HDR Mode ].

233

w : HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting N

Effects

Natural

For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost.

Art standard

While the highlight and shadow details will be better preserved than with [ Natural ], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.

Art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [ Art standard ], and the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.

Art bold the picture look like an oil painting.

Art embossed decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.

Saturation

Bold outline

Brightness

Tone

Art standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Flat

Art vivid

High

Weak

Standard

Flat

Art bold

Higher

Strong

Standard

Flat

Art embossed

Low

Stronger

Dark

Flatter

234

Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style

currently set (p.160).

w : HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting N

5

Set [Continuous HDR].

Select either [ 1 shot only ] or [ Every shot ], then press < 0 >.

With [ 1 shot only ], HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends.

With [ Every shot ], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to [ Disable HDR ].

Set [Auto Image Align].

6

For handheld shooting, select

[ Enable ]. When using a tripod, select

[ Disable ], then press < 0 >.

Y

7

Set the images to be saved.

To save all three images and the COP

All images ], then press < 0 >.

To save only the HDR image, select

[ HDR img only ], then press < 0 >.

235

w : HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting N

8

Take the picture.

HDR shooting is possible with viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting.

X

< w > will be displayed on the LCD panel.

When you press the shutter button completely, three consecutive images will be captured, and the HDR image will be recorded to the card.

236

Y

COP

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW, the HDR image will be recorded in 73 quality. If the image-recording quality is set to

RAW+JPEG, the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set.

HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (H1, H2). HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.

The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.

During HDR shooting, [ Disable ] will be applied for [ Distortion ], [ z 2:

Auto Lighting Optimizer ], [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ], and [ z 5:

Expo. simulation ].

AEB cannot be set.

If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages.

In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set automatically. Therefore, even in < s > and < a > shooting modes, the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.

To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.

w : HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting N

When shooting HDR images with [ Auto Image Align ] set to [ Enable ],

AF point display information (p.359) and Dust Delete Data (p.407) will

not be appended to the image.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [ Auto Image Align ] is set to [ Enable ], image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution will be slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings, auto image alignment may not work properly.

If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [ Auto Image Align ] is set to [ Disable ], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.

Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns

(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.

The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.

color reproduction of the illuminated areas.

Y

With HDR shooting, the three images will be merged after you take a

“ picture. Therefore, it will take a longer time to record the HDR image to buSY

COP cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.

If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting

HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([ Adjust dyn range ] setting may be switched to [ Disable HDR ]).

237

P

Multiple Exposures

N

You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If

you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.285),

you can see how the single exposures are being merged while shooting.

1

Press the <

b

> button.

2

Select Multiple exposure.

Select [ P ], then press < 0 >.

X The multiple exposure setting screen will appear.

Set [Multiple exposure].

3

Select [ On:Func/Ctrl ] or

[ On:ContShtng ], then press < 0 >.

select [ Disable

Y

].

COP checking the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.

On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)

Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, Live View display, image review after image capture, image playback, and

undo last image (p.244).

Also, only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The single exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be saved.)

238

You can also set multiple exposure with [ z 3: Multiple exposure ].

P Multiple Exposures N

4

Set [Multi-expos ctrl].

Select the desired multiple-exposure control method, then press < 0 >.

Additive

The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based on the [ No. of exposures ], set a negative exposure compensation.

Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure compensation.

Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures

Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:

-2 stops

Average

Y

Based on the [ No. of exposures ], negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot COP exposure.

Bright/Dark

The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or darkness) ratio of the compared images.

5

Set the [No. of exposures].

Select the number of exposures, then press < 0 >.

You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.

239

P Multiple Exposures N

6

Set the images to be saved.

To save all the single exposures and the merged multiple-exposure image, select [ All images ], then press < 0 >.

To save only the merged multipleexposure image, select [ Result only ], then press < 0 >.

Remaining number of exposures

Set [Continue Mult-exp].

7

Select either [ 1 shot only ] or

[ Continuously ], then press < 0 >.

With [ 1 shot only ], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends.

With [ Continuously ], multiple-

Y setting in step 3 is set to [ Disable ].

8

Take the first exposure.

COP

] is set, the captured image will be displayed.

X

The < P > icon will blink.

The number of remaining exposures is displayed in brackets [ ] in the viewfinder or on the screen.

Pressing the < x > button enables you to view the captured image

(p.244).

240

P Multiple Exposures N

9

Shoot subsequent exposures.

X

When [ On:Func/Ctrl ] is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be displayed.

With Live View shooting, the multipleexposure images merged so far will be displayed. By pressing the

< B > button, you can display only the Live View image.

After you shoot the set number of exposures, multiple-exposure shooting will exit. With continuous shooting, after you finish shooting the set number of exposures while Y

The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed

COP also be set for the subsequent exposures.

[ z 5: Aspect ratio ] will be fixed at 3:2.

During multiple exposure shooting, [ Disable ] will be applied for [ z 1:

Lens aberration correction ], [ z 2: Auto Lighting Optimizer ], and

[ z 3: Highlight tone priority ].

If [ z 3: Picture Style ] is set to [ Auto ], [ Standard ] will be applied for shooting.

If [ On:Func/Ctrl ] and [ Additive ] are both set, the image displayed during shooting may look noisy. However, when you finish shooting the set number of exposures, noise reduction will be applied and the final multiple-exposure image will be less noisy.

If you perform Live View shooting while [ On:ContShtng ] is set, the Live

View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken. From the second shot onward, shoot while looking through the viewfinder.

When [ On:Func/Ctrl ] is set, you can press the < x > button to view the

multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure (p.244).

241

P Multiple Exposures N

With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is recommended.

If [ Additive ] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up for longer than usual.)

If you perform Live View shooting while [ On:Func/Ctrl ] and [ Additive ] are both set, the Live View function will stop automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting ends.

In step 9, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final multiple-exposure image recorded.

If [ On:ContShtng ] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the set number of exposures.

If the power switch is set to < 2 >, the battery is replaced, or if you

If you switch the shooting mode to < A > or < w

Y

/ x / y > while shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.

If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure COP

242

P Multiple Exposures N

Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card

You can select an image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The original of the selected image will remain intact.

You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41 / 61 or

JPEG images.

1

Select [Select image for multi. expo.].

X The images on the card will be displayed.

2

Select an image.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be used as the first single exposure, then press < 0 >.

Select [ OK ].

X

The file number of the selected image

Y screen.

Take the picture.

When you select the first image, the number of remaining exposures as set with [ No. of exposures ] will decrease by 1. For example, if [ No. of exposures ] is 3, you can shoot two exposures.

The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images shot with [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] set to [ Enable ], images whose

[ Aspect ratio ] is set to any setting other than [ 3:2

] (p.295), and images

having cropping information (p.443).

[ Disable ] will be applied for [ z 1: Lens aberration correction ], [ z 2:

Auto Lighting Optimizer ], and [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] regardless of the settings of the RAW image selected as the first single exposure.

The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space, etc. set for the first 1 image will also apply for the subsequent images.

If [ z 3: Picture Style ] is Auto for the RAW image selected as the first single exposure, Standard will be applied for shooting.

You cannot select an image taken with another camera.

243

P Multiple Exposures N

You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single exposure.

If you select [ Deselect img ], the selected image will be canceled.

Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

Operation q Undo last image

When [ On:Func/Ctrl ] is set and you have not finished shooting the set number of exposures, you can press the

< x > button to view the merged multiple-exposure image so far. You can check how it looks and the exposure.

(Not possible when [ On:ContShtng ] is set.)

If you press the <

Y

L > button, the operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.

COP

Description

Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image). The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.

W r

Save and exit

Exit without saving

If [ Save source imgs: All images ] is set, all of the single exposures and the merged multipleexposure image will be saved before exiting.

If [ Save source imgs: Result only ] is set, only the multiple-exposure image merged so far will be saved before exiting.

None of the images will be saved before exiting.

2 Return to previous screen

The screen before you pressed the < L > button will reappear.

244

During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.

P Multiple Exposures N

FAQ

Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?

All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41 or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.

Image-Recording

Quality Setting

JPEG

1

41 / 61

1 +JPEG

41 / 61 +JPEG

Single Exposures

JPEG

1

41 / 61

1 +JPEG

41 / 61 +JPEG

Merged Multiple-

Exposure

JPEG

1

1

1 +JPEG

1 +JPEG

Can I merge images recorded on the card?

With [ Select image for multi. expo.

Y you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.

Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?

With [ On:Func/Ctrl

COP

View shooting (p.285). Note that [

z 5: Aspect ratio ] will be fixed at

[ 3:2 ].

What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?

If all images are set to be saved, the merged multiple-exposure image file number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final single exposure used to create the merged multiple-exposure image.

Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?

As long as [ 5 2: Auto power off ] is set to any setting other than

[ Disable ], the power will turn off automatically after 30 min. of nonoperation. If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure shooting will end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.

Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.

245

2

Mirror Lockup

N

Although using the self-timer or a remote switch can prevent camera shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock) can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups

(macro photography).

1

Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].

Under the [ z 4 ] tab, select [ Mirror lockup ], then press < 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

2

the shutter button completely.

X The mirror will swing up.

3

Press the shutter button

COP

X

The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down.

246

In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.

Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and damage the shutter curtains.

During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations, etc. are disabled.

Using the Eyepiece Cover

Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can be taken.

You can also use the self-timer or bulb timer with mirror lockup.

If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror again.

For mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is

recommended (p.248).

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.248). Setting the

remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.

Using the Eyepiece Cover

When you use the self-timer, bulb, or a remote switch and do not look Y attached to the camera strap.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece cover is unnecessary.

1

COP

Detach the eyecup.

While grasping both sides of the eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.

2

Attach the eyepiece cover.

Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it.

X

After you finish shooting, detach the eyepiece cover and attach the eyecup.

247

F

Using a Remote Switch

You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or

Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) or any EOS accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for

shooting (p.478).

To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.

Open the terminal cover.

1

2

Connect the plug to the remote control terminal.

Connect the plug as shown in the illustration.

To disconnect the plug, grasp the silver part and pull.

R

Remote Control Shooting

Y

With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet COP use a 2-sec. delay.

You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.

1

Focus on the subject.

2

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

You can also shoot with < f >.

3

Press the <

o

> button.

( 9 )

248

Remote control sensor

R Remote Control Shooting

4

Select the self-timer.

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial to select < Q > or < k >.

5

Press the remote controller’s transmit button.

Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control sensor, and press the transmit button.

X

The self-timer lamp lights up and the picture is taken.

COP

Y

Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from such light sources.

If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently.

Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series

Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function.

249

H

Interval Timer Shooting

With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number of shots. The camera will automatically repeat taking one shot with the set interval until the set number of shots are taken.

1

Select [Interval timer].

Under the [ z 4 ] tab (the [ z 2 ] tab in

< A >), select [ Interval timer ], then press < 0 >.

Select [Enable].

2

Select [ Enable ], then press < B > button.

Y

3

Set the interval and number of

COP number of shots.

Press < 0 > so < r > is displayed.

Set the desired number, then press

< 0 > (Returns to < s >).

Interval

Settable from [ 00:00:01 ] to [ 99:59:59 ].

No. of shots

Settable from [ 01 ] to [ 99 ]. If you set [ 00 ], the camera will keep shooting until you stop the interval timer.

250

H Interval Timer Shooting

No. of shots

Interval

4

Select [OK].

X

The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen.

X

< H > will be displayed on the LCD panel.

Interval timer 5

Take the picture.

X

Shooting will start according to the interval timer settings.

During interval timer shooting,

< H > will blink.

After the set number of shots are Y

COP

Using a tripod is recommended.

Taking test shots is recommended.

After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended, and the camera will be ready to shoot.

If a picture is taken or an image is being processed as the next interval timer shooting, that interval timer shooting will be canceled. This will make the number of interval timer images captured lower than the set number of shots.

Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing, multiple exposures, and HDR mode.

You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [ Disable ] or turning the power switch to < 2 >.

251

H Interval Timer Shooting

If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to < AF >, the camera will not shoot when focus is not achieved. Setting it to < MF > and focus manually first is recommended.

Live View shooting, movie shooting, bulb exposures, or mirror lockup cannot be performed with interval timer shooting.

During interval timer shooting, auto power off will not take effect. For prolonged interval timer shooting, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to power the camera is recommended.

If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is set, the camera cannot shoot at the set interval. The camera will thereby shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer shooting. Also, the number of shots may decrease when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are almost the same or close.

If card recording time is longer than the set shooting interval, due to card performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera may not shoot at the set shooting interval.

Y may not fire.

If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or COP

Disable ] if you do any of the following: Set the power switch to < 2 >, display the Live

View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to < F > or a

Custom shooting mode, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.536).

After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control

shooting (p.248) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,

external Speedlite.

During interval timer shooting, if your eye will not remain on the

viewfinder eyepiece, attach the eyepiece cover (p.247). Stray light

entering the viewfinder can throw off the exposure.

252

7

Flash Photography

and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately), how to set flash settings with the camera’s menu screen, and how to use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting.

COP

Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.

AEB cannot be used with flash.

253

D

Using the Built-in Flash

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > modes, just press the < D > button to raise the built-in flash for flash photography.

Before shooting, check that [ D ] is displayed in the viewfinder. After shooting, push the built-in flash back down with your fingers until it clicks into place.

In the < A > mode, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically in low-light or backlit conditions. You can also enable or disable the flash firing.

The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will be used with flash.

Shooting Mode

A d s f a

F

Shutter Speed Aperture

Automatically set

Automatically set

(1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.)

Y Automatically set

Automatically set

Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Automatically set

Automatically set

COP

Manually set

Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.) Manually set

Exposure continues while you hold down the shutter button or while Manually set the bulb timer is operating.

254

Flash Photography in the < f > Mode

To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically

(autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/250 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness.

In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [ z 1: Flash control ], set [ Flash sync. speed in Av mode ] to [ 1/250-1/60 sec. auto ] or [ 1/250 sec. (fixed) ]

(p.263).

D Using the Built-in Flash

Effective Range of Built-in Flash

ISO Speed

(Approx. in meters/feet)

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

EF-S15-85mm f/3-5.6 IS USM

ISO 100

Wide Angle: f/3.5

1-3.1 / 3.3-10.3

Telephoto: f/5.6

1-2.0 / 3.3-6.4

ISO 200

ISO 400

ISO 800

ISO 1600

ISO 3200

ISO 6400

1-4.4 / 3.3-14.6

1-6.3 / 3.3-20.6

1.1-8.9 / 3.6-29.2

1.6-12.6 / 5.2-41.2

2.2-17.8 / 7.3-58.3

3.1-25.1 / 10.3-82.5

1-2.8 / 3.3-9.1

1-3.9 / 3.3-12.9

1-5.6 / 3.3-18.2

1-7.9 / 3.3-25.8

1.4-11.1 / 4.6-36.5

2.0-15.7 / 6.4-51.6

2.8-22.2 / 9.1-72.9

3.1-24.9 / 10.2-81.8

ISO 12800

ISO 16000

H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600)

H2

(equivalent to ISO 51200)

4.4-35.6 / 14.6-116.7

5.0-39.9 / 16.4-130.9

Y

8.9-71.1 / 29.2-233.3

COP

3.9-31.4 / 12.9-103.1

5.6-44.4 / 18.2-145.8

When you use the built-in flash, detach any lens hood and keep at least

1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.

If a lens hood is attached or if the subject is too close, the built-in flash will be obstructed and the bottom of the picture may look dark.

Do not perform flash photography when the built-in flash is held down with your finger or not fully raised for some other reason.

If you use a super telephoto lens or large-aperture lens and the bottom of

the picture looks dark, using an external Speedlite (sold separately, p.259) is

recommended.

255

D Using the Built-in Flash

3

Red-eye Reduction

Using the red-eye reduction lamp when taking a flash picture can reduce red eye.

1

Select [Red-eye reduc.].

Under the [ z 4 ] tab (the [ z 2 ] tab in

< A >), select [ Red-eye reduc.

], then press < 0 >.

Select [Enable].

2

For flash photography, when you press the shutter button halfway, the emitted.

Y

COP

256

The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red-eye reduction lamp, the room is well lit, and you are close to the subject.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and turn off. For best results, take the picture after this scale display turns off.

The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.

D Using the Built-in Flash y

Flash Exposure Compensation

N

Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject does not come out as desired. You can set flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

1

Press the <

m

> button.

( 9 )

2

Set the exposure compensation amount.

While looking at the LCD panel or through the viewfinder, turn the < 5 > dial.

Y turn the < 5 > dial to the right

Increased exposure for a brighter image

Decreased exposure for a darker image

(increased exposure). To make the COP

5 > dial to the left (decreased exposure).

After shooting, set the exposure compensation amount back to zero.

If [ z 2: Auto Lighting Optimizer

] (p.175) is set to any setting other than

[ Disable ], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash exposure compensation is set.

If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold

separately, p.259), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with

the camera. If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite, the

Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to < 2 >.

You can also set flash exposure compensation with [ Built-in flash settings ] under [ z 1: Flash control

] (p.262).

The camera can also be used to set the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation in the same way as with the built-in flash.

257

D Using the Built-in Flash

A

FE Lock

N

FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash exposure for the desired part of the image.

1

Press the <

D

> button.

X

The built-in flash will be raised.

Press the shutter button halfway and look through the viewfinder to check that the < D > icon is lit.

4

Focus on the subject.

2

Press the <

B

> button.

( 8 ) 3

Aim the viewfinder center over the Y

< B > button.

X The flash will fire a preflash and the COP

X In the viewfinder, “ FEL ” is displayed for a moment and < d > will light up. Also, the flash exposure level indicator will be displayed as shown on the left.

Each time you press the < B > button, a preflash is fired and the flash output is calculated and retained in memory.

Take the picture.

Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

X

The flash is fired when the picture is taken.

258

If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective flash range, the < D > icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.

FE lock is not possible with Live View shooting.

D

Using an External Speedlite

EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites

Flash photography with EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is as easy as with built-in flash.

For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EX-series Speedlites.

To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s

menu, see pages 262-271.

Shoe-mount Speedlites

Y

Macro Lites

Flash exposure compensation

Set this in the same way as for the built-in flash. See page 257.

FE lock

COP

The setting procedure is basically the same as for the built-in flash.

See page 258.

If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external

Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.

259

D Using an External Speedlite

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series

With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to < a > (manual exposure) or

< f > (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before shooting.

When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.

Non-Canon Flash Units

Sync Speed

The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at

1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to Y within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the model.

PC Terminal

COP

The camera’s PC terminal can be used with flash units having a sync cord. The PC terminal is threaded to prevent inadvertent disconnection.

The camera’s PC terminal has no polarity. You can connect any sync cord regardless of its polarity.

Cautions for Live View Shooting

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [ z 6:

Silent LV shoot.

] to [ Disable

] (p.297). The flash will not fire if it is set to

[ Mode 1 ] or [ Mode 2 ].

260

D Using an External Speedlite

If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result.

Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output voltage of 250 V or more.

Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may not fire.

A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.

COP

Y

261

3

Setting the Flash

N

With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set flash functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.

If you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the

Speedlite’s instruction manual.

1

Select [Flash control].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Flash control ], then press < 0 >.

X

The Flash control screen will appear.

2

Select the item to be set, then press

< 0 >.

COP

Flash Firing

To enable flash photography, set

[ Enable ]. To enable only the AF-assist beam, set [ Disable ].

E-TTL II Flash Metering

For normal flash exposures, set it to

[ Evaluative ]. If [ Average ] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered area. Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be necessary. This setting is for advanced users.

262

3 Setting the Flash N

Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode

You can set the flash sync speed for flash photography in the aperture-priority

AE ( f ) mode.

: Auto

The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250 sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. With an external

Speedlite, high-speed sync is also possible.

: 1/250-1/60sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.

Y

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background may come out dark.

: 1/250 sec. (fixed)

COP prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [ 1/250-1/60sec. auto ]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than with [ 1/250-1/60sec. auto ].

If [ 1/250-1/60sec. auto ] or [ 1/250 sec. (fixed) ] is set, high-speed sync is not possible in the < f > mode with the external Speedlite.

263

3 Setting the Flash N

Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly

When you use the built-in flash or an external, EX-series Speedlite compatible with flash function settings, you can press the < D > button to directly display the [ Built-in flash settings ] or [ External flash func. setting ] screen without first displaying the menu screen.

With built-in flash

Press the <

D

> button twice.

Press the button again, and the builtin flash will be raised.

Y

[ Built-in flash settings ] screen.

With external Speedlite

COP

D

> button.

With the external Speedlite turned on, press the < D > button to display the

[ External flash func. setting ] screen.

264

When you press the < D > button to display the flash function setting screen, you cannot set [ Flash firing ], [ E-TTL II meter.

], or [ Flash sync. speed in Av mode ]. Set these functions with [ z 1: Flash control ] instead.

If [ Flash firing ] is set to [ Disable ] and you press the < D > button, the

[ Flash control

] screen will appear (p.262).

3 Setting the Flash N

Built-in Flash Settings

Flash mode

Normally, set this to [ E-TTL II ]. This enables autoexposure shooting with the built-in flash.

To set the flash output level manually, select [ Manual flash ].

Select [ 2 flash output ], then set the flash output level to within 1/1 - 1/128

(1/3-stop increments) before shooting. Y

With [ MULTI flash ] selected, you can use a slow shutter speed to capture COP

First set the [ 2 flash output ],

[ Frequency ], and [ Flash count ], then shoot. This mode is for advanced users.

To prevent the flash from damage due to overheating, do not use MULTI flash more than ten consecutive times. If you use MULTI flash 10 times, allow the flash to rest for at least 10 min. before firing the flash again.

Flash will be output at 1/128 - 1/4 for MULTI flash.

265

3 Setting the Flash N

Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [ 1st curtain ] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts.

If [ 2nd curtain ] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.

When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.

With second-curtain synchronization, two flashes will be fired: once when you press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before the exposure ends.

2 Flash exposure compensation compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

COP

Wireless functions

With wireless flash photography (via optical transmission), you can use the built-in flash to wirelessly control external

Speedlites.

For details, see “Using Wireless Flash”

on page 272.

266

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if [ 2nd curtain ] is set.

3 Setting the Flash N

External Flash Function Settings

The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the external Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom

Function settings, etc.

To see which functions your Speedlite (sold separately) provides, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Sample display

Wireless functions/

Flash ratio control

Flash zoom

(Flash coverage) Flash mode

Shutter synchronization

Flash mode

COP

Y

Flash exposure bracketing

Flash exposure compensation

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.

[ E-TTL II flash metering ] is the standard mode of EX-series Speedlites for automatic flash shooting.

[ Manual flash ] is for setting the

Speedlite’s [ Flash output level ] yourself.

Regarding other flash modes, refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite compatible with the functions.

267

3 Setting the Flash N

Wireless functions / Flash ratio control

Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is possible with radio or optical transmission.

For details on wireless flash, refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite compatible with the wireless flash shooting.

With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.) compatible with external flash function settings, you can set the flash ratio between flash tubes or flash heads A and B, or use wireless flash with slave units.

the macro flash’s instruction manual.

Flash zoom (Flash coverage)

With Speedlites having a zooming flash COP

AUTO ] so that the camera will automatically set the flash coverage to match the lens focal length.

268

3 Setting the Flash N

Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [ First-curtain synchronization ] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts.

If [ Second-curtain synchronization ] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel. With second-curtain synchronization, two flashes will be fired: once when you press the shutter button completely, and once immediately before the exposure ends.

If [ High-speed synchronization ] is set, the flash can be used at all Y

Flash exposure compensation COP increments.

For details, refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Flash exposure bracketing

While the flash output is changed automatically, three shots are taken.

For details, refer to the instruction manual of a Speedlite equipped with flash exposure bracketing.

269

3 Setting the Flash N

When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if [ Second-curtain synchronization ] is set.

With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings, you can only set the following: [ Flash firing ], [ E-TTL II meter.

], and

[ Flash exposure compensation ] under [ External flash func. setting ].

([ Shutter synchronization ] can also be set with certain EX-series

Speedlites.)

If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

COP

Y

270

3 Setting the Flash N

External Speedlite Custom Function Settings

For details on the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the

Speedlite’s (sold separately) instruction manual.

1

Select [External flash C.Fn setting].

2

Set the desired functions.

Select the number, then press < 0 >.

Select the setting, then press < 0 >.

With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [

Y

] Custom

Function is set to [ TTL flash metering ] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always fire at full output.

Clear Settings

COP

1

Select [Clear settings].

2

Select the settings to be cleared.

Select [ Clear built-in flash set.

],

[ Clear external flash set.

], or [ Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.

], then press

< 0 >.

On the confirmation dialog, select

[ OK ]. Then the flash settings or

Custom Function settings will all be cleared.

The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with the camera’s [ Flash control ] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.

271

Using Wireless Flash

N

The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EXseries, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.

Be sure to read about wireless flash photography (optical transmission) in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.

Slave Unit Settings and Position

Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of slave units can be used and controlled together.

(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.

(2) Set the external Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same channel as set on the camera.

*

1

(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown below.

(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.

*

2 COP

Example of Wireless Flash Set-up

Approx. 10 m

(32.8 ft.)

Indoors

Outdoors

Approx. 7 m

(23.0 ft.)

Approx. 80°

Approx. 5 m

(16.4 ft.)

Approx. 7 m

(23.0 ft.)

272

Using Wireless Flash N

*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, it operates regardless of the channel set on the camera.

*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and be received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed flash head and wireless sensor, make sure it fires when you take pictures.

Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off

To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s

< B > button.

COP

Y

The camera’s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash shooting with radio transmission.

273

Using Wireless Flash N

Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations

The table below shows the possible configurations for wireless flash shooting. Choose the configuration suiting the subject, shooting conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.

External Speedlite

Quantity

A:B

Flash

Ratio

C

Flash exp. comp.

Built-in

Flash

Single -

Single

Multiple

-

-

-

-

Page

Setting

Wireless

Functions

p.275

0

Used

p.277

0 : 3

-

p.278

0

Firing

Group

1

1

-

All

All

Multiple Set -

p.279

0 1 (A:B)

Fully

Automatic

(E-TTL II autoflash)

Multiple Set

Multiple -

Multiple Set

Set

-

-

-

Used

Used

0 1 (A:B C)

p.280

p.281

Y

0 + 3 1 All and 2

0 + 3 1 (A:B) 2

0 + 3 1 (A:B C) 2 Multiple Set

• FE lock

Set

External Speedlite

Used

• Flash exposure compensation

COP

p.282

Setting

Built-in

Flash Quantity

A, B, C

Flash

Output

Page

Wireless

Functions

Firing

Group

Single/

Multiple

0 1 All

0 1 (A:B:C) Manual

Flash

Multiple

Single/

Multiple

Set -

p.283

Used 0 + 3 1 All and 2

0 + 3 1 (A:B:C) 2 Multiple Set Used

274

Even if the built-in flash is disabled in the camera settings, it will still fire in order to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash fired to control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending on the shooting conditions.

Using Wireless Flash N

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite

This shows the most basic setup for fully-automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite.

Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless flash shooting. Therefore, these steps are omitted in other wireless flash setups explained on the pages hereafter.

On the menu screens, the < 0 / 1 > icons refer to the external Speedlite, and the < 3 / 2 > icons refer to the built-in

1 flash.

Press the <

Y

I

> button to raise the

For wireless flash shooting, be sure to raise the built-in flash.

COP

2

Select [Flash control].

Under the [ z 1 ] tab, select [ Flash control ].

3

Select [Built-in flash settings].

275

Using Wireless Flash N

4

Set [Flash mode] to [E-TTL II].

5

Set [Wireless func.] to [

0

].

6

Set [Channel].

Set the channel (1-4) to the same one as the slave unit.

7

Set [Firing group] to [

1

All].

Y

8

COP

Check that the slave unit is ready to fire, then while the [ Built-in flash settings ] screen is displayed, press the < B > button.

X The slave unit will fire.

9

Take the picture.

Set the camera and take the picture in the same way as with normal flash shooting.

To terminate wireless flash shooting, set [ Wireless func.

] to [ Disable ].

276

Setting [ E-TTL II meter.

] to [ Evaluative ] is recommended.

Wireless MULTI flash shooting is not possible.

Using Wireless Flash N

Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and the Built-in Flash

This is fully automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite and the built-in flash.

You can change the flash ratio between the external Speedlite and built-in flash to adjust how the shadows look on the subject.

1

COP

Y

0

:

3

].

2

Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture.

Select [ 1 : 2 ] and set the flash ratio within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio to the right of 1:1 is not possible.

If the built-in flash does not fire sufficient light, set a higher ISO speed

(p.154).

The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments).

277

Using Wireless Flash N

Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites

Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [ Firing group ] setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple

Speedlites.

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

Wireless func. : 0

Channel : (Same as slave units)

[

1

Y

Convenient when you need a large flash output. All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain

COP

No matter which firing group (A, B, or C) the slave units belong to, they will all fire as one group.

1

Set [Firing group] to [

1

All].

2

Take the picture.

278

Using Wireless Flash N

[

1

(A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups

A B

You can divide the slave units into groups A and B, and change the flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.

Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual and set one slave unit to firing group A and the other to firing group B.

Position the Speedlites as shown in the illustration.

1

Set [Firing group] to [

1

(A:B)].

Y

COP

2

Set the A:B flash ratio and shoot.

Select [ A:B fire ratio ] and set the flash ratio.

The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments).

279

Using Wireless Flash N

[ 1 (A:B C)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups

A

C

B

This is a variant of the [ 1 (A:B) ] setup.

This setup has group C eliminating the background shadows created by groups

A and B.

Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction manual and set three slave units to firing group A, B, and C, respectively. Position the Speedlites as shown in the illustration.

1

Set [Firing group] to [

1

(A:B C)].

Y

2

COP

Set the A:B flash ratio and the flash exposure compensation amount for C, then shoot.

Select [ A:B fire ratio ] and set the flash ratio.

Select [ Grp.C exp. comp.

] and set the flash exposure compensation amount.

280

If [ Firing group ] is set to [ 1 (A:B) ], the slave units in firing group C will not fire.

If firing group C is pointed toward the main subject, overexposure may result.

Using Wireless Flash N

Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and

Multiple External Speedlites

The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained

on pages 278-280.

The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [ Firing group ] setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple

Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.

1

Basic settings:

Flash mode : E-TTL II

Wireless func. : 0 + 3

Channel : (Same as slave units)

A

2

Select one of the following: [ 1 All and 2 ], [ 1 (A:B) 2 ], or [ 1 (A:B COP

].

1 (A:B) 2 ], set the A:B flash ratio and shoot.

With [ 1 (A:B C) 2 ], set the A:B flash ratio and flash exposure compensation amount for C, then shoot.

C

B A B

[ 1 All and 2 ] [ 1 (A:B) 2 ] [ 1 (A:B C) 2 ]

281

Using Wireless Flash N

Creative Wireless Flash Shooting

Flash exposure compensation

When [ Flash mode ] is set to [ E-TTL II ], flash exposure compensation can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings that can be set (see below) vary depending on the

[ Wireless func.

] and [ Firing group ] settings.

Flash exposure compensation

The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash and all the external Speedlites.

2 exp. comp.

The flash exposure compensation is

1 exp. comp.

Y

The flash exposure compensation is applied to all the external Speedlites.

COP

The flash exposure compensation is applied to both groups A and B.

Grp.C exp. comp.

The flash exposure compensation is applied to group C.

FE lock

If [ Flash mode ] is set to [ E-TTL II ], you can press the < B >

button to perform FE lock (p.258).

282

Using Wireless Flash N

Manual Setting of the Flash Output for Wireless Flash Shooting

When [ Flash mode ] is set to [ Manual flash ], flash exposure can be set manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([ 1 flash output] ,

[ Group A output ], etc.) vary depending on the [ Wireless func.

] setting

(see below).

Wireless func.: 0

Firing group: 1 All

The manual flash output setting is applied to all the external Speedlites.

Firing group: 1 (A:B:C)

You can divide the slave units into

Groups A, B, and C and set the flash output separately for each group.

Y

0 + 3

Firing group: 1 All and 2

You can set the flash output separately for the external

COP

Firing group: 1 (A:B:C) 2

You can divide the slave units into

Groups A, B, and C and set the flash output separately for each group. You can also set the flash output for the built-in flash.

Built-in flash will be output at 1/4 - 1/128 when 0 + 3 is set.

283

MEMO

COP

Y

284

8

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

(Live View Shooting)

Y monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”.

COP setting the Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch to < A >.

If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the

LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.

Using a tripod is recommended.

Remote Live View Shooting

With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.536) installed on your computer,

you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the

Software Instruction Manual (p.539) on the CD-ROM.

285

A

Shooting with the LCD Monitor

1

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

A

>.

2

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

The Live View image will closely match the brightness level of the actual image you capture.

3

Focus on the subject.

Y

the current AF method (p.299).

4

COP

Press the shutter button completely.

X

The picture is taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor.

X

When the playback display ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically.

Press the < 0 > button to exit the

Live View shooting.

286

The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the image-recording quality is set to JPEG 73 ).

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > shooting mode, you can check the depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.

During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots.

You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.248) for Live View shooting.

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Enabling Live View Shooting

Set [ z 5: Live View shoot.

] (the [ z 3 ] tab in < A >) to [ Enable ].

Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting

(Approx. number of shots)

Temperature

No Flash

Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

270

Low Temperatures

(0°C / 32°F)

260

50% Flash Use 250 240

The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and

CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

Y possible for approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), or for approx. 2 hr. 10 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F).

COP damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.

General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 310-311.

You can also focus by pressing the < p > button.

When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder shooting.

If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn off automatically after the time set in [ 5 2: Auto power off

] (p.69). If [

5 2:

Auto power off ] is set to [ Disable ], Live View shooting will end automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).

With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the

Live View image on a TV screen (p.385). Note that no sound will be

output. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [ 5 3:

Video system ] correctly to [ For NTSC ] or [ For PAL ] (depending on the video standard of your TV set).

287

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Information Display

Each time you press the < B > button, the information display will change.

Possible shots

HDR shooting/

Multiple exposures/

Multi Shot

Noise Reduction

Shooting mode

Maximum burst/

Number of remaining multiple exposures

Battery check

Temperature warning

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Histogram display

Card for recording/ playback

AF method

Drive mode

Metering mode/

Flash firing

( A mode)

Image-recording quality

White balance/

White balance correction

AE lock

COP

Y

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Exposure simulation

Flash ready/Flash off

AEB/FEB

Shutter speed

ISO speed

Flash exposure compensation

Highlight tone priority

GPS connection indicator Aperture

Exposure compensation Digital compass

Eye-Fi card transmission status Exposure level indicator

288

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

The histogram can be displayed when [ z 5: Expo. simulation: Enable ]

(p.296) is set.

You can display the electronic level by pressing the < B > button

(p.75). Note that if the AF method is set to [

u +Tracking ] or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot be displayed.

When < g > is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.

If < g > is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.

If Multi Shot Noise Reduction, bulb exposure, or flash is used, the

< g > icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.

Y

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same COP or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

289

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

Scene Icons

In the < A > shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

Subject Portrait *1

Movement

Nature and

Outdoor

Scene

Non-portrait

Movement Close *2

Background

Color

Background

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky

Included

Backlit

Sunset

Spotlight

*3

COP

Y

*3

Light blue

Orange

Dark Dark blue

With

Tripod

*4*5 *3 *4*5 *3

*1:Displayed only when the AF method is set to [ u +Tracking ]. If another AF method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

*2:Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3:The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.

*4:Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.

290

A Shooting with the LCD Monitor

*5:Displayed with any of the lenses below:

• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II • EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II

• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.

*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.

Final Image Simulation

The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for

Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the Live View image, so you can see what the captured image will look like.

The Live View image will automatically show the effects of the settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting

Picture Style

Y be reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Metering mode

COP

Exposure (with [ z 5: Expo. simulation: Enable ] set)

Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Distortion correction

Highlight tone priority

Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)

Cautions for distortion correction during Live View shooting are on page

183.

291

Shooting Function Settings

B / q / R / f / y / i / A Settings

While the Live View image is displayed, if you press the < n >,

< o >, < m >, or < b > button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to set the respective shooting function.

By pressing the < n > button and then the < B > button, you can set WB shift and WB bracketing.

COP

Y

292

When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle will be displayed in the center.

Shooting Function Settings

Q

Quick Control

In the < d > < s > < f > < a > < F > modes, the AF method , Drive mode , Metering mode, Recording/playing back card and image quality , White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set.

In the < A > mode, you can set the items in bold and the flash firing.

1

Press the <

Q

> button

( 7 )

.

X The settable functions will be displayed.

2

Use < 9

Y

X

The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen.

COP

6 > or < 5 > dial to set it.

To set the RAW image-recording quality, press < 0 >.

To select the card for recording/ playing back, WB Shift/Bracketing, or

Picture Style parameters, press the

< B > button.

Press < 0 > to finalize the setting and return to Live View shooting.

293

3

Menu Function Settings

z

5

When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to < A >, the Live

View shooting menu options will appear under the [ z 5 ] and [ z 6 ] tabs (the

[ z 3 ] tab in < A >).

The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings become invalid).

Live View shooting

You can set Live View shooting to [ Enable ] or [ Disable ].

AF method

You can select [ u +Tracking ], [

Y

], or [ FlexiZone -

Single

]. See pages 299-307 for the AF method.

Continuous AF

The default setting is [

COP makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the shutter button halfway. If [ Enable ] is set, the lens will operate constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the number of possible shots due to shorter battery life.

If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to < MF > during

Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.

294

3 Menu Function Settings

Grid display

With [ 3x3 l ] or [ 6x4 m ], you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [ 3x3+diag n ], the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the subject.

4 b c

Aspect ratio N

The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [ 3:2 ], [ 4:3 ], [ 16:9 ], or [ 1:1 ].

The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when one of the following aspect ratios is set: [ 4:3 ] [ 16:9 ] [ 1:1 ].

JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images will always be saved with the [ 3:2 ] aspect ratio. Since aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image can be

Image

Quality

3 / 1 generated in the set aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the camera or EOS software. When you display RAW images

Y area.

3:2

5472x3648

(20.0 megapixels)

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.) COP

16:9

4864x3648

(17.7 megapixels)

5472x3072*

(16.8 megapixels)

1:1

3648x3648

(13.3 megapixels)

41 a / 61

3648x2432

(8.9 megapixels)

4104x2736

(11.2 megapixels)

2736x1824

(5.0 megapixels)

1920x1280

(2.5 megapixels)

720x480

(350,000 pixels)

3248x2432*

(7.9 megapixels)

3648x2736

(10.0 megapixels)

2432x1824

(4.4 megapixels)

1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixels)

640x480

(310,000 pixels)

3648x2048*

(7.5 megapixels)

4104x2310*

(9.5 megapixels)

2736x1536*

(4.2 megapixels)

1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels)

720x408*

(290,000 pixels)

2432x2432

(5.9 megapixels)

2736x2736

(7.5 megapixels)

1824x1824

(3.3 megapixels)

1280x1280

(1.6 megapixels)

480x480

(230,000 pixels)

295

3 Menu Function Settings

The image-recording quality settings marked with an asterisk do not match the respective aspect ratio exactly.

The recorded image areas of the aspect ratios marked with an asterisk may be slightly different from what are displayed. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting.

If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.

Exposure simulation N

Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of the actual image (exposure) will look.

• Enable ( g )

The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure

Y

• During e ( E / g )

Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to COP image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.

• Disable ( E )

The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live

View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard brightness.

296

3 Menu Function Settings z

6

N

Silent LV shooting N

• Mode 1

You can suppress the camera noise when shooting. Continuous shooting is also possible. If < o > is set, you can shoot at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 10.0 fps.

• Mode 2

When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the

Y resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.

• Disable

Be sure to set it to [

COP those listed in below) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you use an Extension Tube. If [ Mode 1 ] or [ Mode 2 ] is set, the standard exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may result.

If you use [ Mode 1 ] with continuous shooting, the [ Disable ] setting will be applied to the second and subsequent shots.

When shooting with flash, the [ Disable ] setting will be applied regardless of the [ Silent LV shoot.

] setting. (Silent shooting cannot be performed.)

When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [ Disable ]. The flash will not fire if it is set to [ Mode 1 ] or [ Mode 2 ].

If [ Mode 2

] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.248), the operation

will be the same as with [ Mode 1 ].

With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [ Mode 1 ] or [ Mode 2 ].

297

3 Menu Function Settings

Metering timer N

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time).

COP

Y

298

Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To start Live View shooting again, press the < 0 > button.

• Selecting [ z 3: Dust Delete Data ], [ 5 3: Sensor cleaning ], [ 5 4: Clear all camera settings ], or [ 5 4: firmware ver.

].

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Changes in AF Speed Depending On the AF Control Method

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, the AF control method used

(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) will switch automatically depending on the lens and function used, such as magnified view. This can greatly affect the AF speed and the camera may take a longer time to focus (phase-difference detection generally allows faster AF focusing). For details, refer to the Canon Web site.

Selecting the AF Method

You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your subject. The following AF methods are provided: [ u (face)+Tracking ]

(p.300), [

FlexiZone - Multi

] (p.302), and [

FlexiZone - Single

] (p.304).

If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

< MF

>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.308).

Y

Select the AF method.

Under the [ z 5 ] tab (the [ z 3 ] tab in

< A >), select [ AF method ].

COP press < 0 >.

When the Live View image is displayed, you can press the

< o > button to select the AF method.

299

Using AF to Focus (AF Method) u

(face)+Tracking:

c

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point < p > also moves to track the face.

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

Select an AF point.

2

When a face is detected, the < p > frame will appear over the face to be focused on.

If multiple faces are detected, < q > will be displayed. Use < 9 > to move the < q

Y want to focus on.

3

If no faces are detected, the camera COP

Focus on the subject.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

X When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

300

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.286).

Focusing on a subject other than a human face

Press < 9 > or < 0 >, and the AF frame < > will appear in the center. Then use < 9 > to move the AF frame over the desired subject. Once the AF frame achieves focus, it will track the subject even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.

COP

Y

If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible. You can prevent this by setting [ z 5: Continuous AF ] to

[ Enable ].

An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

The < p > may cover only part of the face.

Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture, the < p > will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button halfway in this situation, the subject will be focused on in FlexiZone -

Multi method with automatic selection.

The shape of the AF frame < > varies depending on the size and shape of the subject.

301

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

FlexiZone - Multi:

o

You can focus over a wide area with up to 31 AF points (automatic selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing

(zone selection).

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X

The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

Area frame

Zone frame

2

Select the AF point.

N

Pressing < 9

Y

> or < 0 > will toggle between automatic selection and zone selection. In the < A > mode, automatic selection is set COP

> to select the zone. To return to the center zone, press < 9 > or < 0 > again.

3

Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.

X When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X If focus is not achieved, the area frame will turn orange.

302

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.286).

COP

Y

If the camera does not focus on the desired target subject with automatic

AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [ FlexiZone

- Single ] and refocus.

Depending on the [ z 5: Aspect ratio ], the number of AF points varies.

At [ 3:2 ], there are 31 AF points. At [ 4:3 ] and [ 1:1 ], there are 25 AF points.

And at [ 16:9 ], 21 AF points. Also, at [ 16:9 ], there are three zones.

For movie shooting, there are 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if [ 640x480 ] is set) and three zones (or nine zones if [ 640x480 ] is set).

303

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

FlexiZone - Single:

d

The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you want to focus on a particular subject.

AF point

1

Display the Live View image.

Press the < 0 > button.

X

The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

X

The AF point < > will appear.

During movie shooting, if [ Movie

Servo AF ] is set to [ Enable ], the AF point will be displayed in a larger size.

2

Move the AF point.

Use < 9

Y be moved to the edge of the screen.)

3

Pressing < 9 > or < 0 > will return COP

Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.

X

When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound.

X

If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

4

Take the picture.

Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to

take the picture (p.286).

304

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Notes for AF

AF Operation

Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again.

The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation.

If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed, the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light source.

If [ u +Tracking ] is set, magnified view is not possible.

When [ FlexiZone - Multi ] is set and you press the < u > button, the center of the selected zone (or image center with automatic selection) will be magnified.

When [ FlexiZone - Single

Y u > button, the area covered by the AF point will be magnified. If you press the shutter button halfway, focusing will be performed while displaying the magnified view. If focusing is difficult in magnified view, return to

COP between the normal and magnified views.

If you magnify the view after focusing with [ FlexiZone - Multi ] or

[ FlexiZone - Single ] in the normal view, precise focus may not be achieved.

When in magnified view, contrast-detection AF will be applied regardless of the lens used. The AF speed will therefore become slow.

When in magnified view, Continuous AF (p.294) will not be executed.

In magnified view, the image will be displayed without distortion correction applied.

305

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are lost.

Subjects in low light.

Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.

Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.).

Fine lines and subject outlines.

Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.

Night scenes or dots of light.

Under fluorescent or LED lighting when the image flickers.

Extremely small subjects.

Subjects at the edge of the picture.

Subjects strongly reflecting light.

Y animal in a cage).

Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still COP

A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

Performing AF while the subject is very far out of focus.

Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.

A special effect filter is used.

Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

306

Using AF to Focus (AF Method)

If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to

< MF > and focus manually.

If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus, aim the center AF point or zone over the subject to focus on, focus again, and then take the picture.

The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series

Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.

During magnified view, camera shake may make it harder to achieve focus. Using a tripod is recommended.

COP

Y

307

MF: Focusing Manually

You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).

1

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>.

Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus roughly.

2

Display the magnifying frame.

Press the < u > button.

X The magnifying frame will appear.

Magnifying frame

AE lock

Magnified area position

Magnification (Approx.)

3

Use < 9 > to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want COP

9 > will return the magnifying frame to the screen’s center.

4

Magnify the image.

Each time you press the < u > button, the magnification within the frame will change as follows:

Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x

While in magnified view, you can use

< 9 > to scroll around the magnified image.

308

MF: Focusing Manually

5

Focus manually.

While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.

After achieving focus, press the < u > button to return to the normal view.

6

Take the picture.

Check the exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the

picture (p.286).

COP

Y

309

310

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Image Quality

When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable.

Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.

If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.

If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again.

White < s > and Red < E > Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live

View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white < s > or red

< E > icon will appear.

The white < s

Y deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.

The red < E

COP camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.

Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the < s > or < E > icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn off the camera.

If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the white < s > icon is displayed.

Shooting Results

In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.

Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured in the normal view range.

General Live View Shooting Cautions

Live View Image

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image.

Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed

Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View image is different from that of the recorded image.)

If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live

View shooting under the actual light source.

If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live

View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may will correctly show the bright area.

Y

In low light, if you set the [ 5 2: LCD brightness ] to a bright setting, noise or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.

COP pronounced than in the actual image.

Custom Functions

During Live View shooting, some Custom Functions will not work

(settings become invalid). For details, see p.432-433.

Lens and Flash

The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available since the second half of 2011.

FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.

311

MEMO

COP

Y

312

9

Shooting Movies

Y

Movie shooting switch to < k >.

COP

For cards that can record movies, see page 5.

If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is recommended.

Full HD 1080

Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High-

Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning lines).

313

k

Shooting Movies

/ Autoexposure Shooting

When the shooting mode is set to < A >, < d >, or < F >, autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Exposure control will be the same for all the shooting modes.

Recording movies

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

A

>, <

d

>, or <

F

>.

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

X The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

3

Focus on the subject.

Y

AF or manual focus (p.299-309).

4

When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus with

COP

Shoot the movie.

Press the < 0 > button to start shooting a movie.

X While the movie is being shot, the

“ o ” mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen.

X Sound will be recorded by the built-in microphone.

To stop shooting the movie, press the

< 0 > button again.

Built-in microphone

314

k Shooting Movies

Shutter-priority AE

When the shooting mode is < s >, you can manually set the shutter speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

s

>.

Shutter speed

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the desired shutter speed.

3

While looking at the LCD monitor, turn the < 6 > dial. The settable Y rate.

• 6 5 B 4 :

COP

7

1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

4

Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.314).

Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.

If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

315

k Shooting Movies

Aperture-priority AE

When the shooting mode is < f >, you can manually set the aperture for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

f

>.

Aperture

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the desired aperture.

3

While looking at the LCD monitor, turn the < 6 > dial.

Y

4

COP

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.314).

316

Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be recorded.

k Shooting Movies

ISO speed in the < A > mode

In the < A > mode, the ISO speed will be set automatically within

ISO 100 - ISO 16000.

ISO Speed in the < d >, < s >, < f >, and < F > Mode

The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.

Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings

] (p.157), if you set the [

ISO speed range ]’s [ Maximum ] setting to [ H1 (25600) ] in the < d >, < f >, or

< F > mode, the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you set the [ Maximum ] and

[ Minimum ] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100

- ISO 16000), it will not take effect.

If [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] is set to [ Enable

] (p.180), the

automatic ISO range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000.

Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings ], [ Auto ISO range ] and [ Min.

[ shutter spd.

ISO speed range ] cannot be set in the <

Y s > mode.

COP

For [ ISO speed range ], if [ Maximum ] is set to [ H2 (51200) ] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the automatic ISO range’s maximum for movie shooting will be H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600, except in

< A > and < s > modes). It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200.

317

k Shooting Movies

Notes for < A >, < d >, < s >, < f >, and < F > Modes

In the < A > mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera

is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.319).

You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the < A > button

(except in the < A

> mode, p.229). The exposure setting will be

displayed for the time length set with [ z 6: Metering timer ]. After applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing the < S > button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the < S > button.)

You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the

< R > switch to the left and turning the < 5 > dial (except in the

< A > mode).

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter speed at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still

photo (p.323). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed.

Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for still photo shooting.

In the < A >, < d >, and < F

Y not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.

Equipped with an LED Light

During movie shooting in the < A >, < d >, < s >, < f >, and < F > modes, this camera supports the function that turns on the Speedlite’s

LED light automatically in low-light conditions. For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.

318

k Shooting Movies

Scene Icons

During movie shooting in the < A > mode, an icon representing the scene detected by the camera will be displayed, and the shooting will be adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

Background

Bright

Subject

Portrait

*1

Non-Portrait

Nature and

Outdoor Scene

Close

*2

Background

Color

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky Included

Dark

Backlit

Sunset

Spotlight

*3

COP

Y

*3

Light blue

Orange

Dark blue

*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [ u +Tracking ]. If another AF method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is detected.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension

Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.

319

k Shooting Movies

Manual Exposure Shooting

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users.

Shutter speed

Aperture

1

Set the Mode Dial to <

a

>.

2

Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <

k

>.

Set the ISO speed.

3

Press the < m > button.

X

The ISO speed setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor.

Turn the < speed.

6

Y

> dial to set the ISO

4

For details on the ISO speed, see the next page.

COP

aperture.

Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.

To set the shutter speed, turn the

< 6 > dial. The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate.

• 6 5 B 4 :

1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.

• 8 7 : 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.

To set the aperture, turn the < 5 > dial.

If it cannot be set, set the < R > switch to the left, then turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial.

320

k Shooting Movies

5

Focus and shoot the movie.

The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”

(p.314).

ISO Speed in the < a > Mode

With [ Auto ] ( A ), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO

100 - ISO 16000. Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings ], if you set [ ISO speed range ]’s [ Maximum ] setting to [ H1 (25600)

] (p.157), the

automatic ISO range will not expand to the H1 maximum. Even if you set the [ Maximum ] and [ Minimum ] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 16000), it will not take effect.

You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 16000 in

[

1/3-stop increments. Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings ], if you set

ISO speed range ]’s [ Maximum

Y

H1 (25600) ], the manual

ISO speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600). You can also set the [ Maximum ] and

[ Minimum ] to a range narrower than the default range (ISO 100 -

ISO 16000).

If [ z

COP

Enable

] (p.180), the auto

or manual ISO setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000.

Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings ], [ Auto ISO range ] and [ Min. shutter spd.

] cannot be set (p.158-159) for movie shooting.

321

k Shooting Movies

Under [ ISO speed range ], if [ Maximum ] is set to [ H2 (51200) ] and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the maximum ISO speed for the manual ISO range during movie shooting will be H1

(equivalent to ISO 25600). It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200.

Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.

When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the subject’s movement will look.

If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

Under [ 8 3: Custom Controls ], if [ s : Expo comp (hold btn, turn

)

] is set (p.455), you can set exposure compensation while Auto ISO

is set.

When Auto ISO is set, you can press the < A > button to lock the ISO speed.

Y

If you press the < A > button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.323)

compared to when the < A > button was pressed.

By pressing the < B

COP

322

k Shooting Movies

Information Display

Each time you press the < B > button, the information display will change.

Maximum burst

Possible shots

Movie shooting mode

: Autoexposure ( A )

: Autoexposure ( d / F )

: Shutter-priority

: Aperture-priority

: Manual exposure

AF method

Drive mode

Movie recording size

Frame rate

Compression method

Headphone volume

Movie Servo AF

Recording level: Manual

LED light

AE lock

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Shutter speed

Digital compass

Recording level meter

Aperture

GPS connection indicator

Exposure compensation

Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time

AF point (FlexiZone - Single)

Battery check

Temperature warning

Histogram ( a mode)

Time code

Writing indicator

Card for recording/ playback

Recording movie

Image-recording quality

COP

Y

White balance

Picture Style

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Exposure mode

L : Autoexposure

:Shutterpriority AE

: Aperturepriority AE

K : Manual exposure

MOV/MP4

ISO speed

Highlight tone priority

Attenuator

Wind filter

Exposure level indicator

* Applies to a single movie clip.

323

k Shooting Movies

You can display the electronic level by pressing the < B

> button (p.75).

Note that if the AF method is set to [ u +Tracking ] or the camera is

connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.385), the electronic level

cannot be displayed.

The electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting. (The electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a movie.)

When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time.

324

Cautions for Movie Shooting

Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may

Under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

Y

Record func.

] is set to [ Rec. to multiple

] (p.147), the movie cannot be recorded to both the

CF card [ f ] and SD card [ g ]. If [ Rec. separately ] or [ Rec. to multiple ]

If < Q

COP

Playback ].

shooting, the white balance may also change.

If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may flicker.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended. Zooming the lens may cause changes in the exposure to be recorded regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes or not.

During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press the < u > button.

Be careful not to cover the built-in microphone (p.314) with your finger,

etc.

[ Multi Shot Noise Reduction

] (p.176) and [

Distortion

] (p.182) cannot

be set. (They will not function.)

If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the movie shooting will end.

General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 351-352.

If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on

pages 310-311.

k Shooting Movies

Notes for Movie Shooting

Movie-related settings are under the [ z 4 ] and [ z 5

] tabs (p.342). In the

< A > mode, they are under the [ z 2 ] and [ z 3 ] tabs.

A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size exceeds

4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent approx. 4 GB.

The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the movie recording size is set to L ).

You can also focus on the image by pressing the < p > button.

Under [ z 5: V button function ], if [ / k ] [ q / k ] is selected, you can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie

shooting (p.348).

Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.314).

Most external microphones (commercially available) equipped with a

3.5 mm diameter mini plug can be used.

By using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the

movie on a TV screen (p.385). If the picture does not appear on the TV

screen, check if [ 5 3: Video system

Y

For NTSC ] or

[ For PAL ] (depending on the video standard of your TV set).

By connecting stereo headphones (commercially available) equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal

COP and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is < Q > or < k >. Set the shooting timing switch to < 2 > (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to < o > (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie recording time will be as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F:

Approx. 1 hr. 30 min.

The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a

(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available since the second half of 2011.

Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.

Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

325

k Shooting Movies

Final Image Simulation

The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for

Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the image so you can see what the captured image will look like.

During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the effects of the settings listed below.

Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting

Picture Style

* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be reflected.

White balance

White balance correction

Exposure

Depth of field

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Peripheral illumination correction

Chromatic aberration correction

Highlight tone priority

COP

Y

326

k Shooting Movies

Shooting Still Photos

While shooting a movie, you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely.

Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting

If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.

The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed.

The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.

Under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

(p.146) is set to [

Standard ] or [

Y

], if [ Record func.

]

], the movies and still photos will be recorded to the same card. If [ Rec. separately ] or

[ Rec. to multiple ] is set, the movies will be recorded to the card set for [ Playback

COP image-recording quality set for the respective card.

Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting.

Function

Imagerecording

Quality

ISO Speed*

Exposure

Setting

Settings

As set in [ z 1: Image quality ].

When the movie recording size is [ 1920x1080 ] or [ 1280x720 ], the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [ 640x480 ], the aspect ratio will be 4:3.

• < A >: ISO 100 - ISO 6400

• < d >, < s >, < f >, and < F >: ISO 100 - ISO 16000

• < a >: See “ISO Speed in the < a

> mode” on page 321.

• < A >, < d >, and < F >: Automatically-set shutter speed and aperture.

• < s >: Manually-set shutter speed and automatically-set aperture.

• < f >: Manually-set aperture and automatically-set shutter speed.

• < a >: Manually-set shutter speed and aperture.

* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.

327

k Shooting Movies

If L 8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, or if [ z 5: V button function ] is set to [ / k ] or [ q / k ], you cannot take still photos.

Still photo shooting during movie shooting will have approx. 99% coverage with L or w , and approx. 98% with x (when the imagerecording quality is set to JPEG 73 ).

AEB cannot be used.

Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.

Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.

However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.

Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may stop automatically.

AF is possible during movie shooting. However, the following may occur:

• Focus may become far off momentarily.

• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.

• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.

Y

Exposure compensation up to ±3 stops can be applied for still photo

COP

If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting, using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller imagerecording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos are also recommended.

You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.

The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During movie shooting, the camera will switch to single-image shooting.

328

Shooting Function Settings

B

/

R

/

f

/

i

/

A

Settings

If you press the < n >, < o >, < m >, or < b > button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to set the respective function.

During manual-exposure shooting (p.320), you can press the

< m > button to set the ISO speed.

By pressing the < n > button and then the < B > button, you can set WB shift and WB bracketing.

Note that the following cannot be set: < q > Metering mode, < y >

Flash exposure compensation, < w > HDR mode, and < P >

Multiple exposures.

Q

Quick Control

Y

In the < d >, < s >, < f >, < a >, and < F > modes, the AF method ,

Drive mode, Movie recording size , Recording level (set manually only), Volume (headphones), Recording/playing back card and image quality

COP

Lighting Optimizer can be set.

In the < A > mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.

1

Press the <

Q

> button

( 7 )

.

X The settable functions will be displayed.

2

Select a function and set it.

Use < 9 > to select a function.

X The setting of the selected function is displayed on the screen.

Turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to set it.

To set the movie recording size or to set the image quality to RAW, press

< 0 >.

329

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

To select the card for recording/ playing back, WB Shift/Bracketing, or

Picture Style parameters, press the

< B > button.

Pressing < 0 > will return the camera to movie shooting.

3

Setting the Movie Recording Size

With [ z 4: Movie rec quality ] (the [ z 2 ] tab in < A >), you can set the movie recording format, movie recording size

(size, frame rate, compression method), and other functions.

Y

Movie rec. size ] screen switches automatically depending on the [ 5 3: Video system ]

setting (p.491).

COP

MOV/MP4

You can select the movie’s recording format.

MOV

The movie is recorded in the MOV format (file extension: “.MOV”).

Convenient for editing with a computer.

MP4

The movie is recorded in the MP4 format (file extension: “.MP4”). This format is compatible with a much larger range of playback systems than the MOV format.

330

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie Recording Size

You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.

Image Size

L 1920x1080

Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is

16:9.

w 1280x720

High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

x 640x480

Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.

Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)

6 29.97 fps / 8 59.94 fps

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

5 25.00 fps / 7 50.00 fps

Australia, etc.).

COP

4 23.98 fps / B 24.00 fps

Mainly for motion pictures. Regarding B

, see page 333.

Movies recorded at L 8 (59.94fps) or 7 (50.00fps) may not be played back properly on other devices, due to the heavy data processing load during playback.

The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen depends on whether [ 5 3: Video system ] is set to [ For NTSC ] or [ For PAL ].

331

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Compression Method

W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)

Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file size is larger than with IPB (Standard) and IPB (Light), the movie is more suited for editing.

X IPB (Standard)

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Since the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), you can shoot longer (with the same card).

IPB (Light)

Selectable when the movie recording format is set to [ MP4 ]. The movie is recorded at bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard) resulting in a smaller file size and compatibility with a larger range of playback systems. Of the three methods available, this method allows the capacity.

Y

COP

332

If L 8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, certain functions will not be available.

• Movie Servo AF will not work.

• Contrast-detection AF will be applied. (Focusing may take longer than usual.)

• Still photos cannot be taken.

If you change the [ 5 3: Video system ] setting, set the movie recording size again.

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

24.00p

Records the movie at a frame rate of 24.00 fps. Applies to Full HD quality.

If [ Enable ] is set, the movie is recorded in LBW or LBX .

If you have set [ Movie rec. size ] and then set [ 24.00p

] to [ Enable ], set the

[ Movie rec. size ] again.

COP

Y

Cautions for [24.00p: Enable]

[ 5 3: Video system ] cannot be set.

[ 5 3: HDMI frame rate

] (p.350) cannot be set. The movie will be output

at 1080/24.00p via HDMI. If you connect the camera to a TV set etc. not compatible with the 1080/24.00p signal via HDMI, the movie may not appear.

If you set it back to [ Disable ], [ 5 3: HDMI frame rate ] will be set to

[ Auto ].

Even if you set it back to [ Disable ], the movie recording size will not revert to the original. Set the movie recording size again.

333

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

In MOV Format (Approx.)

Movie Recording

Quality

87 X

L

65

B4

W

65

B4

X w

87 W

87 X x 65 X

Total Recording Time on Card

4 GB 8 GB 16 GB

8 min.

17 min.

34 min.

5 min.

16 min.

11 min.

33 min.

23 min.

File Size

440 MB/min.

654 MB/min.

1 hr. 7 min.

225 MB/min.

In MP4 Format

Movie Recording

Quality

87 X

L

65

B4

65

B4

W

X

65

87 W w 87 X

65 x

65 X

65

6 min.

19 min.

50 min.

17 min.

13 min.

38 min.

35 min.

26 min.

Y

Total Recording Time on Card

16 GB 4 GB

8 min.

8 GB COP

5 min.

11 min.

35 min.

23 min.

1 hr. 10 min.

583 MB/min.

1 hr. 17 min.

196 MB/min.

1 hr. 41 min.

3 hr. 22 min.

75 MB/min.

(Approx.)

File Size

431 MB/min.

645 MB/min.

216 MB/min.

43 min.

6 min.

1 hr. 26 min.

2 hr. 53 min.

87 MB/min.

13 min.

26 min.

574 MB/min.

20 min.

40 min.

1 hr. 21 min.

187 MB/min.

2 hr. 5 min.

4 hr. 10 min.

8 hr. 20 min.

30 MB/min.

57 min.

1 hr. 55 min.

3 hr. 50 min.

66 MB/min.

2 hr. 43 min.

5 hr. 26 min. 10 hr. 53 min.

23 MB/min.

334

An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting

to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table (p.351).

3 Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting without interruption.

During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed in the movie-shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie and play it back.

Movie Shooting Time Limit Y will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the < 0 > button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.) COP

When shooting movies, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, “ buSY ” will be displayed on the LCD panel for a while. Still photo shooting is not possible while “ buSY ” is displayed on the screen.

335

3

Setting the Sound Recording

You can shoot movies while recording sound with the built-in monaural microphone or an external stereo microphone (commercially available). You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level.

Sound-recording settings are under

[ z 4: Sound recording ] (the [ z 2 ] tab in < A >).

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

Auto : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level.

Manual : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording level to one of 64 levels.

Select [ Rec. level

Y turning the < 5 > dial to adjust the sound-recording level.

While looking at the peak hold indicator (3 sec.), adjust so COP the sound will be distorted.

Disable : Sound will not be recorded. Also, no sound will be output

through HDMI output (p.348).

Wind Filter/Attenuator

Wind filter : When [ Enable ] is set, it reduces the wind noise when recording outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the built-in microphone. Note that [ Enable ] reduces low bass sounds, so set it to [ Disable ] when there is no wind. It will record a more natural sound than with [ Enable ].

Attenuator : Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [ Sound rec.

] is set to [ Auto ] or

[ Manual ] before shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to [ Enable ] is recommended.

336

3 Setting the Sound Recording

Using a microphone

Normally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound.

Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting an external stereo microphone (commercially available) equipped with a miniature stereo plug (

φ

3.5 mm) to the camera’s external

microphone IN terminal (p.23).

Using headphones

By connecting stereo headphones (commercially available) equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s

headphone terminal (p.23), you can listen to the sound during movie

shooting. If you are using an external stereo microphone

(commercially available), you can listen to the sound in stereo. To adjust the headphones’ sound volume, press the < Q > button and select < n >. Then turn < 5

> to adjust (p.329).

You can also use headphones during movie playback.

Y

When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to the COP

In the < A > mode, [ Sound recording ] can be set to [ On ] or [ Off ]. If [ On ] is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted automatically (same as with [ Auto ]), but the wind filter function will not take effect.

When the camera is connected to a TV set with the HDMI cable, sound will also be output (except when [ Sound recording ] is set to [ Off ]). If the sound from the TV set causes audio feedback, place the camera farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV set’s sound volume.

You can also adjust the headphones’ volume by pressing the < Q > button, then holding down the < c > button and titling < 9 > up or down.

The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.

Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

If [ z 5: Silent Control ] is set to [ Enable h

] (p.338), you can adjust the

sound-recording level with the < h > touch pad with less operation noise during movie shooting.

337

3

Silent Control

You can change the settings of the ISO speed, sound-recording level, etc., without making too much noise while shooting a movie.

When [ z 5: Silent Control ] (the [ z 3 ] tab in < A >) is set to [ Enable h ], you can use the touch pad < h > on the inner ring of the Quick Control Dial.

You can just touch the top, bottom, left, or right of < h > for silent operation.

During movie shooting, you can press the < Q > button to display the Quick

Control screen and change the functions below with < h >.

Settable

Y

Shooting Mode

A d / F s f a Functions

Shutter speed COP

ISO speed

Exposure compensation -

-

-

-

-

k k

-

k k

k k k k k *

1

Recording level*

2

k k k k k k k k k n Volume

*1: With Auto ISO set.

*2: With [ Sound recording: Manual ] set.

If [ z 5: Silent Control ] is set to [ Enable h ], you cannot change Quick

Control settings with the < 5 > Quick Control dial during movie shooting.

Even if you change the aperture silently with < h >, the movie will still record the lens aperture-driving sound.

If there is water or dirt on the < h >, the touch operation may not work. In such a case, use a clean cloth to clean the < h >. If it still does not work, wait a while and try again.

338

Before shooting a movie, you can use < h > with the [ Rec. level ] setting to adjust the sound-recording level.

3

Setting the Time Code

The time code is a time reference recorded automatically to synchronize the movie during movie shooting. It is recorded at all times in the following units: hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. It is mainly used during movie editing.

Use [ z 5: Time code ] (the [ z 3 ] tab in

< A >) to set the time code.

Count Up

Rec run : The time code counts up only while you are shooting a movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the

Free run movie files captured.

movie or not.

Y

Start Time Setting

Manual input setting : You can freely set the hour, minute, second, and frames.

Reset : The time set with [ Manual input setting ] and

[ Set to camera time ] is reset to “00:00:00.” or

“00:00:00:” (p.341).

Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to 00.

Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code.

If [ Free run ] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving

time (p.47), the time code will be affected.

If you use a different camera to play an MP4 movie recorded with this camera, the time code may not be displayed correctly.

339

3 Setting the Time Code

Movie Recording Count

You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.

Rec time : Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie shooting.

Time code : Indicates the time code during movie shooting.

Movie Playback Count

You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.

Rec time : Displays the recording time and playback time during movie playback.

Time code : Displays the time code during movie playback.

With [Time code] set:

COP

Y

During movie shooting During movie playback

340

Regardless of the [ Movie rec count ] setting, the time code will always be recorded to the movie file.

The [ Movie play count ] setting under [ z 5: Time code ] switches in tandem with the [ x 3: Movie play count ] setting. Changing either setting will automatically change the other.

“Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.

3 Setting the Time Code

HDMI

Time code

The time code can be appended to a movie that is output via HDMI

(p.350).

Enable : Appends time code to HDMI output movie.

Disable : Time code not appended to HDMI output movie.

Record command

When you record a movie that is an output from HDMI to an external recording device, the camera’s movie shooting start/stop can sync with the recording from that external recording device.

Enable : Synchronizes external recording device’s recording start/ stop with camera’s movie shooting start/stop.

Disable : Controls external device’s recording start/stop from external recording device.

Y

[ Time code ] or [ Rec command ], consult the manufacturer.

Drop Frame

COP

If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This correction function is called “drop frame.”

Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: Drop frame).

Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).

The time code will be displayed as follows:

Enable (DF)

Disable (NDF)

: 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)

: 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)

If the frame rate is 4 (23.98 fps), B (24.00 fps), 5 (25.00 fps), or

7 (50.00 fps), drop frame is not used. (If 4 / B is set or if [ 5 3: Video system ] is set to [ For PAL ], [ Drop frame ] will not be displayed.)

341

3

Menu Function Settings

z

4

When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to < k >, the movie shooting menu options will appear under the [ z 4 ] and [ z 5 ] tabs (the

[ z 2 ] [ z 3 ] tabs in < A >).

Movie Servo AF

During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject continuously. The default setting is [ Enable ].

When [Enable] is set: y The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you y are not pressing the shutter button halfway.

Y

power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.325).

y With certain lenses, the lens operation noise during focusing may be recorded. If this happens, use an external microphone

COP movie. Also, using the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM lens will reduce lens operation noise.

y If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to < MF > during

Movie Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to < A >.

342

If L8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not work.

Also, since contrast detection is used for AF control, it may take longer to focus.

3 Menu Function Settings y

If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop

Movie Servo AF, the AF point will turn gray. When you perform the same steps below, Movie Servo AF will resume.

• Press the < D > button.

• Under [ 8 3: Custom controls ], if a button is assigned to [ AF stop ], you can pause the Movie Servo AF while holding down that button. When you let go of the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.

y When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting after pressing the < M > or < x > button, changing the AF method, or performing some other operation, Movie Servo AF will resume automatically.

When [Disable] is set: y

Y p > button to focus.

AF method can select [ u +Tracking ], [ FlexiZone - Multi ], or [ FlexiZone -

Single ].

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.

• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page

306.

Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.

During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnification).

343

3 Menu Function Settings

Grid display

With [ 3x3 l ] or [ 6x4 m ], you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [ 3x3+diag n ], the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the subject.

Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.

Movie recording quality

You can set the movie recording format (MOV or MP4), movie

recording size, and 24.00p. For details, see page 330.

Sound recording

You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 336.

COP

Y

344

3 Menu Function Settings

Movie Servo AF speed N

You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF speed and its operation conditions.

This function is settable when [ Movie

Servo AF ] is set to [ Enable ] and [ AF method ] is set to [ FlexiZone - Single ].

Additionally, the function is only enabled when using a lens compatible with slow focus transition during movie shooting*.

When active : [ Always on

Y

AF speed during movie shooting). [ During shooting ] sets the

AF adjustment speed to take effect only during COP

: You can set the AF adjustment speed (focus transition speed) to one of five levels, from standard speed to slow, to obtain the desired effect.

* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting

USM lenses marketed in 2009 or later and STM lenses (for example, the EF-S 18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) support slow focus transition during movie shooting. For details, refer to the Canon Web site.

If L8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not function and therefore the settings above will not be available.

If [ AF method ] is set to [ u +Tracking ] or [ FlexiZone - Multi ], the AF adjustment speed will be equivalent to the [ Standard ] setting.

345

3 Menu Function Settings

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity N

You can change the Movie Servo AF’s tracking sensitivity to one of five levels.

This affects the responsiveness of AF tracking sensitivity when the AF point loses the subject, such as during panning or when an obstacle enters the

AF points.

This function is available when [ Movie

Servo AF ] is set to [ Enable ] and [ AF method ] is set to [ FlexiZone - Single ].

Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1

This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject if the AF point loses the original subject. The -2 setting

Y

-1 setting. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or when an obstacle enters the AF points.

COP

Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1

This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF point. The +2 setting makes the AF point more responsive than +1. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes, or to rapidly focus on another subject.

If L8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not function and therefore the settings above will not be available.

346

If [ AF method ] is set to [ u +Tracking ] or [ FlexiZone - Multi ], the tracking sensitivity will be equivalent to the [ 0 ] setting.

3 Menu Function Settings z

5

Silent LV shooting N

This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page

297.

Metering timer N

You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time).

Time code

Y

You can set the time code. For details, see pages 339-341.

Silent Control

When [ Enable h

COP h > and

Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie

shooting. For details, see page 338.

347

3 Menu Function Settings

V button function

You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie shooting.

Setting

/ z q / z

/ k q / k

Pressed Halfway

Metering and AF

Metering only

Metering and AF

Metering only

Pressed Completely

Still photo shooting

Still photo shooting

Starts/stops movie shooting

Starts/stops movie shooting

If [ / k ] or [ q / k ] is set, besides pressing the < 0 > button, you can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote

Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.248). However, with

[ / k ] or [ q / k

] set, still photo shooting (p.327) is not possible.

During movie shooting, the [ V button function function assigned to the shutter button with [ 8

Y

3: Custom Controls ].

HDMI output + LCD

The default setting is [ No mirroring ].

[No mirroring]

•

When HDMI output starts, the camera’s LCD monitor turns off.

•

Shooting information, AF point, and other details are overlaid on the

HDMI output movie. However, while viewing an external monitor connected to an external recording device, you can press the

< B > button to switch to output without any information overlay.

•

If you do not connect the HDMI output to an external device and only view the output on the camera’s LCD monitor, you cannot make the settings for output without an information overlay even by pressing the < B > button.

•

When recording a movie without an information overlay, use an external monitor to confirm that the shooting information, AF point, and other details are not displayed (confirm that the movie is output without an information overlay) before recording.

348

3 Menu Function Settings

[Mirroring]

•

The movie is displayed on the LCD monitor and via the HDMI output simultaneously.

•

The HDMI output movie does not show the shooting information,

AF frame, and other details (output without an information overlay).

If you will leave the camera untouched for more than 30 minutes during HDMI output, select [ No mirroring ] and set [ 5 2: Auto power off ] to [ Disable

] (p.69).

If the HDMI movie is output without an information overlay, remaining card capacity, remaining battery capacity, internal temperature warning

[

(p.351), and other warnings will not be displayed on the HDMI output

device’s screen. Be especially careful if [ No mirroring ] is set. If

Mirroring monitor.

Y

When you are not shooting movies, the power will turn off automatically after the [ 5 2: Auto power off ] time elapses. If [ Mirroring ] is selected and [ 5 2: Auto power off

COP

], HDMI output will stop

(movie shooting will stop) if you leave the camera untouched for 30 minutes.

Even when [ Mirroring ] is set, if you play back an image or display a menu, the HDMI movie will not be displayed.

Avoid still photo shooting (p.327) while recording the HDMI output to an

external recording device. Some external recording devices may not synchronize the time code or audio with movie images, or may produce audio interference, resulting in the movie not being recorded correctly as intended.

Depending on the viewing environment, the brightness of the movie shot with the camera may look different from that of the HDMI output movie recorded to an external recording device.

By pressing the < B > button, you can change the information displayed.

A time code can be appended to the HDMI output movie (p.341).

The HDMI output will also output sound (except when [ Sound recording ] is set to [ Off ]).

349

3 Menu Function Settings

5

3

HDMI frame rate

For HDMI output, you can set the frame rate to [ Auto ], [ 59.94i

]/

[ 50.00i

], [ 59.94p

]/[ 50.00p

], or [ 23.98p

]. Set the frame rate that is compatible with the commercially-available external recording device you will use to record the movie via HDMI output.

Y

COP

The frame rate cannot be set if [ 24.00p

] for [ z 4: Movie rec quality ] is set to [ Enable ].

350

The selectable frame rates vary according to the [ 5 3: Video system ] setting. If the movie does not appear on the HDMI output device, set the

[ 5 3: Video system ] correctly to [ For NTSC ] or [ For PAL ] (depending on the video standard of your output device).

If the manually-set frame rate is not compatible with the external recording device, the frame rate will be set automatically.

If [ 5 3: HDMI frame rate ]’s [ 59.94i

] or [ 59.94p

] is set together with the movie recording size 4 (23.98 fps), the movie will be converted via 2:3 pull down.

General Movie Shooting Cautions

White < s > and Red < E > Internal Temperature Warning Icons

If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white < s > or red < E > icon will appear.

The white < s > icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.

The red < E > icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.

Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the < s > or < E > icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn off the camera.

Recording and Image Quality

Stabilizer (IS) switch to < 1

Y times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image

Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a

COP you set the IS switch to < 2 >.

The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up camera operation noise. Use an external microphone (commercially available) to reduce camera operation noise in the movie.

Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal.

With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness changes during movie shooting, the movie may freeze temporarily. In such cases, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or manual exposure.

If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.

If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support

MOV/MP4 format).

351

352

General Movie Shooting Cautions

Recording and Image Quality

If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.

If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will

Indicator either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly.

If the card’s writing speed decreases (due to fragmentation) and the

Y

the SD card (p.67-68) may resolve the problem.

Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting

Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page

310.

COP

10

Image Playback

and movies, how to display them on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions.

COP

Y

Images shot and saved with another device

The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their file names changed.

353

x

Image Playback

Single-Image Display

1

Play back the image.

Press the < x > button.

X

The last image captured or played back will appear.

Select an image.

2

To play back images starting with the last image captured, turn the < 5 > dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise.

Each time you press the < B >

Y change.

COP

No information Basic information display

Shooting information display

354

x Image Playback

3

Exit the image playback.

Press the < x > button to exit the image playback and return to shooting-ready state.

Shooting Information Display

With the shooting information screen displayed (p.354), you can tilt

< 9 > up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the

screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 357-358.

Detailed information

GPS information

Lens aberration correction information

Lens / Histogram information Y

Color space / Noise reduction information COP Picture Style information

3

Grid Display

In single-image display and two-image

display (p.366), you can overlay the grid

on the image playback.

With [ 3 3: Playback grid ], you can select [ 3x3 l ], [ 6x4 m ], or [ 3x3+diag n ].

This function is convenient for checking the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt, as well as composition.

The grid is not displayed during movie playback.

355

B

: Shooting Information Display

Sample Information for Still Photos

Basic information display

Eye-Fi transfer completed Rating

Eye-Fi card transmission status Protect images

Battery check Card

Playback number/

Total images recorded

Folder number -

File number

Shutter speed

Aperture

Exposure compensation

Y

Image-recording quality COP

ISO speed

Highlight tone priority amount

356

B : Shooting Information Display

Shooting information display

• Detailed information

Aperture

Exposure compensation amount

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

Shutter speed

Shooting mode/

Multiple exposure

Shooting date and time

ISO speed

Scroll bar

Highlight tone priority

White balance Metering mode

File size

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Y

Flash exposure compensation amount / HDR Mode /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Color temperature when < P > is set

White balance correction

Image-recording quality

AF Microadjustment

COP

* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be displayed.

* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, < 0 > will be displayed.

* < w > and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images taken in the HDR mode.

* < P > will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.

* < M > will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

* For still photos taken during movie shooting, < G > will be displayed.

* For images developed with the camera’s RAW processing function or resized and then saved, < u > will be displayed.

If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may not be displayed.

357

B : Shooting Information Display

• Lens/Histogram information

Lens name

Focal length

• White balance information

Histogram display

(Brightness)

Histogram display

(RGB)

• Picture Style information

• Color space / Noise

Y

• Lens aberration correction reduction information information COP

• GPS information

Latitude

Longitude

Elevation

UTC (Coordinated

Universal Time)

Direction

358

If GPS information was not recorded for the image, the GPS information screen will not be displayed.

Sample Movie Information Display

B : Shooting Information Display

Playback

Aperture

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

ISO speed

Movie file size

Movie recording format Shooting time, Playback time/

Time code

Movie recording size

Frame rate

• < > and <

Y displayed.

Compression method

• < > mode: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.

• < > mode: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.

• <

COP

Highlight Alert

When [ 3 3: Highlight alert ] is set to [ Enable ], overexposed highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again.

AF Point Display

When [ 3 3: AF point disp.

] is set to [ Enable ], the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.

359

B : Shooting Information Display

Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [ 3 3:

Histogram disp.

].

[Brightness] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level

(darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The more

Sample Histograms

Dark image pixels there are toward the left, the darker the

Normal brightness image. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too

Y lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the Bright image highlight detail will be lost. The gradation inCOP the overall gradation.

[RGB] Display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).

The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation.

By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as white balance inclination.

360

x

Searching for Images Quickly

H

Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)

You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9,

36, or 100 images on one screen.

1

Press the <

u

> button.

During image playback or when the camera is ready to shoot, press the

< u > button.

X

[ 6 u ] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen.

Switch to the index display.

2

Turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise.

X

The 4-image index display will Y

Turning the < 6 > dial further counterclockwise will switch the COP clockwise, it will rotate through 100,

36, 9, 4, and single-image display.

B B B B

3

Select an image.

Turn the < 5 > dial to move the orange frame and select the image.

Press the < u > button to turn off the

[ 6 u ] icon, then turn the < 6 > dial to go to the next screen or previous image.

Press < 0 > in the index display to display the selected image in the single-image display.

361

x Searching for Images Quickly

I

Jump through Images (Jump Display)

In the single-image display, you can turn the < 6 > dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

1

Select [Image jump w/

6

].

Under the [ 3 2 ] tab, select [ Image jump w/ 6 ], then press < 0 >.

Select the jump method.

2

Select the jump method, then press

< 0 >.

d :

Y e : Jump 10 images f : Jump 100 images COP h : Display by folder i : Display movies only j

: Display stills only

P : Display protected images only k : Display by image rating

(p.371)

Turn the < 6 > dial to select.

362

x Searching for Images Quickly

Jump method

Playback position

3

Browse by jumping.

Press the < x > button to play back images.

In the single-image display, turn the

< 6 > dial.

X

You can browse by the method that was set.

COP

Y

To search images by shooting date, select [ Date ].

To search images by folder, select [ Folder ].

If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [ Movies ] or

[ Stills ] to display one or the other.

If no images match the [ Protect ] or [ Rating ] setting, you cannot browse through images with the < 6 > dial.

363

u

Magnifying Images

You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor.

Magnified area position

Magnify the image.

1

The image can be magnified as follows: 1. During image playback

(single-image display), 2. During the image review after image capture, and 3. From the shooting-ready state.

Press the < u > button.

X The magnified view will appear. The magnified area and [ 6 u ] will be displayed on the lower right of the screen.

The image magnification increases Y

6 > dial clockwise.

You can magnify the image up to 10x.

The image magnification decreases as you turn the < 6 > dial COP and 3 only, turning the dial further will

display the index display (p.361).

2

Scroll around the image.

Use < 9 > to scroll around the magnified image.

To exit the magnified view, press the

< u > button or < x > button and the single-image display will return.

364

In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the < 5 > dial to view another image while the magnification is maintained.

A movie cannot be magnified.

u Magnifying Images

3

Magnification Settings

Under the [ 3 3 ] tab, when you select

[ Magnificatn (apx) ], you can set the starting magnification and initial position for the magnified view.

1x (no magnification)

Y

The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.

COP

The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected magnification.

Actual size (from selected point)

The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the image center.

Same as last magnification (from center)

The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view with the < x > or < u > button. The magnified view starts at the image center.

For images taken with [ u +Tracking ] or [ FlexiZone - Single

] (p.299) or with

[ Distortion ] set to [ Enable

] (p.182), the magnified view will start at the

image center even if [ Actual size (from selected pt) ] is set.

365

X

Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)

You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor. In the two-image display, you can use magnified view or jump display as well as protect, rate, and delete images.

1

Set the two-image display.

During image playback, press the

< X > button.

X The two-image index display will appear. The currently-selected image will be highlighted with an orange frame.

2

Select the images to be compared.

Pressing < 0 > switches the orange

Turn the < 5

Y

Repeat this procedure to select the other image to be compared.

same, the [ ] icon will appear on the upper left of both images.

By pressing the < Q > button, you can set the same magnification and magnified area for both images. (The magnification settings will match those of the image not highlighted with an orange frame.)

By holding the < x > button, you can display the image highlighted with an orange frame as a single image.

To return to the previous display, press the < X > button.

366

By pressing the < B > button, you can change the information display.

You cannot play back movies in the two-image display.

b

Rotating the Image

You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1

Select [Rotate image].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ Rotate image ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select an image.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be rotated.

You can also select an image in the

index display (p.361).

3

Each time you press < 0 >, the image will rotate clockwise as follows: COP

270° 9 0°.

To rotate another image, repeat steps

2 and 3.

If you set [ 5 1: Auto rotate] to [ On z D

] (p.395) before taking vertical

shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.

If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback, set [ 5 1: Auto rotate ] to [ On z D ].

A movie cannot be rotated.

367

K

Protecting Images

Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.

3

Protecting a Single Image

1

Select [Protect images].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ Protect images ], then press < 0 >.

Image protection icon

2

Select [Select images].

X

An image will be displayed.

Y

3

Select an image.

COP

5 > dial to select the image to be protected.

You can also select an image or

movie on the index display (p.361).

4

Protect the image.

Press < 0 > to protect the selected image. The < K > icon will appear at the top of the screen.

To cancel the image protection, press

< 0 > again. The < K > icon will disappear.

To protect another image, repeat step

3 and 4.

368

K Protecting Images

3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [ All images in folder ] or [ All images on card ] in [ 3 1:

Protect images ], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.

To cancel the image protection, select

[ Unprotect all images in folder ] or

[ Unprotect all images on card ].

COP

Y

If you format the card

(p.67)

, the protected images will also be erased.

Movies can also be protected.

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection.

If you erase all the images (p.393), only the protected images will

remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once.

When [ All images on card ] or [ Unprotect all images on card ] is selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card selected for [ Record/play ] or [ Playback ] under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

].

369

K Protecting Images

Protecting Images with the <

c

> Button

During image playback, you can use the < c > button to protect an image.

1

Select [

m

btn function].

Under the [ 5 3 ] tab, select [ m button function ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Protect].

3

Y

Press the < x > button to play back images.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the

COP

You can also select an image or

movie on the index display (p.361).

4

Protect the image.

When you press the < c > button, the image will be protected and the

< K > icon will appear.

To cancel the image protection, press the < c > button again. The < K > icon will disappear.

370

Setting Ratings

You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating marks: l / m / n / o / p . This function is called rating.

Rating Images with the <

c

> Button

1

Select an image.

During image playback, turn the

< 5 > dial to select an image or movie to be rated.

You can also select an image or

movie on the index display (p.361).

Rate the image.

2

Each time you press the < c > button, the rating mark will change: l / m / n /

Y o / p /None.

To rate another image, repeat steps 1 and 2.

COP

If [ 5 3: m btn function ] is set to [ Protect ], change it to [ Rating ].

If you press the < Q > button when [ Rating ] is selected in [ 5 3: m btn function ], you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you press the < c > button.

371

Setting Ratings

3

Setting Ratings with the Menu

1

Select [Rating].

Under the [ 3 2 ] tab, select [ Rating ], then press < 0 >.

Select an image.

2

Turn the < 5 > dial to select an image or movie to be rated.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a threeY

6 > dial clockwise.

3

Rate the image.

COP

> and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the screenshot.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select a rating, then press < 0 >.

X The total number of images rated will be counted and displayed for each rating.

To rate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.

372

Setting Ratings

A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are more than 999 images with a given rating, [ ### ] will be displayed.

Taking Advantage of Ratings

With [ 3 2: Image jump w/ 6 ], you can display only images having the specified rating.

With [ 3 2: Slide show ], you can play back only images with a specific rating.

With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.536), you can select

only the image with a specific rating (still photos only).

With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista, you can see each file’s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer (still photos only).

COP

Y

373

Q

Quick Control for Playback

During playback, you can press the < Q > button to set the following:

[ J : Protect images ], [ b : Rotate image], [ 9 : Rating ], [ R : RAW image processing (RAW images only)], [ S : Resize (JPEG image only)], [ : Highlight alert ], [ : AF point display ], and [ e : Image jump w/ 6 ].

For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.

1

Press the <

Q

> button.

During image playback, press the

< Q > button.

X The Quick Control options will appear.

2

Select an item and set it.

Tilt < 9 function.

Y

X The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom.

5 > dial to set it.

For RAW image processing and

Resize, press < 0 > and set the

function. For details, see page 398 for

RAW image processing and page 403

for Resize. To cancel, press the

< M > button.

3

Exit the setting.

Press the < Q > button to exit the

Quick Control screen.

374

Q Quick Control for Playback

To rotate an image, set [ 5 1: Auto rotate ] to [ On z D ]. If [ 5 1: Auto rotate ] is set to [ On D ] or [ Off ], the [ b Rotate image ] setting will be recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.

Pressing the < Q > button during the index display will switch to the single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing the < Q > button again will return to the index display.

For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may be restricted.

COP

Y

375

k

Enjoying Movies

You can play back movies in the following three ways:

Playback on a TV Set

(p.385)

By connecting the camera to a TV set with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the

TV set.

Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.

Y

COP

(p.378-379)

You can play back movies on the camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit out the movie’s first and last scenes, and play back the still photos and movies on the card in an automatic slide show.

376

A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera.

k Enjoying Movies

Playback and Editing with a Computer

(p.536)

The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a computer and played back with ImageBrowser EX (EOS software).

To have the movie play back smoothly on a computer, use a highperformance computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements for

ImageBrowser EX, refer to the ImageBrowser EX User Guide (PDF).

movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV or MP4 files. For details on commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.

COP

377

k

Playing Movies

1

Play back the image.

Press the < x > button to display an image.

Speaker (for sound)

Select a movie.

2

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the movie to be played.

With the single-image display, the

< s1 > icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie.

In the index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie.

Y

0 > to switch to the single-image display.

4

3

In the single-image display, press <

0

>.

COP at the bottom of the screen.

Play back the movie.

Select [ 7 ] (Play), then press < 0 >.

X The movie will start playing.

You can pause the movie playback by pressing < 0 >.

You can adjust the sound volume during movie playback by turning the

< 6 > dial.

For more details on the playback procedure, see the next page.

378

Before listening to a movie’s sound through headphones, turn down the volume to prevent hurting your ears.

The camera may not be able to play movies shot with another camera.

k Playing Movies

Movie Playback Panel

Operation

7 Play

8 Slow motion

5 First frame

3 Previous frame

6 Next frame

4 Last frame

X Edit mm’ ss” hh:mm:ss.ff (DF) hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF)

9 Volume

3 2

Playback Description

Pressing < 0 > toggles between play and stop.

Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < 5 > dial.

The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen.

Displays the movie’s first frame.

Each time you press < 0 >, the previous frame is displayed. If you hold down < 0 >, it will rewind the movie.

Each time you press < 0 >, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down < 0 >, it will fast forward the movie.

Displays the movie’s last frame.

Displays the editing screen (p.380).

Playback position

Y

Movie play count:

Rec time ] set)

Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [ Movie

Turn the <

COP

] set)

> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in

speaker (p.378) or headphones.

To return to the single-image display, press the < M > button.

With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 3 hr. 20 min.

By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal

(p.23), you can listen to the movie’s sound (p.337).

If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.385),

adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the < 6 > dial will not change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.

If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.

379

X

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments.

1

On the movie playback screen, select [

X

].

X The movie editing panel will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Specify the part to be edited out.

2

Select either [ U ] (Cut beginning) or

[ V ] (Cut end), then press < 0 >.

Tilt < 9 > to the left or right to see the previous or next frames. Holding Y

5 > dial for frame-by-frame playback.

After deciding which part to edit out, COP

>. The portion highlighted in gray on the top of the screen is what will remain.

3

Check the edited movie.

Select [ 7 ] and press < 0 > to play back the edited movie.

To change the editing, go back to step

2.

To cancel the editing, press the

< M > button, then select [ OK ] on the confirmation screen.

380

X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

4

Save the edited movie.

Select [ W ], then press < 0 >.

X

The save screen will appear.

To save it as a new movie, select

[ New file ]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select

[ Overwrite ], then press < 0 >.

On the confirmation screen, select

[ OK ] to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen.

COP

Y

Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.

If the card does not have enough free space, [ New file ] will not be available.

When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.

Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.

381

3

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1

Select [Slide show].

Under the [ 3 2 ] tab, select [ Slide show ], then press < 0 >.

Number of images to be played 2

Select the images to be played.

Select the desired option on the screen, then press < 0 >.

All images/Movies/Stills/Protect

Select one of the following: [ j All

[ images ] [ k Movies ] [ z Stills ]

J Protect

Y

0 >.

Date/Folder/Rating

Select one of the following: [ i Date ] n

COP

] [ 9 Rating

H

].

> is highlighted, press the < B > button.

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Date Folder Rating

382

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Item j All images i Date n Folder k Movies z Stills

J Protected

9 Rating

Playback Description

All the still photos and movies on the card will be played back.

Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back.

Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back.

Only the movies on the card will be played back.

Only the still photos on the card will be played back.

Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be played back.

Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be played back.

3

Select [ Set up ], then press < 0 >.

Set the [ Display time ] and [ Repeat ] settings for still photos.

the < M > button.

Display time Repeat

When [ All images ] is selected, the images on the card selected for

[ Record/play ] or [ Playback ] under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

] will be played back.

383

3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)

4

Start the slide show.

Select [ Start ], then press < 0 >.

X

After [ Loading image...

] is displayed, the slide show will start.

5

Exit the slide show.

To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the < M > button.

COP

Y

384

To pause the slide show, press < 0 >. During pause, [ G ] will be displayed on the upper left of the image. Press < 0 > again to resume the slide show.

During auto playback, you can press the < B > button to change the

still photo display format (p.354).

During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the

< 6 > dial.

During auto playback or pause, you can turn the < 5 > dial to view another image.

During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.

The display time may vary depending on the image.

To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 385.

Viewing Images on a TV Set

By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold separately), you can play the camera’s still photos and movies on the

TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.

If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [ 5 3: Video system ] correctly to [ For NTSC ] or [ For PAL ] (depending on the video standard of your TV set).

1

Connect the HDMI cable to the camera.

With the plug’s < d HDMI MINI > logo facing the front of the camera, insert it into the < D > terminal.

2

set.

3

Connect the HDMI cable to the TV COP

TV set’s video input to select the connected port.

4

5

Set the camera’s power switch to

<

1

>.

Press the <

x

> button.

X The image will appear on the TV screen. (Nothing will be displayed on the camera’s LCD monitor.)

The images will automatically be displayed at the TV set’s optimum resolution.

By pressing the < B > button, you can change the display format.

To play back movies, see page 378.

385

Viewing Images on a TV Set

Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera.

Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and

TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.

Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.

Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s < D > terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.

Using HDMI CEC TV Sets

If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback operations.

you can control them with one remote control unit.

1

Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].

COP

3 3 ] tab, select [

0 >.

Ctrl over

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

2

Connect the camera to a TV set.

Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV set.

X

The TV set’s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera. If it does not switch automatically, use the TV set’s remote control to select the

HDMI IN port the cable is connected to.

386

Viewing Images on a TV Set

3

Press the camera’s <

x

> button.

X

An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV set’s remote control to play back images.

4

Select an image.

Point the remote control toward the

TV set and press the / button to select an image.

Still photo playback menu 5

Press the remote control’s Enter button.

X The menu appears and you can

Movie playback menu perform the playback operations

: Return shown on the left.

Y

/ button to select the desired option,

: 9-image index

: Play movie

: Slide show

: Display shooting info

: Rotate then press the Enter button. For a slide show, press the / button to COP

If you select [ Return ] and press the

Enter button, the menu will disappear and you can use the / button to select an image.

During the two-image display (p.366), playback with the TV’s remote control

is not possible. To use the TV’s remote control for playback, first press the

< X > button to return to the single-image display.

Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.

Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not operate properly. In such a case, set [ 3 3: Ctrl over HDMI ] to [ Disable ], and use the camera to control the playback operation.

387

a

Copying Images

The images recorded on one card can be copied to another card.

3

Copying a Single Image

1

Select [Image copy].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ Image copy ], then press < 0 >.

Lowest file number

Number of images in folder

Select [Sel.Image].

2

Check the copy source and target cards’ number, and remaining capacity.

Select [

Y

], then press < 0 >.

3

Select the folder.

COP

0 >.

Check the images displayed on the right to select the desired folder.

X The images in the selected folder will be displayed.

Folder name

Highest file number

388

The copy source is the card selected for [ Record/play ] or [ Playback ] under

[ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

].

a Copying Images

Total images selected

5

4

Select the images to be copied.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select an image to be copied, then press < 0 >.

X The [ X ] icon will appear on the upper left of the screen.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the < 6 > dial clockwise.

To select other images to be copied, repeat step 4.

Press the <

Y c

> button.

After selecting all the images to be copied, press the < c > button.

Select [OK].

Check the card where the images will be copied to, then select [ OK ].

7

Select the target folder.

Select the target folder to which you want to copy the images, then press

< 0 >.

To create a new folder, select [ Create folder ].

389

a Copying Images

8

Select [OK].

Check the information of the source card and target card, then select

[ OK ].

X

The copying will start and the progress will be displayed.

When the copying is completed, the result will be displayed. Select [ OK ] to return to the screen in step 2.

3

Y

You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Under [ x 1: Image copy ], when you COP

] or [ All image ], you can copy all the images in the folder or on a card.

390

a Copying Images

The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source image’s file name.

If [ Sel.Image

] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.

Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.

If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [ Skip image and continue ] [ Replace existing image ] [ Cancel copy ]. Select the copying method, then press < 0 >.

• [ Skip image and continue ]: Any images in the source folder having the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and not copied.

• [ Replace existing image ]: Any images in the target folder having the same file number as the source images (including protected images) will be overwritten.

If an image with a print order (p.421) is overwritten, you will have to set

the print order again.

Y copied.

Shooting is not possible during the copying operation. Select [ Cancel ] before shooting.

COP

391

L

Erasing Images

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or

erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.368) will not be erased.

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a

RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.

Erasing a Single Image

1

Play back the image to be erased.

2

Press the <

L

> button.

X

The Erase menu will appear.

3

Y

Select [ Erase ], then press < 0 >. The image displayed will be erased.

COP

Setting [ 8 4: Default Erase option ] to [ [Erase] selected ] makes it faster to

erase images (p.444).

3

Checkmarking [

X

] Images to Be Erased in a Batch

By appending checkmarks <

X

> to the images to be erased, you can erase multiple images at once.

1

Select [Erase images].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ Erase images ], then press < 0 >.

392

L Erasing Images

2

Select [Select and erase images].

X

An image will be displayed.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the < 6 > dial clockwise.

Select the images to be erased.

3

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be erased, then press < 0 >.

X

A checkmark [

X

] will be displayed on the upper left of the screen.

To select other images to be erased,

Y

4

Erase the image.

Press the < L > button, then press COP one batch.

3

Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When

[ 3 1: Erase images ] is set to [ All images in folder ] or [ All images on card ], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.

To erase all images, including protected images, format the card (p.67).

When [ All images on card ] is selected, the images on the card selected for [ Record/play ] or [ Playback ] under [ 5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

] will be erased.

393

Changing Image Playback Settings

3

Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness

The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum viewing depending on the ambient light level. You can also set the automatic adjustment’s brightness level (brighter or darker), or adjust the brightness manually.

1

Select [LCD brightness].

Under the [ 5 2 ] tab, select [ LCD brightness ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Auto] or [Manual].

Turn the < 6 > dial to make the selection.

3

While referring to the gray chart, turn the < 5 > dial, then press < 0 >.

Auto ] to one of three levels, and [ Manual ] to one of seven levels.

Automatic adjustment Manual adjustment

While [ Auto ] is set, be careful not to obstruct the round, ambient light sensor

(p.24) on the lower left of the Quick Control Dial with your finger, etc.

394

To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is

recommended (p.360).

During playback, pressing the < U > button will display the screen in step 2.

Changing Image Playback Settings

3

Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer instead of horizontally. You can change the setting for this feature.

1

Select [Auto rotate].

Under the [ 5 1 ] tab, select [ Auto rotate ], then press < 0 >.

Set the auto rotation.

On z D

2

Select the desired setting, then press

< 0 >.

Y

The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.

On D

COP

Off

The vertical image is not automatically rotated.

Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation was [ Off ]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [ On ] for playback.

The vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review just after shooting.

If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the image may not be rotated automatically for playback.

If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen, it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using the EOS software is recommended.

395

MEMO

COP

Y

396

11

Post-Processing

Images

resize (reduce the resolution of) JPEG images.

A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a

< f > < a > < F >.

COP d > < s >

The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera.

Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be performed while the camera is connected to a computer via an interface cable.

397

R

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

N

You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.

Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the

camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.536) to

process those images.

1

Select [RAW image processing].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ RAW image processing ], then press

< 0 >.

X 1 images will be displayed.

2

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image you want to process.

If you press the < u > button and turn COP

> dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from the index display.

3

Process the image.

Press < 0 > to make the RAW-

processing options appear (p.400).

Use < 9 > to select an option, then turn the < 5 > dial to set it.

X

The displayed image will reflect

“Brightness adjustment”, “White balance”, and any other setting adjustments.

To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the < B > button.

398

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera N

Displaying the setting screen

Press < 0 > to display the setting screen. Turn the < 5 > or < 6 > dial to change the setting. Press < 0 > to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen.

4

Save the image.

Select [ W ] (Save), then press < 0 >.

Select [ OK ] to save the image.

Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [ OK ].

To process another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Y

Magnified View

COP u > button in step 3. The magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [ Image quality ] set in [ RAW image processing ]. With < 9 >, you can scroll around the magnified image.

To cancel magnified view, press the < u > button again.

Images with Aspect Ratio Setting

Images shot with the aspect ratio (p.404) set to [

4:3 ], [ 16:9 ], or [ 1:1 ] will be displayed with lines indicating the image area. JPEG images generated from RAW images will be saved in the set aspect ratio.

399

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera N

RAW Image Processing Options

Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

White balance

(p.168)

You can select the white balance. If you select [ P ] and press the

< B > button, you can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Picture Style

(p.160)

You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the < B > button, you can adjust the sharpness and other parameters. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Auto Lighting Optimizer

(p.175)

reflect the setting’s effect.

High ISO speed noise reduction

(p.176) COP

magnify the image (p.399).

Image quality

(p.149)

You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG format.

400

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera N

Color space

(p.187)

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look very different when either color space is set.

Peripheral illumination correction

(p.181)

If [ Enable ] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect

is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.399) and check the four

corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional

(EOS software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use

Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.

Distortion correction

(p.182)

[

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If

Enable

Y

Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, use the Picture

Style’s sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary.

COP

(p.182)

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [ Enable ] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,

magnify the image (p.399).

401

R Processing RAW Images with the Camera N

Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and

Chromatic Aberration Correction

To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and chromatic aberration correction with the camera, the correction data of the lens used must be registered in the camera. If the lens correction data is not

registered in the camera, use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.536) to register

the lens correction data.

Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.

When processing images with [ Distortion ] set to [ Enable ], AF point

display information (p.359) and Dust Delete Data (p.407) will not be

appended to the image.

COP

Y

402

S

Resizing JPEG Images

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3 / 4 / a / b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.

1

Select [Resize].

Under the [ 3 2 ] tab, select [ Resize ], then press < 0 >.

X An image will be displayed.

Select an image.

2

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image you want to resize.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from the index display.

Y

Select the desired image size.

3

Press < 0 > to display the image COP press < 0 >.

Target sizes

4

Save the image.

Select [ OK ] to save the resized image.

Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [ OK ].

To resize another image, repeat steps

2 to 4.

403

S Resizing JPEG Images

Resize Options by Original Image Size

Original Image Size

3

4 a b

4 k

Available Resize Settings a k k b k k k c k k k k

Image Sizes

Image sizes by aspect ratio are shown in the table below. The imagerecording quality figures marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.

Image

Quality

4 a b

3:2

3648x2432

(8.9 megapixels)

2736x1824

(5.0 megapixels)

1920x1280

Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)

4:3

Y

3248x2432* 3648x2048*

(7.9 megapixels)

2432x1824

(4.4 megapixels)

1696x1280*

(2.2 megapixels)

(7.5 megapixels) COP

2736x1536*

(4.2 megapixels)

1920x1080

(2.1 megapixels)

1:1

2432x2432

(5.9 megapixels)

1824x1824

(3.3 megapixels)

(2.5 megapixels)

1280x1280

(1.6 megapixels)

720x480

(350,000 pixels)

640x480

(310,000 pixels)

720x408*

(290,000 pixels)

480x480

(230,000 pixels) c

404

12

Sensor Cleaning

automatically shake off dust adhered to the image sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).

The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the COP automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software, p.536).

Y

Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start shooting immediately.

405

f

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

Whenever you set the power switch to < 1 > or < 2 >, the Self

Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning manually, or disable it.

Cleaning the Sensor Now

1

Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [ 5 3 ] tab, select [ Sensor cleaning ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Clean now

f

].

Select [

< 0 >.

Y f ], then press

Select [ OK ].

X

The screen will indicate that the COP sound may be heard.) Although there will be a shutter sound, no picture is taken.

For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.

Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.

Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [ Clean now f ] option will remain disabled temporarily.

Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning

In step 2, select [ Auto cleaning f ] and set it to [ Disable ].

X

The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to < 1 > or < 2 >.

406

3

Appending Dust Delete Data

N

Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital

Photo Professional (EOS software, p.536) to erase the dust spots

automatically.

Preparation

Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to < MF > and set the focus to infinity (

∞

). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

Y

Select [Dust Delete Data].

1

Under the [ z 3 ] tab, select [ Dust COP

], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [OK].

X After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed, a message will appear. Although there will be a shutter sound during the cleaning, no picture is taken.

407

3 Appending Dust Delete Data N

Shoot a solid-white object.

3

At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.

- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a patternless, solid-white object and take a picture.

X

The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.

Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera.

X When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete

Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear.

Y the “Preparation” procedure on the preceding page, then select [ OK ]. Take COP

Dust Delete Data

After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,

p.536) to erase dust spots, refer to the Software Instruction Manual on

the CD-ROM (p.539).

The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size.

408

Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the EOS software.

3

Manual Sensor Cleaning

N

Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.

The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

1

Select [Sensor cleaning].

Under the [ 5 3 ] tab, select [ Sensor cleaning ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Clean manually].

Select [OK].

Y

X

In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock up and the shutter will open.

“ CLn ” will blink on the LCD panel.

4

Clean the sensor.

5

End the cleaning.

Set the power switch to < 2 >.

If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) with size AA/LR6 batteries, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.

For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) is recommended.

409

3 Manual Sensor Cleaning N

While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and image sensor may get damaged.

• Setting the power switch to < 2 >.

• Removing or inserting the battery.

The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care.

Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor.

Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror may get damaged.

Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and scratch it.

If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper

Y sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

COP

410

13

Printing Images and Transferring

Images to a Computer

Printing

(p.414)

Y out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with

“ w PictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.

COP

(p.421)

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher.

Transferring Images to a Computer

(p.425)

You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the computer.

Specifying Images for a Photobook

(p.429)

You can specify images on the card for printing in a photobook.

411

Preparing to Print

The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.

Connecting the Camera to a Printer

1

Set the camera’s power switch to

<

2

>.

2

Set up the printer.

For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Connect the camera to a printer.

3

Use the interface cable provided with the camera.

When connecting the cable to the

Y

(p.34). Connect the cable to the

digital terminal with the plug’s

<

COP

> icon facing the back of the

To connect to the printer, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

4

Turn on the printer.

5

Set the camera’s power switch to

<

1

>.

X

Some printers may make a beeping sound.

412

Preparing to Print

6

Play back the image.

Press the < x > button.

X

The image will appear with the < w

> icon on the upper left of the screen to indicate that the camera is connected to a printer.

COP

Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When

connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).

Movies cannot be printed.

Y

The camera cannot be used with printers conforming only to CP Direct or

Bubble Jet Direct.

If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the

printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.420).

Printing is not possible if Multi Shot Noise Reduction or the HDR Mode is set.

You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.

If you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. is possible.

Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.

For direct printing, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately) to power the camera is recommended.

413

w

Printing

The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Printer-connected icon 1

Select the image to be printed.

Check that the < w

> icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD monitor.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be printed.

2

Press <

0

>.

X

The print setting screen will appear.

Print setting screen

Sets printing effects (p.416).

Y

(p.417).

Sets quantity to be printed (p.417).

Sets print area (p.419).

COP

Returns to the screen in step 1.

Starts printing.

The paper size, type, and layout you set are displayed.

* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.

3

Select [Paper settings].

X

The paper settings screen will appear.

414

w Printing

Q

Setting the Paper Size

Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer, then press < 0 >.

X

The paper type screen will appear.

Y

Setting the Paper Type

Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer, then press < 0 >.

X

The page layout screen will appear.

U

Setting the Page Layout

Bordered

Y

< 0 >.

X The print setting screen will reappear.

COP

The print will have white borders along the edges.

The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print

Borderless borderless prints, the print will have borders.

The shooting information*

1

will be imprinted on the border on

Bordered c

9x13 cm or larger prints.

xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.

20-up

35-up c p

Default

20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper*

2

.

• [ 20-up c

] will have the shooting information*

1

imprinted.

The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings.

*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be imprinted.

*2:After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.421), printing by

following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.424) is recommended.

415

w Printing

4

Set the printing effects.

Set them if necessary. If you do not need to set any printing effects, go to step 5.

Contents displayed on the screen differ depending on the printer.

Select the setting, then press < 0 >.

Select the desired printing effect, then press < 0 >.

If the < z e > icons are displayed brightly, you can also adjust the

printing effects (p.418).

Printing Effect Description

E On

E Off

The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.

The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.

Y

The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce

E VIVID

E NR

0 B/W more vivid blues and greens.

Image noise is reduced before printing.

COP

0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.

0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.

Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic color adjustments are applied.

z Natural z Natural M

Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.

However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with “Natural.”

Printing will differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

E Default

* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This

also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 418.

416

When making a large print of a RAW or RAW+JPEG image, printing a JPEG

73

image created by processing a RAW image (p.398), or printing via

Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.536) is recommended.

w Printing

5

Set the date and file number imprinting.

Set them if necessary.

Select < I >, then press < 0 >.

Set the print settings as desired, then press < 0 >.

6

Set the number of copies.

Set it if necessary.

Select < R >, then press < 0 >.

Select the number of copies, then press < 0 >.

7

Start printing.

Select [

Y

], then press < 0 >.

COP

The [ Default ] setting for printing effects and other options are the printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [ Default ] settings are.

Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may take some time for the printing to start after you select [ Print ].

If image tilt correction (p.419) is applied, it may take longer to print the

image.

To stop the printing, press < 0 > while [ Stop ] is displayed, then select

[ OK ].

If you execute [ 5 4: Clear all camera settings

] (p.70), all the settings

will revert to their defaults.

417

w Printing e

Adjusting Printing Effects

In step 4 on page 416, select the printing

effect. When the < z e > icons are displayed brightly, you can press the

< B > button. You can then adjust the printing effects. What can be adjusted or what is displayed will depend on the selection made in step 4.

Brightness

The image brightness can be adjusted.

Adjust levels

When you select [ Manual ], you can change the histogram’s distribution and adjust the image’s brightness and contrast.

Y

With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press the < B > button to change the position of the < h >. Turn the < 5 > dial to freely adjust k Brightener

COP

Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.

When [ On ] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.

Red-eye corr.

Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [ On ] is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.

418

The [ k Brightener ] and [ Red-eye corr.

] effects will not be reflected on the screen.

When [ Detail set.

] is selected, you can adjust the [ Contrast ],

[ Saturation ], [ Color tone ], and [ Color balance ]. To adjust the [ Color balance ], use < 9 >. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected color.

If you select [ Clear all ], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to their defaults.

w Printing

Cropping the Image

Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only an enlarged version of the cropped portion, as if the image is recomposed.

Set the cropping right before printing.

If you change the print settings after setting the cropping, you may have to set the cropping again before printing.

1

On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].

2

Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The Y

Paper settings ].

Changing the Cropping Frame Size

Turn the < 6 > dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image magnification will be for printing.

COP

Use < 9 > to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.

Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame

Pressing the < B > button will toggle the cropping frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.

Image Tilt Correction

By turning the < 5 > dial, you can tilt the image between -10 and

+10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the image tilt, the < O > icon on the screen will turn blue.

3

Press <

0

> to exit the cropping.

X

The print setting screen will reappear.

You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print setting screen.

419

w Printing

If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect ratio, the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a borderless print. If the image is cropped, the print may look grainier due to the fewer number of pixels.

If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO speed (H1 or H2), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.

Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you specified.

The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will look in the print.

Check the camera’s LCD monitor while cropping the image. If you look at the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed accurately.

Handling Printer Errors

If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper, etc.) and select [ Continue

Y printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Error Messages camera’s LCD monitor. Press < 0 > to stop printing. After fixing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Paper Error

Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.

Ink Error

Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.

Hardware Error

Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File Error

The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.

420

W

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.

The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)

Setting the Printing Options

1

Select [Print order].

Under the [ 3 1 ] tab, select [ Print order ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Set up].

Y

Set the options as desired.

Set the [ Print type ], [ Date ], and [ File

No.

].

Select the option to be set, then press

< 0 >. Select the desired setting, then press < 0 >.

Print type Date File No.

421

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Print type

Date

File number

K

L

Standard

Index

Prints one image on one sheet.

Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.

K

L

Both

On

Off

On

Off

Prints both the standard and index prints.

[ On ] imprints the recorded date on the print.

[ On ] imprints the file number on the print.

422

Exit the setting.

4

Press the < M > button.

X

The print order screen will reappear.

[

Next, select [

All image

Y

], [ By n ], or

] to order the images to be printed.

COP

RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW

images with PictBridge (p.411).

Even if [ Date ] and [ File No.

] are set to [ On ], the date or file number may not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer model.

With [ Index ] prints, the [ Date ] and [ File No.

] cannot both be set to [ On ] at the same time.

When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications are set. It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them.

Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints.

Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print order was set by a different camera. The print order may be overwritten.

Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.

W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Print Ordering

Sel.Image

Quantity

Total images selected

Checkmark

Index icon

Select and order images one by one.

If you press the < u > button and turn the

< 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a three-image display. To return to the single-image display, turn the < 6 > dial clockwise.

Press the < M > button to save the print order to the card.

Standard / Both

Press < 0 >, and a print order for one copy of the displayed image will be Y

5 > dial, you can set the number of copies to be printed up to 99.

Index COP

> to add a checkmark to the

]. The image will be included in the index print.

By n

Select [ Mark all in folder ] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [ Clear all in folder ] and select the folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.

All image

If you select [ Mark all on card ], one copy of all the images on the card will be set for printing. If you select [ Clear all on card ], the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card.

Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set [ By n ] or [ All image ].

When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be printed.

423

W

Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images

With a PictBridge printer, you can easily print images with DPOF.

1

Prepare to print.

See page 412.

Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to step 5.

2

Under the [

3

1] tab, select [Print order].

3

Select [Print].

[ Print ] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible.

Y

4

Set the [Paper settings]

(p.414)

.

Set the printing effects (p.416) if necessary.

5

Select [OK].

COP

Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.

Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.

If [ Bordered ] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.

Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border.

Under [ Adjust levels ], [ Manual ] cannot be selected.

424

If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images, select [ Resume ]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the following are the case:

• You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images before resuming the printing.

• When index is set, you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing.

• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.

If a problem occurs during printing, see page 420.

d

Transferring Images to a Computer

You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image transfer.

The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor.

The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [ Pictures ] or [ My Pictures ] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.

Before connecting the camera to a computer, install the EOS software provided on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk/CD-ROM to the computer.

For the procedure to install the EOS software,

see page 538.

Preparing Image Transfer

1

Set the camera’s power switch to

<

2

>.

Y

Connect the camera to a

2

computer.

COP

When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector

(p.34). Connect the cable to the

digital terminal with the plug’s

< camera.

> icon facing the back of the

Connect the cord’s plug to the computer’s USB terminal.

Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When

connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).

425

d Transferring Images to a Computer

3

Set the camera’s power switch to

<

1

>.

When the computer displays a screen to select the program, select [ EOS

Utility ].

X The EOS Utility screen will appear on the computer.

After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [ Direct transfer ]

in step 5 on page 428 will not be displayed. (The image transfer function will

not be available.)

If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the Software

Instruction Manual (CD-ROM, p.539).

the cord) to pull out the cable.

Y

3

COP

For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify which image to transfer.

On the next page in step 2, select

[ RAW+JPEG transfer ], and select the image to be transferred: [ JPEG only ],

[ RAW only ], or [ RAW+JPEG ].

426

d Transferring Images to a Computer

3

Selecting the Images to be Transferred

Sel.Image

1

Select [Image transfer].

Under the [ 3 2 ] tab, select [ Image transfer ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [Image sel./transfer].

Select [Sel.Image].

3

4

Select the images to be transferred.

Y

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be transferred, then press COP

5 > dial to display the [ X ] on the screen’s upper left, then press < 0 >.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a three-image display. To return to the single-image display, turn the < 6 > dial clockwise.

To select other images to be transferred, repeat step 4.

When [ Sel.Image

] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X : Selected for transfer. l : Transfer failed. k : Transfer succeeded.

The procedures for [ RAW+JPEG transfer

] (p.426) and above steps 1 to

4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a computer.

427

d Transferring Images to a Computer

5

Transfer the image.

On the computer screen, check that

EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.

Select [ Direct transfer ], then press

< 0 >.

On the confirmation screen, select

[ OK ], and the images will be transferred to the computer.

Images selected with [ Sel.

n ] and

[ All image ] can also be transferred in this way.

Sel.

n

Select [ Sel.

n ] and select [ Folder images not transfer’d ]. When you select a folder, all the images in that folder not yet transferred to the computer will be selected.

Y

Selecting [ Folder images failed transf.

] will select the selected folder’s images that failed to transfer.

Selecting [ Clear folder transf. history ] will clear the transfer history

COP history, you can select [ Folder images not transfer’d ] and again transfer all the images in the folder.

All image

If [ All image ] is selected and you select [ Card images not transferred ], all the images on the card not yet transferred to a computer will be selected.

For a description of [ Card images failed transfer ] and [ Clear card’s transf. history ], see “ Sel.

n ” above.

If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the computer, [ Direct transfer ] is not displayed.

During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.

428

You can also transfer movies.

Up to 9,999 images can be transferred in one batch.

Shooting is possible during the image transfer.

p

Specifying Images for a Photobook

You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer, the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function is useful for ordering photobooks online.

Specifying One Image at a Time

1

Select [Photobook Set-up].

Under the [ x 1 ] tab, select

[ Photobook set-up ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Select images].

Y

COP

3

Select the image to be specified.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the image to be specified, then press

< 0 >.

If you press the < u > button and turn the < 6 > dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the < 6 > dial clockwise.

To select other images to be transferred, repeat step 3. The number of specified images will be displayed.

429

p Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When [ x 1: Photobook Set-up ] is set to [ All images in folder ] or [ All images on card ], all the images in the folder or on the card will be specified.

To cancel the image protection, select

[ Clear all in folder ] or [ Clear all on card ].

COP

Y

430

RAW images and movies cannot be specified.

Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings may be overwritten.

14

Customizing the

Camera

your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.

Also, current camera settings can be saved under < w >

< x > < y > positions of the Mode Dial.

COP used in the following shooting modes: < d > < s >

< f > < a > < F >.

Y

431

3

Custom Functions

N

8 1: Exposure

Exposure level increments

ISO speed setting increments

Bracketing auto cancel

Bracketing sequence

Number of bracketed shots

Safety shift

Same exposure for new aperture

p.434

p.435

p.436

p.437

8 2: Exposure/Drive

Set shutter speed range

Set aperture range

Continuous shooting speed

p.438

Y

p.439

COP

A LV

Shooting k k k k k k k k Movie

Shooting k

In a

(Still photo, with WB bracketing) k k k k k

(Still photo)

432

The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV) shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)

3 Custom Functions N

8 3: Display/Operation A LV

Shooting k Movie

Shooting

p.440

Focusing screen

Warnings z in viewfinder

LV shooting area display

Dial direction during Tv/Av

Multi function lock

Custom Controls

p.441

p.442

k k k k k

Depends on setting

8 4: Others

Add cropping information

Default Erase option

p.443

Y

k

(During playback)

8 5: Clear

Selecting [ 8 5: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) ] will clear all the

Custom Function settings.

COP

Even if [ 8 5: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn) ] is executed, the settings for

[ 8 3: Focusing screen ] and [ 8 3: Custom Controls ] will remain unchanged.

433

3

Setting Custom Functions

N

Under the [ 8 ] tab, you can customize various camera features to suit your picture-taking preferences. Any settings different from the default will be displayed in blue.

C.Fn1: Exposure

Exposure level increments

1/3:1/3-stop

1/2:1/2-stop

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when Y

When [ 1/2-stop ] is set, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.

COP

ISO speed setting increments

1/3: 1/3-stop

1/1: 1-stop

Even when [ 1-stop ] is set, you can set ISO 16000.

Bracketing auto cancel

ON: Enable

When you set the power switch to < 2 >, the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.

OFF: Disable

The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to < 2 >. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)

434

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Bracketing sequence

The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed.

0-+: 0, -, +

-0+: -, 0, +

+0-: +, 0, -

AEB

White Balance Bracketing

B/A Direction M/G Direction

0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance

: Decreased exposure - : Blue bias - : Magenta bias

+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias + : Green bias

Number of bracketed shots

be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.

When [ Bracketing sequence: 0, -, + ] is set, the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below.

COP

1st Shot

3: 3 shots Standard (0)

2: 2 shots Standard (0)

5: 5 shots Standard (0)

7: 7 shots Standard (0)

2nd

Shot

-1

±1

-2

-3

3rd

Shot

+1

-1

-2

4th

Shot

+1

-1

5th

Shot

(1-stop increments)

6th

Shot

7th

Shot

+2

+1 +2 +3

If [ 2 shots ] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB range. Setting WB bracketing will result in a decreased exposure in the B/A or M/G direction.

435

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Safety shift

OFF: Disable

Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture

This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE ( s ) and aperturepriority AE ( f ) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain a standard exposure.

ISO: ISO speed

This works in the Program AE ( d ), shutter-priority AE ( s ), and aperture-priority AE ( f ) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.

Y

COP

436

Under [ z 2: ISO speed settings ], even if [ ISO speed range ] or [ Min. shutter spd.

] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.

The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO speed will be determined by the [ Auto ISO range

] setting (p.158).

However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [ Auto ISO range ], the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.

Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Same exposure for new aperture

If the < a > mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO), the maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number (smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.

Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f/ number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.

OFF: Disable

Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot.

ISO: ISO speed

Y

If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number COP you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.

Tv: Shutter speed

If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.

This function does not work with macro lenses whose actual aperture f/number changes when the magnification changes.

This function does not work with movies.

If [ Shutter speed ] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the range set with [ 8 2: Set shutter speed range ], the shutter speed will not change automatically.

If [ ISO speed ] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the range set with [ ISO speed range ], the ISO speed will not change automatically.

If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to

< 2 >, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the target exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera turns off.

437

3 Setting Custom Functions N

This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum aperture).

If you set [ ISO speed ] or [ Shutter speed ], do 1, 2, or 3, and then undo 1,

2, or 3 without manually changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or aperture, so that the camera is back to its original state, the original exposure setting will be restored.

If [ ISO speed ] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.

438

C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive

Set shutter speed range

You can set the shutter speed range. In the < s > < a > modes, you can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that you have set. In the < d > < f

Y automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.

Highest speed

Lowest speed

You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.

Set aperture range

You can set the aperture range. In the < f > < a > < F > modes, you can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have set. In the < d > < s > modes, the aperture will be set automatically within the aperture range that you have set.

Min. aperture (Max. f/)

You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.

Max. aperture (Min. f/)

You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.

The settable aperture range will differ depending on the lens’s maximum and minimum apertures.

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Continuous shooting speed

You can set the continuous shooting speed for < o > high-speed continuous shooting, < i > low-speed continuous shooting, and

< M > silent continuous shooting.

High speed

You can set it from 2 to 10 frames per second (fps).

Low speed

You can set it from 1 to 9 frames per second (fps).

Silent continuous shooting

You can set it from 1 to 4 frames per second (fps).

COP

Y

If [ z 4: Anti-flicker shoot.

] (p.185) is set to [

Enable ] or EOS iTR AF

(p.128) is set to [

Enable ], the camera may not be able to shoot at the continuous shooting speed that was set.

439

3 Setting Custom Functions N

C.Fn3: Display/Operation

To suit your shooting needs, you can change to an optional focusing screen, sold separately.

If you change the focusing screen, be sure to change this setting to match the focusing screen type. It is to obtain the correct exposure.

Std.: Eh-A

Standard screen provided with the camera. Precision Matte standard focusing screen.

Eh-S: Eh-S

Super Precision Matte focusing screen makes it easier to distinguish the focus point than with the standard Precision Matte

Y aperture of f/2.8 or larger. Geared for manual focusing.

However, if the lens maximum aperture is smaller than f/2.8, the viewfinder will look darker than with the Eh-A focusing screen.

COP

440

The focusing screen setting will not be cleared even if you select [ 8 5:

Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn) ].

To change the focusing screen, refer to the focusing screen’s instruction manual. If the focusing screen does not come down with the holder, tilt the camera forward.

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Warnings

z

in viewfinder

When any of the following functions are set, the < z > icon can be

displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.26-27).

Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, and press < 0 > to append a <

X

>. Then select [ OK ] to register the setting.

When monochrome V is set

If the Picture Style is set to [ Monochrome

] (p.162), the warning

icon will appear.

When WB is corrected

If white balance correction (p.172) is set, the warning icon will

appear.

When one-touch image quality is set

If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch

image quality function (p.456), the warning icon will appear.

When M is set

If [ z 3: High ISO speed NR ] is set to [

Y

Multi Shot Noise

Reduction

] (p.176), the warning icon will appear.

When spot metering is set

COP

] (p.225), the

warning icon will appear.

When you set any of the checkmarked [ X ] functions, < z > will also appear for the respective setting (except when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set)

on the shooting settings screen (p.60, 469).

LV shooting area display

When the aspect ratio for Live View shooting (p.295) is set to [

4:3 ],

[ 16:9 ], or [ 1:1 ], you can set the display method for the shooting area.

: Masked

: Outlined

441

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Dial direction during Tv/Av

: Normal

: Reverse direction

Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.

In the < a > shooting mode, the turning direction of the < 6 > and

< 5 > dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning direction of only the < 6 > dial will be reversed. The < 5 > dial’s turning direction in the < a > mode and the turning direction to set the exposure compensation in the < d >, < s >, and < f > mode will be the same.

Multi function lock

When the < R > switch is set to the right, it can prevent the < 6 >,

< 5 >, < 9 >, and < p

Y

0 > to append a checkmark [

X

]. Select [ OK ] to register the setting.

6 Main Dial

5 Quick Control Dial

9 Multi-controller p AF area selection lever

COP

If the < R > switch is set and you try to use one of the locked camera controls, < L > will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Also, [ LOCK ] will be displayed in the shooting settings display

(p.60).

If you lock, the < 5 > dial will be locked by default.

Even if the < 5 > dial is appended with a [ X ] checkmark, you can still use the touch pad < h >.

Custom Controls

You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials

according to your preferences. For details, see page 445.

442

3 Setting Custom Functions N

C.Fn4: Others

Add cropping information

If you set cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio you have set will appear on the Live View image. You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a medium- or large-format camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).

When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the image with the EOS software will be appended to the image. (The image is recorded to the card without being cropped.)

After the image is transferred to a computer, you can use Digital Photo

Professional (EOS software, p.536) to easily crop the image to the

aspect ratio that was set.

OFF : Off

6:6 : Aspect ratio 6:6

3:4 : Aspect ratio 3:4

4:5 : Aspect ratio 4:5

6:7 : Aspect ratio 6:7

Y

5:7 : Aspect ratio 5:7

COP

If [ z 5: Aspect ratio ] is set to any setting other than [ 3:2 ], the cropping information will not be appended to the image.

Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting.

However, the cropping information will not be displayed.

If cropping information is added to a RAW image, the image cannot be cropped with the camera’s RAW image processing.

443

3 Setting Custom Functions N

Default Erase option

During image playback and image review after image capture, when you press the < L

> button, the erase menu appears (p.392). You can

set which option, [ Cancel ] or [ Erase ], is to be preselected on this screen.

If [ Erase ] is set, you can just press < 0 > to quickly erase the image.

: [Cancel] selected

L : [Erase] selected

If [ Erase ] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.

COP

Y

444

8

3: Custom Controls

N

You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences.

1

Select [

8

3: Custom Controls].

Under the [ 8 3 ] tab, select [ Custom

Controls ], then press < 0 >.

X

The Custom Controls screen to select control buttons and dials will appear.

Select a camera button or dial.

2

Select a camera button or dial, then press < 0 >.

X

The name of the camera control and the assignable functions will be displayed.

Y

Assign a function.

3

Select a function, then press < 0 >.

COP z ] icon appears on the bottom left, you can press the

< B > button and set other related options.

4

Exit the setting.

When you press < 0 > to exit the setting, the screen in step 2 will reappear.

Press the < M > button to exit.

With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the < L > button to revert the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [ 8 3: Custom

Controls ] settings will not be canceled even if you select [ 8 5: Clear all

Custom Func. (C.Fn) ].

445

8 3: Custom Controls N

446

Assignable Functions to Camera Controls

Function Page

Metering and AF start

AF stop

450

452

Switch to registered AF function

ONE SHOT z AI SERVO

Switch to registered AF point

Selected AF point z Center/

Registered AF point

AF point direct selection

453

Direct AF point selection: Vertical

Direct AF area selection

Metering start

AE lock COP

454

AE lock (hold)

Y

AE lock, AF stop k k

FE lock

Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )

ISO (hold down lever, turn )

Set ISO speed ( during meter)

Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )

Exposure compensation (hold down lever, turn )

Shutter speed setting in M mode

Aperture setting in M mode

455

456

k k * 1 k k * 1 k k k k k k k k k k k

8 3: Custom Controls N p k k * 2 k k

* 3 k k k * 2 k k

* 3

* k

* 4 k k k k k k k k

COP

Y k * 5 k k k k k

* The AF stop button ( k k k k k k k k k

) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.

447

8 3: Custom Controls N

Function

One-touch image quality setting

One-touch image quality (hold)

Image quality

Picture Style

Depth-of-field preview

Page

456

457

457

IS start

Menu display

Register/recall shooting function

)

Image Playback

Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn

Cycle: y • g /Drive • AF/WB • q

Unlock while button pressed

Flash function settings

No function (disabled)

COP

458

Y k * 7 k * 7 k k

448

8 3: Custom Controls N p k

* 6 k * 6

* k

* 6 k * 6 k k k k k k k k k

* The AF stop button ( k k k k

COP k k

Y k k

) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.

449

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Metering and AF start

When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF are executed.

*1:When assigned to the < p > or < A > button, pressing the < B > button while the setting screen is displayed will enable you to set the detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the

< p > or < A > button will execute AF as it was set.

AF start position

When [ Registered AF point ] is set, you can press the < p > or

< A > button to switch to the registered AF point.

Registering the AF Point

Y point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point COP

Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected.

2. Select an AF point manually.

3. Hold down the < S > button and press the < U > button. A beep will sound and the AF point will be registered. If the AF area selection mode is set to any setting other than 65-point automatic selection AF, the registered AF point will blink.

450

When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:

• 65-point automatic selection AF: HP (HP: Home Position)

• Spot AF, 1 pt AF, Expand AF Area: SEL (Center), SEL HP (Off center)

When registered with SEL or SEL HP , the registered AF point will blink.

To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the < S > button and press the < m > button. The registered AF point will also be canceled if you select [ 5 4: Clear all camera settings ].

8 3: Custom Controls N

AI Servo AF characteristics

(p.108)

Press the < p > or < A > button to perform AF with the set case from [ Case1 ] to [ Case6 ].

AF operation

(p.86)

Press the < p > or < A > button to perform AF with the set AF operation.

AF area selection mode

(p.90)

Press the < p > or < A > button to perform AF with the set AF area selection mode.

If you want to keep using currently selected AF point when you press the < p > or < A > button, set [ AF start position ] to [ Manually selected AF point ]. If you want to keep the currently set AI Servo AF characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode, select

[ Maintain current setting ].

Y

COP

If [ 2 4: Orientation linked AF point ] is set to [ Separate AF pts:

Area+pt ] or [ Separate AF pts: Pt only ], you can register the AF points to be used separately for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal shooting.

If [ AF start position: Registered AF point ] and [ AF area selection mode ] are both set, [ Registered AF point ] will take effect.

451

8 3: Custom Controls N

: AF stop

The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function. Convenient when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.

: Switch to registered AF function

After setting and assigning this function to a button, you can apply the following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF: AF area

selection mode (p.90), Tracking sensitivity (p.113), Acceleration/

deceleration tracking (p.114), AF point auto switching (p.115), Servo 1st

image priority (p.117), and Servo 2nd image priority (p.118). Convenient

when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.

*2:On the setting screen, press the < B > button to display the detailed settings screen. Turn the < 5 > or < 6 > dial to select the parameter to be registered, then press < 0 > to append a checkmark [ X ]. When you select a parameter and press < 0 >, you can adjust the parameter.

Y

By pressing the < L > button, you can revert the settings to their defaults.

: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO

COP

You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to

One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo

AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.

: Switch to registered AF point

During metering, when you press the button assigned to this function, the camera will switch to the registered AF point.

*3:On the setting screen, when you press the < B > button, you can select [ Switch only when btn is held ] or [ Switch each time btn is pressed ]. To register the AF

point, see page 450.

452

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Selected AF point z Center/Registered AF point

During metering, tilting < p > to the right will switch between the current

AF point and the center AF point or registered AF point.

*4:On the setting screen, when you press the < B > button, you can select [ Switch to center AF point ] or [ Switch to registered AF point ]. To register the AF point, see

page 450.

: Direct AF point selection

During metering, you can select an AF point directly with the < 9 > dial or < 5 > without pressing the < S > button. With the < 5 > dial, you can select a left or right AF point. (Looping sequence for Zone AF and Large

Zone AF.)

*5:On the Multi-controller setting screen, when you press the < B > button, you can press the center of < 9 > to select [ Switch to center AF point ] or [ Switch to registered AF point

Y

: Direct AF point selection: Vertical

During metering, you can turn the < 5 > dial to directly select an upper COP

S > button. (Looping sequence

: Direct AF area selection

During metering, you can use < p > to directly select an AF area selection mode without pressing the < S > button.

If [ Direct AF point selection ] is assigned to < 9 >, you cannot use < 9 > to

scroll up/down the shooting information display (p.354, 357) during the

image review just after shooting.

453

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Metering start

When you press the shutter button halfway, only the exposure metering is performed.

: AE lock

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the exposure (AE lock) during metering. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting.

: AE lock (while button pressed)

The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter button.

: AE lock (hold) exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the button again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at exposure setting.

COP

: AE lock, AF stop

When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Convenient during AI Servo AF if you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops.

: FE lock

During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).

454

If you assign [ AE lock (while button pressed) ] to the shutter button, any buttons assigned to [ AE lock ] or [ AE lock (hold) ] will also work as [ AE lock

(while button pressed) ].

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )

You can set the ISO speed by holding down < 0 > and turning the

< 6 > dial.

If this control is used while Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting will take effect. Auto ISO cannot be set. If you use this function in the

< a > mode, you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture.

: ISO (hold down lever, turn )

You can set the ISO speed by tilting < p > to the right and turning the

< 6 > dial. The settable range is the same as with .

: Set ISO speed ( during metering)

During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the < 5 > dial.

The settable range is the same as with .

Y

: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )

You can set the exposure compensation by holding down < 0 > and turning the < 6 compensation while < a

COP

: Exposure compensation (hold down lever, turn )

You can set exposure compensation by tilting < p > to the right and turning the < 6 > dial. Convenient when you want to set exposure compensation while < a > manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.

: Shutter speed setting in M mode

In manual exposure < a >, you can set the shutter speed with the

< 6 > or < 5 > dial.

455

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Aperture setting in M mode

In manual exposure < a >, you can set the aperture with the < 5 > or

< 6 > dial.

: One-touch image quality setting

Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the imagerecording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the imagerecording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [ Show/ hide in viewfinder ]’s [ Image quality ] checkmarked). After the shooting ends, the One-touch image quality setting will be canceled and the image-recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality.

*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the < B > button, you can select the imagerecording quality for this function.

: One-touch image quality (hold) quality set here. While this change is in effect, the image-recording quality

[

(JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [ Show/hide in viewfinder ]’s

Image quality

COP quality setting, press the button assigned to this function again.

*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the < B > button, you can select the imagerecording quality for this function.

: Image quality

Press < 0 > to display the image-recording quality setting screen

(p.149) on the LCD monitor.

If RAW or RAW+JPEG is set for the image-recording quality to be switched to with [ One-touch image quality setting ] and [ One-touch image quality

(hold) ], [ Multi Shot Noise Reduction

] (p.176) will not work after the switch.

For [ z 3: High ISO speed noise reduct’n ], [ Standard ] will be applied for shooting.

456

During the switch to the One-touch image quality setting, you can display

< z

> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Picture Style

Press < 0 > to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the

LCD monitor (p.160).

: Depth-of-field preview

When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop

down and you can check the depth of field (p.221).

: IS start

With the lens’s IS switch set to < 1 >, the lens’s Image Stabilizer

operates when you press the button assigned to this function (p.53).

: Menu display

Press < 0 > will display the menu on the LCD monitor.

: Register/recall shooting function

Y

You can manually set the main shooting functions such as the shutter speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode, AF area selection mode, COP shooting function settings and shoot.

*7:On the setting screen, press the < B > button to display the detailed settings. Turn the < 5 > or

< 6 > dial to select the function to be registered, then press < 0 > to append a checkmark [ X ] to it.

When you select a parameter and press < 0 >, you can adjust the parameter. By pressing the < L > button, you can revert the settings to their defaults.

By selecting [ Register current settings ], the camera’s current settings will be registered. To

register the AF point, see page 450.

457

8 3: Custom Controls N

: Image playback

Pressing < 0 > will play back images.

: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn )

Press < 0 > to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card. See

page 364 for the operation procedure. During Live View or movie

shooting (except u

+Tracking), you can also magnify the image (p.305,

308).

: Cycle: y • g /Drive • AF/WB • q

Pressing the < B > button changes the settable function in this sequence: y • g 9 R • f 9 B • q .

: Unlock while button pressed

Even when the < R

Y down the depth-of-field preview button, you can use the camera control buttons and dials restricted by [ 8 3: Multi function lock ].

: Flash function settings

COP

Pressing < 0 > will display the function setting screen for the built-in flash or external Speedlite.

: No function (disabled)

Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button.

458

3

Registering My Menu

N

Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom

Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name the registered menu tabs and press the < M > button to display the

My Menu tab first.

Adding My Menu Tab

1

Select [Add My Menu tab].

Under the [ 9 ] tab, select [ Add My

Menu tab ], then press < 0 >.

2

Select [OK].

X

The [

Y

] tab is created.

You can create up to five menu tabs by repeating steps 1 and 2.

COP

Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)

1

Select [Configure: MY MENU*].

Turn the < 6 > dial and select

[ Configure: MY MENU* ] (tab for registering menu items), then press

< 0 >.

459

3 Registering My Menu N

2

Select [Select items to register].

My Menu Tab Settings

3

Register the desired items.

Select the desired item, then press

< 0 >.

Select [ OK ] on the confirmation dialog.

You can register up to six items.

To return to the screen in step 2, press the < M > button.

Y menu tab, and rename or delete the menu tab.

Sort registered items

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[ Sort registered items ] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then press < 0 >. With [ z ] displayed, turn the < 5 > dial to change the order, then press < 0 >.

Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab

You can delete any of the registered items. [ Delete selected items ] deletes one item at a time, and [ Delete all items on tab ] deletes all registered items.

460

3 Registering My Menu N

Delete tab

You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [ Delete tab ] to delete the [ MY MENU* ] tab.

Rename tab

You can rename the My Menu tab from [ MY MENU* ].

Select [Rename tab].

1

Enter text.

2

Press the < L > button to delete any unnecessary characters.

Press the < Q > button. The text palette will be highlighted with a color frame, and text can be entered.

Y

5 > dial or < 9 > to move the and select the desired character. Then press < 0 > to enter it.

COP

3

Exit the setting.

After entering the text, press the

< M > button, then select [ OK ].

X The name is saved.

461

3 Registering My Menu N

Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items

You can delete all My Menu tabs and delete all My Menu items.

Delete all My Menu tabs

You can delete all My Menu tabs. When you select [ Delete all My

Menu tabs ], all the tabs from [ MY MENU1 ] to [ MY MENU5 ] will be deleted and the [ 9 ] tab will revert to its default.

Delete all items

[

You can delete all the items registered under the [ MY MENU1 ] to

MY MENU5

Y

When [ Delete all items ] is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be deleted.

COP

462

If you do [ Delete tab ] or [ Delete all My Menu tabs ], tab names renamed with [ Rename tab ] will also be deleted.

3 Registering My Menu N

Menu Display Settings

You can select [ Menu display ] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press the < M > button.

Normal display

Displays the last displayed menu screen.

Display from My Menu tab

Displays with the [ 9 ] tab selected.

Display only My Menu tab

Only the [ 9 ] tab is displayed. (The not be displayed.) z ,

Y

, 3 , 5 , and 8 tabs will

COP

463

w

: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

N

You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s < w >, < x >, and < y > positions.

1

Select [Custom shooting mode

(C1-C3)].

Under the [ 5 4 ] tab, select [ Custom shooting mode (C1-C3) ], then press

< 0 >.

2

Select [Register settings].

3

Register the Custom shooting mode.

Y be registered, then press < 0 >.

Select [ OK ] on the confirmation COP

466) will be registered under the

Mode Dial’s C* position.

Automatic Updating

If you change a setting while you shoot in the < w >, < x >, or < y > mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic update, in step 2, set [ Auto update set.

] to [ Enable ].

Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes

In step 2, if you select [ Clear settings ], the camera will revert to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes registered.

464

w : Registering Custom Shooting Modes N

Settings Registered

Shooting functions

Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,

AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,

Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation amount

Menu functions

[ z 1 ] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode

[ z 2 ] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto

Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,

White balance Shift/Bracketing, Color space

[ z 3 ] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO

Y exposure (settings), HDR Mode (settings)

[

[ z 4 ] Red-eye reduction, Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker z shooting, Mirror lockup

COP

Live View shooting, AF method, Continuous AF, Grid display,

Aspect ratio, Exposure simulation

[ z 6 ] Silent LV shooting, Metering timer

[ z 4 (Movie) ]

Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording quality, Sound recording, AF speed during Movie Servo AF,

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity

[ z 5 (Movie) ]

Silent LV shooting, Metering timer, Movie recording count,

Movie play count, Silent control, V button function, HDMI output +LCD

[ 2 1 ] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6

[ 2 2 ] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority

[ 2 3 ] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF release priority

465

w : Registering Custom Shooting Modes N

[ 2 4 ] Lens drive when AF impossible, Selectable AF point, Select

AF area selection mode, AF area selection method,

Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point AI Servo AF,

Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF

[ 2 5 ] Manual AF point selection pattern, AF point display during focus, VF display illumination, AF status in viewfinder, AF

Microadjustment

[ x 2 ] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6

[ x 3 ] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)

[ 5 1 ] File numbering, Auto rotate, Eye-Fi settings

[ 5 2 ] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display, Log GPS position

[

[ 5 3 ] Auto cleaning, z button display options, m button

8 1 function, HDMI frame rate Y

[ 8 2 bracketed shots, Safety shift, Same exposure for new aperture COP shooting speed

[ 8 3 ] Live View shooting area display, Dial direction during Tv/Av,

Multi function lock, Custom Controls

[ 8 4 ] Add cropping information, Default Erase option

My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.

466

Even when the Mode Dial is set to < w >, < x >, or < y >, you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings.

By pressing the < B > button, you can check which shooting mode is registered under < w >, < x >, and < y

> (p.468-469).

features, system accessories, etc.

COP

15

Reference

Certification Logo

Select [ 5 4: Certification Logo Display ] and press < 0 > to display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.

467

B

Button Functions

If you press the < B > button when the camera is ready to shoot, the screens for the [ Displays camera settings ],

[ Electronic level

] (p.75), and [

Displays shooting function

] (p.469) will be

displayed in sequence.

Under the [ 5 3 ] tab, [ z button display options ] enables you to select the options displayed when the < B > button is pressed.

Select the desired display option and press < 0 > to append a checkmark [

X

].

After completing the selections, select

The [

[ OK ].

Note that you cannot remove the [

Displays camera settings

X

Y for all languages.

Even if you uncheck the [ Electronic level ] so it does not appear, it will the < B > button.

COP

Camera Settings

Shooting mode registered under the

Mode Dial’s wxy

(p.464)

(p.171)

(p.133)

(p.172, 173)

(p.187)

Transfer of some images failed*

(p.427)

(p.178)

(p.176)

(p.42, 151)

* This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.

468

B Button Functions

Shooting Function Settings

Aperture

Shutter speed

Shooting mode

AE lock

Highlight tone priority

ISO speed

Exposure level indicator

Flash exposure compensation

White balance correction

Custom Controls

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

Picture Style

AF operation

Quick Control icon

Image-recording quality

Possible shots

Battery check

White balance

Eye-Fi card transmission status

Y Maximum burst/Number of remaining multiple exposures

Card indicator

Multiple exposures/HDR/

Metering mode

GPS acquisition status/

COP Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Card selection icon

Flash-ready/FE lock/High-speed sync Drive mode

Pressing the < Q > button enables Quick Control of the shooting

settings (p.61).

When you press the < n >, < o >, < m >, or < S > button, the setting screen appears and you can use < 6 >, < 5 >,

< B >, or < 9 > to set it.

If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings” or “Electronic level” screen is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this, press the < B > button to exit from

“Shooting function settings” screen, then turn off the power switch.

469

3

Checking the Battery Information

You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery

Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number, and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you can check the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and operation history.

Battery position

Select [Battery info.].

Under the [ 5 3 ] tab, select [ Battery info.

], then press < 0 >.

X

The battery info. screen will appear.

Battery model or household power source being used.

The battery level icon (p.46) is displayed

together with the remaining battery capacity shown in 1% increments.

Y battery is recharged.

Battery’s recharge performance level is displayed in one of three levels.

(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.

(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.

Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.

If Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) and Wireless File Transmitter

WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold separately) are both attached to the camera, battery information only for the BG-E16 will be displayed. Battery information for the WFT-E7 (Ver. 2) will not be displayed.

470

The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not counted.)

The battery information will also be displayed for Battery Pack LP-E6N/

LP-E6 inside Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately). If size-AA/LR6 batteries are used, only the battery level will be displayed.

3 Checking the Battery Information

If communication with the battery is not possible or irregular for some reason, [ Use this battery?

] will be displayed. If you select [ OK ], you can continue shooting. However, depending on the battery, the battery info. screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info. correctly.

Registering Batteries to the Camera

You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs to the camera.

To register multiple battery packs to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery pack.

Press the <

B

> button.

1

With the battery info. screen

X displayed, press the < B > button.

appear.

Y

2

X If the battery is not registered, it will be grayed out.

COP

X The confirmation dialog will appear.

3

Select [OK].

X The battery pack will be registered and the battery history screen will reappear.

X The grayed out battery number will now be displayed in white.

Press the < M > button. The battery info. screen will reappear.

The battery pack cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) using size-AA/LR6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered by AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately).

If six battery packs are already registered, [ Register ] cannot be

selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, see page 473.

471

3 Checking the Battery Information

Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries

It is convenient to label all registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.

Serial number

1

Write the serial number on a label.

Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen on a label approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6 in. in size.

b29fda30

2

Take out the battery and affix the label.

Y

2 >.

Open the battery compartment cover and remove the battery.

illustration (on the side with no electrical contacts).

Repeat this procedure for all of your battery packs so you can easily see the serial number.

472

Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or impossible to turn on the camera.

If you use Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately), the label may peel off as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery pack. If it peels off, affix a new label.

3 Checking the Battery Information

Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack

You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even when not installed) and also when it was last used.

Serial number Date last used

Look for the serial number.

Refer to the battery’s serial number label and look for the battery’s serial number on the battery history screen.

X

You can check the respective battery pack’s remaining capacity and the date when it was last used.

Remaining capacity

1

Select [Delete info.].

Follow step 2 on page 471 to select [

Delete info.

], then press

< 0 >.

COP

2

Select the battery pack information to be deleted.

Select the battery pack information to be deleted, then press

< 0 >.

X [ X ] will appear.

To delete information for another battery pack, repeat this procedure.

3

Press the <

L

> button.

X The confirmation dialog screen will appear.

4

Select [OK].

X The battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in step 1 will reappear.

473

Using a Household Power Outlet

With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (sold separately), you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and do not have to worry about the remaining battery level.

1

Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.

Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the

AC Adapter’s socket.

DC Coupler cord hole

Connect the power cord.

2

Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration.

3

After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet.

Y

Insert the DC Coupler’s cord carefully without damaging the cord.

COP

4

Insert the DC Coupler.

Open the battery compartment cover and open the DC Coupler cord hole cover.

Insert the DC Coupler securely until it locks and put the cord through the hole.

Close the cover.

474

Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the camera’s power switch is set to < 1 >.

H

Using Eye-Fi Cards

With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can automatically transfer captured images to a computer, or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN.

The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or contact the card manufacturer.

The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.

Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area, please check with the card manufacturer.

1

COP

Y

5 1

(p.41)

Select [Eye-Fi settings].

] tab, select [ Eye-Fi settings ], then press < 0 >.

.

This menu is displayed only when an

Eye-Fi card is inserted into the camera.

3

Enable Eye-Fi transmission.

Select [ Eye-Fi trans.

], then press

< 0 >.

Select [ Enable ], then press < 0 >.

If you set [ Disable ], there will be no automatic transmission even with the

Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission status icon I ).

475

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

4

Display the connection information.

Select [ Connection info.

], then press

< 0 >.

Transmission status icon

Check the [Access point SSID:].

5

Check that an access point is displayed for [ Access point SSID: ].

You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s

MAC address and firmware version.

Press the < M > button to exit the

6 menu.

X The picture is transferred and the

< H > icon switches from gray (not connected) to one of the icons below.

COP

O is displayed in the shooting information

display (p.357).

Y

H

(Gray) Not connected : No connection with access point.

H

(Blinking) Connecting...

: Connecting to access point.

H

(Illuminated) Connected : Connection to access point established.

H

( d ) Transferring...

: Image transfer to access point in progress.

476

H Using Eye-Fi Cards

Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards

If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card information. Turn the camera’s power switch off, and on again.

Even if [ Eye-Fi trans.

] is set to [ Disable ], it may still transmit a signal. In hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.

If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.

Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.

The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.

The battery power will be consumed faster.

During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.

If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [ Eye-Fi settings ] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon < H > will not appear.

Y

COP

477

System Map

ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 90EX 270EX II 320EX 430EX II 600EX-RT Macro Ring Lite

MR-14EX II

Macro Twin Lite

MT-24EX

Dioptric Adjustment

Lenses Eg

Bundled

Accessories

Anti-Fog

Eyepiece Eg

Angle Finder C

Eyecup Eg

Wide Strap

COP

Y

Battery Pack

LP-E6N* 1

Focusing

Screen Eh

Cable protector

Battery Charger

LC-E6 or LC-E6E

Hand Strap E2

AC Adapter

AC-E6

DC Coupler

DR-E6

AC Adapter Kit

ACK-E6 Battery Grip

BG-E16

Car Battery

Cable CB-570

Car Battery

Charger

CBC-E6

Leather Case EH20-L

478

Battery Magazine

BGM-E16L for

LP-E6N/LP-E6

(attached to BG-E16)

Battery Magazine

BGM-E16A for size-AA/LR6 batteries

(attached to BG-E16)

System Map

Headphones Timer Remote

Controller

TC-80N3

Remote

Switch

RS-80N3

Wireless

Controller

LC-5

Remote Controller

RC-6

EF lenses

EOS DIGITAL

Solution Disk

External microphone

HDMI Cable

Y

COP

Wireless LAN access point

Wireless File

Transmitter

WFT-E7 (Ver. 2)/

WFT-E7* 2

EF-S lenses

TV/Video

Interface Cable IFC-150U II

(1.5 m/4.9 ft.)

Wireless LAN adapter

Ethernet port

Interface Cable IFC-500U II* 3

(4.7 m/15.4 ft.)

CF Card

USB port

Computer

Windows 8.1 / 8

Windows 7

Mac OS X

Card reader

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card

PictBridge-compatible printer

*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.

*2: To use the older model WFT-E7 (not Version 2), the firmware must be updated and

Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.

*3: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).

* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.

479

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode

480

Still Photo Shooting

o : Set automatically k : User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Function A d s f a

All image quality settings selectable

ISO speed

Picture Style

White balance

Automatically set/Auto ISO

Manually set

Automatically set/Auto

Manual selection

Auto

Preset

Custom

Color temperature setting k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Correction/Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Long exposure noise reduction

High ISO speed noise reduction

Y k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k Highlight tone priority

Lens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination correction

COP k k k k k k k k k k k k

Distortion correction

Anti-flicker shooting k k k k k k o k k k k k

Color space

AF sRGB

Adobe RGB

One-Shot AF

AI Servo AF

AI Focus AF

AF area selection mode

AF point

Manual focusing (MF)

AF-assist beam

AF Microadjustment u (face)+Tracking * 2

FlexZone - Multi * 2

FlexZone - Single *

2 o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k o k k k k k k k k k k k o

*

1 k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Continuous AF *

2

F

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode

Function A d s f a

Metering

Evaluative metering

Partial metering

Spot metering

Center-weighted average metering o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Exposure

Drive

Built-in flash

External

Speedlite

Live View shooting

Program shift

AE lock

Exposure compensation

AEB

Depth-of-field preview

HDR shooting

Multiple exposures

Interval timer *

5 k k k k *

3 k k k k

* 4 k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Bulb timer

Single shooting

High-speed continuous shooting

Low-speed continuous shooting k k k k k k k

Y k k k k k k k k k k k k

Silent single shooting

Silent continuous shooting COP k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control

Automatic firing k k k k k k k

Flash on (Fires at all times)

Flash off

Red-eye reduction

FE lock

Flash exposure compensation

Wireless control

Function settings

Custom Function settings k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Quick Control

*1: If the built-in flash is set to < b >, the AF-assist beam will not be emitted.

*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.

*3: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

*4: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.

*5: Settable only during viewfinder shooting.

F

481

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode

Movie Shooting

o : Set automatically k : User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled

Function

Movies Still Photos z *

1

A d / F s f a A d / F / s / f a y k M y k M k k k k k

All image quality settings selectable

(movie)

All image quality settings selectable

(still photos)

Automatically set/Auto ISO o o o o k o

ISO speed

Picture

Manually set

Automatically set/Auto

Style

Manual selection k k k k

White balance

Auto

Preset

Custom

Color temperature setting

Correction

Bracketing

Auto Lighting Optimizer

Long exposure noise reduction o k k k k o k k k k k k

Y o k k k k

COP o k k k k o High ISO speed noise reduction * 2 k k k k Highlight tone priority

Peripheral illumination k o k k k k o k k k k k k

Lens correction

Chromatic aberration aberration k k k k k k correction correction k k o k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Distortion correction

Color space sRGB

Adobe RGB o o o o o o

AF u +Tracking

FlexiZone - Multi

FlexiZone - Single

Manual focusing (MF) k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

Movie Servo AF k k k k k k

*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.

k k k k k

*2 : Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.

k k k k k k k

482

Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode

Metering

Function

Movies Still Photos z *

1

A d / F s f a A d / F / s / f a y k

M y o o o o o o k o

M o

Program shift

Exposure

AE lock

Exposure compensation k k k

* 3 k k k k

*

4

AEB

Depth-of-field preview

Single shooting

High-speed continuous shooting

Low-speed continuous shooting

Drive

Silent single shooting

Silent continuous shooting

10-sec. self-timer/

Y

Remote control * 5

2-sec. self-timer/Remote control * 5

Built-in flash/External Speedlite

Sound recording

COP k k k k k

Time code k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k Quick Control k k

*3 : With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.

*4 : With Auto ISO, you can set exposure compensation.

*5 : Works only before you start shooting a movie.

k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k

* 3 k

*

4

483

Menu Settings

Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting

z : Shooting 1 (Red)

Image quality

Image review time

Beep

Release shutter without card

1 / 41 / 61

73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7 a / 8 a / b / c

Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold

Enable / Disable

Enable / Disable

Lens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable

Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable

Flash control

Distortion: Disable / Enable Y

External flash function settings / External flash

C.Fn setting / Clear settings COP

Page

149

70

69

42

181

262

484

Shaded menu options are not displayed in the < A > mode.

What is displayed under [ z 1: Image quality ] depends on the [ Record func.

] (p.146) setting under [

5 1: Record func+card/folder sel.

]. If

[ Rec. separately ] is set, set the image quality for each card.

With movie shooting, certain menu items are not displayed. Also, the

[ z 6 ] tab will not appear.

Menu Settings z : Shooting 2 (Red)

Exposure compensation/

AEB setting*

1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops

(AEB ±3 stops)

ISO speed settings

ISO speed / ISO speed range /

Auto ISO range / Minimum shutter speed

Disable / Low / Standard / High

Auto Lighting

Optimizer

White balance

Disabled in M or B modes

Q / W / E / R / Y / U / D / O /

P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)

Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance

White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each

White balance shift/ bracketing

Color space

White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias, sRGB / Adobe RGB

Y

* During movie shooting, [ Expo.comp./AEB ] will be [ Exposure comp.

].

z : Shooting 3 (Red)

D

COP

Auto / P Standard / Q Portrait /

Picture Style R Landscape / S Neutral / U Faithful /

V Monochrome / W User Def. 1-3

Long exposure noise reduction

Disable / Auto / Enable

172

187

160

178

High ISO speed noise reduction

HDR Mode

Disable / Low / Standard / High /

Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable

Dust Delete Data

Obtain data to be used by EOS software to delete dust spots

Multiple exposure

Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /

Number of exposures / Save source images /

Continue multiple exposure

Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous

HDR / Auto Image Align / Save source images

169

Page

226

227

154

175

168

176

180

407

238

233

485

Menu Settings z : Shooting 4* (Red)

Red-eye reduction

Interval timer

Bulb timer

Disable / Enable

Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)

Disable / Enable (Exposure time)

Anti-flicker shooting Disable / Enable

Mirror lockup Disable / Enable

* In the < A > mode, these menu options are displayed under [ z 2 ].

z : Shooting 5* (Red)

Live View shooting Enable / Disable

AF method u +Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone -

Single

Continuous AF

Grid display

Aspect ratio

Disable / Enable

Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m

Y n

3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1

Exposure simulation

* In the < A

COP z 3 ].

z : Shooting 6 (Red)

Enable / During e / Disable

Silent LV shooting Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable

4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /

10 min. / 30 min.

Metering timer

Page

256

250

231

185

246

287

299

294

295

295

296

297

298

486

Menu Settings

2 : AF1 (Purple)

Case 1

Case 2

Case 3

Case 4

Case 5

Case 6

2 : AF2 (Purple)

AI Servo 1st image priority

AI Servo 2nd image priority

2 : AF3 (Purple)

Lens electronic MF

AF-assist beam firing

One-Shot AF release priority

Versatile multi purpose setting

Continue to track the subjects, ignoring possible obstacles

Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering

AF points

For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly

For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction (disabled in Single-point AF mode)

For subjects that change speed and move erratically (disabled in Single-point AF mode)

Y

117

Shooting speed priority / Equal priority / Focus COP

118

Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after One-

Shot AF / Disable in AF mode

119

Enable / Disable / Enable external flash only /

IR AF assist beam only

120

Page

109

109

110

110

111

112

Release priority / Focus priority

121

487

Menu Settings

2 : AF4 (Purple)

Lens drive when AF impossible

Selectable AF point

Continue focus search / Stop focus search

Select AF area selection mode

65 points / 21 points / 9 points

Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:

1 point AF / Expand AF area: / Expand AF area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /

Manual selection: Large Zone AF /

Auto selection: 65 point AF

S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial

AF area selection method

Orientation linked AF point

Initial AF point,

Servo AF

AI

Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF

2 : AF5 (Purple)

Same for both vertical/horizontal /

Separate AF points: Area+point /

Separate AF points: Point only

Initial

Manual

Y

Enable / Disable COP

Stops at AF area edges / Continuous

125

127

128

Manual AF point selection pattern

AF point display during focus

Selected (constant) / All (constant) / Selected

(pre-AF, focused) / Selected (focused) /

Disable display

Auto / Enable / Disable

VF display illumination

AF point during AI Servo AF: Non illuminated /

Illuminated

129

130

131

AF status in viewfinder Show in field of view / Show outside view

AF Microadjustment Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens

132

133

125

123

124

Page

122

488

Menu Settings

3 : Playback 1 (Blue)

Protect images

Rotate image

Erase images

Protect images

Rotate images

Erase images

Print order

Photobook Set-up

Specify images to be printed (DPOF)

Specify images for a photobook

Image copy Copy images between cards

RAW image processing Process 1 images

3 : Playback 2 (Blue)

Resize Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count

Rating

Slide show

Image transfer

Image jump w/ 6

3 : Playback 3 (Blue)

[ OFF ] / l / m / n / o / p Y

Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer

427

COP

362

371

382

403

Highlight alert

AF point display

Playback grid

Histogram display

Movie playback count*

Disable / Enable

Disable / Enable

Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n

Brightness / RGB

Rec time / Time code

359

359

355

360

340

Magnification (approx.)

1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x

(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 10x

(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected point) / Same as last magnification (from center)

Control over HDMI Disable / Enable

365

386

* The setting is linked to the [ Time code ]’s [ Movie play count ] under the [ z 5

(Movie) ] tab.

489

Page

368

367

392

424

429

388

398

Menu Settings

5 : Set-up 1 (Yellow)

Record function+card/ folder selection

File numbering

File name

Auto rotate

Format card

Eye-Fi settings

5 : Set-up 2 (Yellow)

Auto power off

LCD brightness

Date/Time/Zone

Language K

Viewfinder display

Record function:

Standard / Auto switch card / Record separately / Record to multiple

Record/playback / Playback: f / g

Folder: Creating and selecting a folder

Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset

Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2

On z D / On D / Off

Erase data on the card by formatting

Displayed when a commercially-available Eye-

Fi card is inserted

Y

1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30 min. / Disable COP

Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /

Daylight saving time / Time zone

475

394

148

188

193

190

395

67

69

47

146

Select the interface language

Viewfinder level: Hide / Show

VF grid display: Disable / Enable

Show/hide in viewfinder:

Shooting mode / White balance / Drive mode /

AF operation / Metering mode / Image quality /

Flicker detection

49

75

74

77

Page

GPS/digital compass settings

Set GPS and digital compass functions

197

490

Menu Settings

Page

5 : Set-up 3 (Yellow)

Video system For NTSC / For PAL

330

385

Battery information

Sensor cleaning z button display options m button function

HDMI frame rate*

Communication

Rating / Protect

Y

350

Displayed when WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold

370

-

371

settings

5 : Set-up 4 (Yellow) separately) is attached.

* Options displayed on the screen differ depending on the [ Video system ] setting.

COP

Register current camera settings to the Mode Custom shooting mode

464

(C1-C3) Dial’s w , x , and y positions

Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings

70

Copyright information

Certification Logo

Display z firmware ver.

Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter count / Recharge performance / Battery registration / Serial number / Battery history

Auto cleaning f : Enable / Disable

Clean now f

Clean manually

Displays camera settings / Electronic level /

Displays shooting functions

Display copyright information / Enter author’s name / Enter copyright details /

Delete copyright information

Some of the camera’s certification logos are displayed

Select to update the firmware of the camera, lens, Speedlite, or Wireless File Transmitter

470

406

409

468

195

467

-

When using GPS function or a Wireless File Transmitter, be sure to check the countries and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region.

491

Menu Settings

8 : Custom Functions (Orange)

C.Fn1: Exposure

C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive

C.Fn3: Display/

Operation

C.Fn4: Others

C.Fn5: Clear

Customize camera functions as desired

Clear all Custom Function settings

9 : My Menu (Green)

Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5

Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs

Delete all items

Menu display

Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5

Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /

Display only My Menu tab

Y

COP

Page

434

438

440

443

433

459

462

462

463

492

Menu Settings

Movie Shooting

z : Shooting 4

*1

(Movie) (Red)

Movie Servo AF

AF method

Grid display

Enable / Disable u +Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone -

Single

Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n

MOV / MP4

Movie recording quality

Sound recording *

2

Movie Servo AF speed

Movie recording size:

• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480

• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p

PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p

• ALL-I (For editing) / IPB (Standard) /

IPB (Light)

24.00p: Disable / Enable

Y

Recording level COP

When active: Always on / During shooting

AF speed: Slow (4, 3, 2, 1) / Standard

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity

Locked on (-1, -2) / 0 / Responsive (+1, +2)

* In the < A > mode, these menu options are displayed under [ z 2 ].

* In the < A > shooting mode, [ Sound recording ] settings will be [ On ] [ Off ].

346

331

333

336

345

344

330

Page

342

343

493

Menu Settings z : Shooting 5 *

1

(Movie) (Red)

Silent LV shooting

Metering timer

Time code

Silent Control

V button function

HDMI output + LCD

Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable

4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. /

1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min.

Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording count / Movie play count

*2

/ HDMI /

Drop frame

*3

Enable h / Disable h

/ z / q / z / / k / q / k

No mirroring / Mirroring

Page

347

347

339

338

348

348

*1: In the < A > mode, these menu options are displayed under [ z 3 ].

*2: The setting is linked to [ Movie play count ] under the [ x 3 ] tab.

*3: Displayed when 8 (59.94 fps) or 6 (29.97 fps) is set.

Y

COP

494

Troubleshooting Guide

If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Power-Related Problems

The battery pack does not recharge.

If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not

be recharged (p.470).

Do not use any battery pack other than genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/

LP-E6.

The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

Y the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug COP problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

The charger’s lamp does not blink.

If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.

The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <

1

>.

Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed

(p.40).

Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.40).

Recharge the battery (p.38).

Make sure the card slot cover is closed

(p.41).

495

Troubleshooting Guide

The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power switch is <

2

>.

If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.

[Cannot communicate with battery] is displayed.

Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Remove and install the battery again (p.40).

If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

Use a fully-charged battery pack

(p.38).

Y

5 3: Battery info.

]

to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.470). If the

battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.

COP

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using the LCD monitor frequently.

• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period.

• Using GPS.

• [ GPS ] is set to [ Enable ] even after the camera’s power is turned off.

• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.

The camera turns off by itself.

Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take effect, set [ 5 2: Auto power off ] to [ Disable

] (p.69).

Even if [ 5 2: Auto power off ] is set to [ Disable ], the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)

496

Troubleshooting Guide

Auto power off does not work.

During interval timer shooting, auto power off will not take effect (p.250).

Shooting-Related Problems

The lens cannot be attached.

The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.50).

The viewfinder is dark.

Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.38).

No images can be shot or recorded.

Make sure the card is properly inserted

Y

If you are using an SD card, slide the card’s write-protect switch to the

Write/Erase setting (p.41).

make space

COP

If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator

< o > in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus

manually (p.55, 140).

The card cannot be used.

If a card error message is displayed, see page 44 or 510.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF (p.87). Focus lock is not possible

in the AI Servo AF, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF (p.83).

497

Troubleshooting Guide

I have to press the shutter button twice completely to take a picture.

If [ z 4: Mirror lockup ] is set to [ Enable ], set it to [ Disable ].

The image is out of focus.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to < AF

> (p.50).

Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.54-55).

If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to < 1 >.

In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

speed (p.218), set a higher ISO speed (p.154), use flash (p.254, 259),

or use a tripod.

There are fewer AF points.

Y patterns will differ. The lenses are categorized into seven groups from

A to G. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in COP

The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.

The AF point at the registered area is blinking (p.94, 450).

The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF point

are displayed (p.93, 450).

The AF points do not light up in red.

The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-light conditions.

In the < d >, < s >, < f >, < a >, and < F > modes, you can set whether to have the AF points light in red when focus is achieved

(p.131).

498

Troubleshooting Guide

AF speed changes depending on lenses used.

During Live View shooting and movie shooting, the AF control method

(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) switches automatically depending on the lens type and function used such as magnified view. The AF speed may therefore change greatly and focusing may take longer.

Focusing takes a long time.

If FlexiZone - Multi is set, it may take longer to focus on the subject depending on the shooting conditions. Use FlexiZone - Single or focus manually.

If the movie recording size is set to L 8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps), contrast detection will be used for the AF control.

Y

Depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may become slower

(p.142).

COP

When EOS iTR AF is operating (p.128), maximum continuous

shooting speed set with < o > will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also, under low-light conditions, the continuous shooting speed may decrease.

If [ Anti-flicker shoot.

] is set to [ Enable ] and you shoot under flickering light, the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower, or the continuous shooting interval may become irregular.

Also, the time lag until shutter release may be slightly longer than

usual (p.185).

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower

than the number mentioned on page 151.

499

Troubleshooting Guide

ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.

If [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] is set to [ Enable ], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000. Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range with [ ISO speed range ], you cannot select the H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200).

When [ z 3: Highlight tone priority ] is set to [ Disable ], ISO 100/125/

160, H1, or H2 can be set (p.180).

Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image comes out bright.

Set [ z 2: Auto Lighting Optimizer ] to [ Disable ]. When [ Low ],

[ Standard ], or [ High ] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come

out bright (p.175).

Y

I cannot set the exposure compensation while both manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.

COP

Even if an exposure compensation is performed, it will not be applied for flash photography.

Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.

If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, [ Multi

Shot Noise Reduction ] cannot be set.

The Live View image or movie shooting image is not displayed during multiple-exposure shooting.

If [ On:ContShtng ] is set, Live View display, image review after image

capture, or image playback is not possible during shooting (p.238).

500

Troubleshooting Guide

The multiple-exposure image is shot in

1

quality.

When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61 , the multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1

quality (p.245).

When I use the <

f

> mode with flash, the shutter speed becomes slow.

If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [ z 1: Flash control ], set [ Flash sync. speed in

Av mode ] to [ 1/250-1/60sec. auto ] or [ 1/250 sec. (fixed)

] (p.263).

The built-in flash rises by itself.

In the < A

Y necessary.

The built-in flash fires continuous flashes and makes a sound.

COP

beam (p.89) to make it easier to focus. It also makes a sound when it

fires the flashes. This is normal and not a malfunction.

The built-in flash does not fire.

If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the flash may stop firing for a while to protect the flash unit.

The external flash does not fire.

If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [ z 6:

Silent LV shoot.

] to [ Disable

] (p.297).

501

Troubleshooting Guide

The external flash always fires at full output.

If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will

always be fired at full output (p.260).

When the external Speedlite’s Custom Function setting for [ Flash metering mode ] is set to [ TTL flash metering ] (autoflash), the flash

will always be fired at full output (p.271).

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set for the external Speedlite.

If flash exposure compensation is already set with the external

Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera.

When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled

(set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

High-speed sync cannot be set in the <

Y

> mode.

Under [ z 1: Flash control ], set [ Flash sync. speed in Av mode ] to

[ Auto

] (p.263).

COP

The camera makes a small noise when it is shaken.

When the camera’s internal components slightly move, a small sound may be heard.

The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting.

If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot (p.287).

During Live View or movie shooting, a white or red

E

icon is displayed.

It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white

< > icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.

If the red < E > icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or

movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.310, 351).

502

Troubleshooting Guide

Movie shooting stops by itself.

If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop

automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 5. To find

out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site.

If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting will stop automatically.

Movie Servo AF cannot be used.

The movie recording size is set to L 8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps).

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.

If the shooting mode is < A >, < d >, < s >, < f >, and < F >, the

Y a > mode, you can freely

set the ISO speed (p.321).

The manually set ISO speed changes when

COP

If you shoot a movie with manual exposure set to H2 (equivalent to

ISO 51200), the ISO speed setting will switch to H1 (equivalent to ISO

25600). Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to the H2.

The exposure changes during movie shooting.

If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the changes in the exposure may be recorded.

Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.

503

Troubleshooting Guide

The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting.

Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone may be recorded. In the < a > mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce the problem.

The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.

If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.

Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting.

The movie recording size is set to L 8

Y

7 (50.00 fps).

When I shoot still photos during movie shooting, the movie shooting stops.

COP

To shoot still photos during movie shooting, using a CF card capable of

UDMA transfer or a UHS-I SD card is recommended.

Setting a lower image quality for still photos or shooting fewer continuous still photos may resolve the problem.

Time code is off.

Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code. When you want to edit a movie using time code, it is recommended not to shoot still photos during movie shooting.

504

Troubleshooting Guide

Operation Problems

I cannot change the setting with the

<

6

> dial, <

5

> dial, <

9

>, or <

p

>.

Set the < R

> switch to the left (lock release, p.59).

Check the [ 8 3: Multi function lock

] setting (p.442).

A camera button or dial does not work as expected.

Check the [ 8 3: Custom Controls

] setting (p.445).

Display Problems

Y

In the < A > mode, only certain menu tabs and options are displayed.

Set the shooting mode to < d > < s > < f > < a > < F

> (p.64).

Under the [ 9 tab

] (p.463).

] tab, [

COP

Display only My Menu

The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).

Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character

will be an underscore (p.187).

The fourth character in the file name changes.

With [ 5 1: File name ], select the camera’s unique file name or the file

name registered under User setting 1 (p.190).

The file numbering does not start from 0001.

If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may

not start from 0001 (p.193).

505

Troubleshooting Guide

The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.

Check that the correct date and time are set (p.47).

Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.47-48).

The date and time are not in the picture.

The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the

date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.417, 421).

[###] is displayed.

If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can display, [ ###

] will be displayed (p.373).

Y

In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.

In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become COP temperature.

The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.

If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.

[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.

[ Eye-Fi settings ] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the

LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection

status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.475).

506

Troubleshooting Guide

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

[ 3 3: Highlight alert ] is set to [ Enable

] (p.359).

A red box is displayed on the image.

[ 3 3: AF point disp.

] is set to [ Enable

] (p.359).

The image cannot be erased.

If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.368).

The movie cannot be played back.

Y

Camera operation noise can be heard

COP

If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation noise will also be recorded. Using an external microphone

(commercially available) is recommended (p.337).

The movie has still moments.

During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. In such cases, shoot in the < a

> mode (p.320).

507

Troubleshooting Guide

No picture on the TV set.

Set the [ 5 3: Video system ] correctly to [ For NTSC ] or [ For PAL ].

Check that the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.385).

If [ z 5: HDMI output+LCD ] is set to [ Mirroring ], the movie will not appear on the TV set via HDMI output even during playback.

There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.

If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created

automatically (p.335).

My card reader does not recognize the card.

Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, large-capacity

CF cards or SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a

Y then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (EOS

software, p.536).

COP

41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use the EOS software, Digital Photo Professional to process the image

(p.536).

I cannot resize the image.

c JPEG images and 1 / 41 / 61 images cannot be resized

with the camera (p.403).

508

Troubleshooting Guide

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.

If you selected [ Clean now f ], the shutter will make a noise, but no

picture is taken (p.406).

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

If you repeatedly turn the power switch < 1 > / < 2 > at a short interval, the < f

> icon may not be displayed (p.45).

Printing-Related Problems

There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual.

Y

Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. This COP

416).

Computer Connection Problems

Communication between the connected camera and computer does not work.

When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [ z 4: Interval timer ] to

[ Disable

] (p.250).

I cannot transfer images to a computer.

Install the EOS software (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD-ROM) on

the computer (p.536).

Check that EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.

509

Error Codes

Error number If there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.

Cause and countermeasures

Number

01

02

04

Error Message and Solution

Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts.

Î Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon

lens, or remove and install the battery pack again (p.21, 22, 40).

Y with camera.

Î Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the

card (p.41, 67).

COP

Î Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card

(p.41, 67, 392).

05

The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on again.

Î

Operate the power switch (p.45).

06

10, 20

30, 40

50, 60

70, 80

99

Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and on again.

Î

Operate the power switch (p.45).

An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or re-install the battery.

Î Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack

again, or use a Canon lens (p.40, 45).

* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest

Canon Service Center.

510

Specifications

• Type

Type:

Recording media:

Image sensor size:

Compatible lenses:

Lens mount:

Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in flash

CF cards (Type I, UDMA 7 supported)

SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards

* UHS-I cards compatible.

Approx. 22.4 x 15.0 mm

Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)

* Excluding EF-M lenses

(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the focal length indicated on the lens)

Canon EF mount

• Image Sensor

Type:

Effective pixels:

Aspect ratio:

Dust delete feature:

• Recording System

Recording format:

Image type:

Pixels recorded:

CMOS sensor

Approx. 20.20 megapixels

3:2

* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.

Y

Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0

COP

L (Large) : Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)

M (Medium) : Approx. 8.90 megapixels (3648 x 2432)

Record function:

S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)

S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)

S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)

RAW : Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)

M-RAW

S-RAW

: Approx. 11.2 megapixels (4104 x 2736)

: Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)

Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record to multiple

Create/select a folder: Possible

File name: Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2

File numbering: Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset

• Image Processing During Shooting

Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,

Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3

511

Specifications

White balance: Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,

White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance correction, and White balance bracketing provided

Noise reduction:

Automatic image

* Flash color temperature information transmission possible

Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots

Auto Lighting Optimizer provided brightness correction:

Highlight tone priority: Provided

Lens aberration Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration correction:

Anti-flicker: correction, Distortion correction

Possible

• Viewfinder

Type: Eye-level pentaprism

Coverage:

Magnification:

Eye point:

Built-in dioptric

Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with Eye point approx. 22mm)

Approx. 1.00x (-1 m -1 with 50mm lens at infinity)

Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m

-1

(dpt)

Y

-1 ) adjustment:

Focusing screen:

Grid display:

Electronic level:

Eh-A standard screen, interchangeable

Provided

Provided

COP

Function setting display: Shooting mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation,

Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker

Mirror: detection, Warning symbol !, AF status

Quick-return type

Depth-of-field preview: Provided

• Autofocus

Type:

AF points:

Focusing brightness range:

Focus operation:

TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference detection with the dedicated AF sensor

65 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 65 points)

* Number of available AF points, cross-type points, and

Dual cross-type points vary depending on the lens.

* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.

(Excluding some lenses with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture)

EV -3 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,

One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)

One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing (MF)

512

Specifications

AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF

(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual selection: up, down, left, and right), AF point expansion

(manual selection: surround), Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), 65-point automatic selection AF

AF point automatic selection conditions:

Based on EOS iTR AF setting

(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)

* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition

AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6

AI Servo AF characteristics:

Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,

AF point auto switching

AF Custom Functions: 17 functions

AF fine adjustment: AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or

AF-assist beam:

Adjust by lens)

Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash

• Exposure Control

Metering modes:

252-zone TTL metering at max. aperture

EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system

• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points) COP

• Center-weighted average metering

EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100) Brightness metering range:

Exposure control:

ISO speed:

(Recommended exposure index)

ISO speed settings:

Exposure compensation:

Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Program), Shutterpriority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure

Scene Intelligent Auto: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set automatically

P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - ISO 16000 (in 1/3- or whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200)

ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO minimum shutter speed settable

Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be combined with manual exposure compensation)

513

Specifications

AE lock:

Interval timer:

Bulb timer:

Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative metering when focus is achieved

Manual: By AE lock button

Shooting interval and shot count settable

Bulb exposure time settable

• HDR Shooting

Dynamic range adjustment: Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3

Effects:

Auto image align:

Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed

Provided

• Multiple Exposures

Shooting methods:

Number of multiple

Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority

2 to 9 exposures exposures:

Multiple-exposure control: Additive, Average, Bright, Dark

• Shutter

Type:

Shutter speeds:

Y range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/250 sec.

• Drive System

Drive modes:

Continuous shooting speed:

Max. burst: speed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control,

2-sec. self-timer/remote control

High-speed continuous shooting:

Max. approx. 10.0 shots/sec. (settable to 10 to 2 shots/sec.)

* Max. approx. 9.5 shots/sec. with EOS iTR AF.

Low-speed continuous shooting:

Approx. 3.0 shots/sec. (settable to 9 to 1 shots/sec.)

Silent continuous shooting:

Approx. 4.0 shots/sec. (settable to 4 to 1 shots/sec.)

JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 130 shots (approx. 1090 shots)

RAW: Approx. 24 shots (approx. 31 shots)

RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 18 shots (approx. 19 shots)

* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards

(Aspect ratio: 3 x 2, ISO 100 and Standard Picture

Style) and an 8 GB CF card.

* Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7, CF card based on Canon’s testing standards.

514

Specifications

• Flash

Built-in flash:

External Speedlite:

Flash metering:

Flash exposure compensation:

FE lock:

PC terminal:

Flash control:

• Live View Shooting

Focus methods:

Continuous AF:

Focusing brightness range:

Metering modes:

Dual Pixel CMOS AF system/Contrast-detection AF Y view possible for focus check)

Provided

EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100) COP

10% of Live View screen), Spot metering (approx. 2.6% of

Live View screen), Center-weighted average metering

Brightness metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Aspect ratio:

Silent shooting:

Grid display:

3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1

Provided (Mode 1 and 2)

3 types

• Movie Shooting

Recording format:

Movie:

Audio:

Recording size and frame rate:

Retractable, auto pop-up flash

Guide number: Approx. 11/36.1 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)

Flash coverage: Approx. 15mm lens angle of view

Recycling time: Approx. 3 sec.

Compatible with EX-series Speedlites

E-TTL II autoflash

±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments

Provided

Provided

Built-in flash function settings, External Speedlite function settings, External Speedlite Custom Function settings

Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible

MOV/MP4

MPEG-4 AVC / H.264

Variable (average) bit rate

MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC

Full HD (1920x1080) : 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/

HD (1280x720)

SD (640x480)

24.00p/23.98p

: 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p

: 29.97p/25.00p

515

Specifications

Compression method: ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)

File size:

* IPB (Light) is for MP4 only.

[MOV]

• Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 440 MB/min.

• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I

: Approx. 654 MB/min.

• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)

• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I

: Approx. 225 MB/min.

: Approx. 583 MB/min.

• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 196 MB/min.

• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 75 MB/min.

[MP4]

• Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)

Y : Approx. 431 MB/min.

• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I

: Approx. 645 MB/min.

• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 216 MB/min.

• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light) COP

: Approx. 87 MB/min.

: Approx. 574 MB/min.

• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 187 MB/min.

Card requirements:

(Writing/reading speed)

• HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)

: Approx. 30 MB/min.

• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard)

: Approx. 66 MB/min.

• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)

: Approx. 23 MB/min.

[CF card]

ALL-I: 30 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Standard), Full HD 59.94p/50.00p: 30 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Standard), other than above: 10 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Light): 10 MB/sec. or faster (MP4 only)

516

Specifications

Focus methods:

Metering modes:

2-screen display:

HDMI output:

[SD card]

ALL-I: 20 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Standard), Full HD 59.94p/50.00p: 20 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Standard), other than above: 6 MB/sec. or faster

IPB (Light): 4 MB/sec. or faster (MP4 only)

Same as focusing with Live View shooting

Movie Servo AF customizable

Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with the image sensor

* Automatically set by the focus method.

Brightness metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)

Exposure control: Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting),

Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure

Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments

ISO speed:

(Recommended exposure index)

Time code:

Drop frames:

Sound recording:

Scene Intelligent Auto, Tv: Automatically set within ISO

100 - ISO 16000

Y expandable to H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600)

M: Auto ISO (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO

16000), ISO 100 - ISO 16000 set manually (in 1/3- or COP

Supported

Compatible with 59.94p/29.97p

Headphones:

Grid display:

Still photo shooting:

Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo microphone terminal provided

Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided, attenuator provided

Headphone socket provided and volume adjustment possible

3 types

Possible

* Except when set to Full HD 59.94p/50.00p

LCD monitor and HDMI output movie displayable simultaneously

Movie without information display can also be output.

* Auto/59.94i/50.00i/59.94p/50.00p/23.98p selectable

517

Specifications

• LCD Monitor

Type: TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor

Monitor size and dots: Wide 7.7 cm (3.0-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots

Brightness adjustment: Auto (Dark, Standard, Bright), Manual (7 levels)

Electronic level:

Interface languages:

Help display:

Provided

25

Possible

• Playback

Image display formats: Single-image display (without shooting information),

Single-image display (with simple information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture

Style, Color space/noise reduction, Lens aberration correction, GPS), Index display (4/9/36/100 images),

Highlight alert:

AF point display:

Grid display:

Magnified view:

Image browsing methods:

Image rotation:

Rating:

Movie playback:

Two-image display

Overexposed highlights blink

Provided

3 types

Y

Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position settable

Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting COP

Provided

Provided

Slide show:

Image protection:

Copying images:

Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI)

Built-in speaker

All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected images, By rating

Possible

Possible

• Post-Processing of Images

In-camera RAW image processing:

Resize:

Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto

Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,

JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic aberration correction

Provided

518

Specifications

• Direct Printing

Compatible printers:

Printable images:

Print ordering:

• Image Transfer

Transferrable files:

PictBridge-compatible printers

JPEG and RAW images

DPOF Version 1.1 compliant

Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies

• GPS Function

Compatible satellites: GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia),

Geotag information appended to image:

Geotag updating interval:

Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) “MICHIBIKI” (Japan)

Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Direction, Coordinated

Universal Time (UTC), satellite signal condition

1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5 min.

Time setting:

Digital compass:

Log data:

Log data deletion:

• Custom Functions

Custom Functions:

My Menu:

Custom shooting modes:

GPS time data set to camera

Three-axis geomagnetic sensor and three-axis accelerometer sensor used for orientation sensing

Y

* Changing the time zone creates another file.

18

* The log data saved in internal memory as a log file can be transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer.

COP

Up to 5 screens can be registered

Register under Mode Dial’s C1, C2, or C3

Copyright information: Text entry and inclusion enabled

• Interface

DIGITAL terminal: SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)

Computer communication, direct printing, Wireless File

Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2) connection

HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible

External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack terminal:

Headphone terminal: 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack

Remote control terminal: For N3-type remote control units

Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6

Eye-Fi card: Supported

519

Specifications

• Power

Battery:

Battery information:

Number of possible shots (Based on CIPA testing standards):

Movie shooting time:

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1

* AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6.

* With Battery Grip BG-E16 attached, size-AA/LR6 batteries can be used.

Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge performance, and Battery registration possible

With viewfinder shooting:

Approx. 670 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 640 shots at

0°C/32°F

With Live View shooting:

Approx. 250 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 240 shots at

0°C/32°F

Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°C/73°F

Approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 0°C/32°F

* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.

• Dimensions and Weight

Weight:

Working temperature range:

Approx. 910 g / 32.10 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines)

• Operation Environment

Approx. 820 g / 28.92 oz. (Body only)

COP

85% or less

Y

Working humidity:

• Battery Pack LP-E6N

Type:

Rated voltage:

Battery capacity:

Working temperature range:

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

7.2 V DC

1865 mAh

0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 38.4 x 21.0 x 56.8 mm / 1.5 x 0.8 x 2.2 in.

Weight: Approx. 80 g / 2.82 oz. (excluding protective cover)

520

Specifications

• Battery Charger LC-E6

Compatible battery:

Recharging time:

Rated input:

Rated output:

Working temperature

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

8.4 V DC / 1.2 A

5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F range:

Working humidity: 85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.

Weight: Approx. 130 g / 4.6 oz.

• Battery Charger LC-E6E

Compatible battery:

Power cord length:

Recharging time:

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6

Approx. 1 m / 3.3 ft.

Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)

Rated output:

Working temperature range:

Working humidity:

8.4 V DC/1.2 A

5°C - 40°C / 41°F - 104°F

Y

85% or less

Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 69.0 x 33.0 x 93.0 mm / 2.7 x 1.3 x 3.7 in.

Weight: 125 g / 4.4 oz. (excluding power cord) COP

Focal length / Speed:

Lens construction:

18 mm-135 mm / f/3.5-5.6

16 elements in 12 groups

Minimum aperture:

Angle of view: f/22 - 36

* f/22-38 when 1/2 stop increments set for aperture

Diagonal extent: 74°20´ - 11°30´

Vertical extent: 45°30´ - 6°20´

Horizontal extent: 64°30´ - 9°30´

0.39 m / 1.28 ft.

Closest focusing distance:

Max. magnification:

Field of view:

0.28x (at 135 mm focal length)

Approx. 248 x 372 - 53 x 80 mm / 9.8 x 14.6 - 2.1 x 3.1 in.

(at 0.39 m / 1.28 ft.)

Filter size: 67 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 76.6 x 96.0 mm / 3.0 x 3.8 in.

Weight:

Hood:

Lens cap:

Case:

Approx. 480 g / 16.9 oz.

EW-73B (sold separately)

E-67 II

LP1116 (sold separately)

521

Specifications

• EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM

Focal length / Speed:

Lens construction:

Minimum aperture:

15 mm-85 mm / f/3.5-5.6

17 elements in 12 groups f/22 - 36

* f/22-38 when 1/2 stop increments set for aperture

Diagonal extent: 84°30´ - 18°25´ Angle of view:

Vertical extent: 53°30´ - 10°25´

Horizontal extent: 74°10´ - 15°25´

0.35 m / 1.15 ft.

Closest focusing distance:

Max. magnification:

Field of view:

0.21x (at 85 mm focal length)

Approx. 255 x 395 - 75 x 108 / 10.0 x 15.6 - 3.0 x 4.3 in. (at

Filter size:

0.35 m / 1.15 ft.)

72 mm

Max. diameter x length: Approx. 81.6 x 87.5 mm / 3.2 x 3.4 in.

Weight: Approx. 575 g / 20.3 oz.

Hood:

Lens cap:

Case:

EW-78E (sold separately)

E-72 II

LP1116 (sold separately)

Y

All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &

Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.

COP

Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.

If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the respective lens manufacturer.

522

Handling Precautions:

EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM

The EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM kit lens uses a stepping motor that drives the focus lens (for achieving focus). The motor controls the focus lens even during zooming.

1. When the camera is OFF

The motor does not operate while the camera is OFF or when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function. Therefore, users must be aware of the following points.

Manual focusing is not possible.

During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.

2. When the lens is in sleep mode

If not operated for a certain period of time, this lens will enter sleep mode in order to save power, apart from the camera’s auto power off. To exit sleep mode, press the shutter button halfway.

Y

Manual focusing is not possible.

During zooming, inaccurate focusing may occur.

3. During initial reset

COP

When the camera is turned ON or when the camera is turned ON by pressing the shutter button halfway when the camera is OFF due to the auto power off function* 1 , the lens performs an initial reset of the focus lens.

Although the image in the viewfinder will appear out of focus during the initial reset, this is not a malfunction.

Wait approx. 1 second* 2 until the initial reset has completed before shooting.

*1: Applicable to the following EF-S lens compatible digital SLR cameras:

EOS 7D Mark II, EOS 7D, EOS 70D, EOS 60D, EOS 60Da, EOS 50D,

EOS 40D, EOS 30D, EOS 20D, EOS 20Da, EOS REBEL T3i/600D, EOS

REBEL T2i/550D, EOS REBEL T1i/500D, EOS REBEL XSi/450D, EOS

REBEL T3/1100D, EOS REBEL XS/1000D, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XTi/

400D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL REBEL XT/350D DIGITAL, EOS DIGITAL

REBEL/300D DIGITAL

*2: The initial reset time varies depending on the camera used.

523

Trademarks

Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.

SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

Google

™

, Google Maps

™

, and Google Earth

™

are trademarks of Google Inc.

Map Utility uses Google Maps

™

to display images and routes traveled on a map.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

Y

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a

COP

No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”

* Notice displayed in English as required.

524

Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended

This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories

(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine

Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis.

Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.

COP

Y

525

Safety Warnings

Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury, death, and material damage.

Preventing Serious Injury or Death

• To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, and explosions, follow the safeguards below:

- Do not use any batteries, power sources, and accessories not specified in this booklet. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.

- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose the battery pack or back-up battery to fire or water. And do not subject the battery pack or back-up battery to strong physical shock.

- Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polarity (+ –). Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries.

- Do not recharge the battery pack outside the allowable ambient temperature range of 0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F). Also, do not exceed the recharging time.

- Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera, accessories, connecting cables, etc.

infants. If a child or infant swallows a battery or accessory, consult a physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.)

• When disposing of a battery pack or back-up battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent fire or an explosion.

COP immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop the recharging and prevent a fire.

• If the battery pack or back-up battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process.

• Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a physician immediately.

• During the recharging, keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord can accidentally choke the child or give an electrical shock.

• Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.

• Do not fire the flash at someone driving a car. It may cause an accident.

• Do not fire the flash near a person’s eyes. It may impair the person’s vision. When using flash to photograph an infant, keep at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away.

526

• Before storing the camera or accessory when not in use, remove the battery pack and disconnect the power plug. This is to prevent electrical shock, heat generation, and fire.

• Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or fire.

• If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock.

• Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens.

Doing so may damage your vision.

• Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when using it.

Straps or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.

• Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed. instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.

Y

• To prevent fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:

- Always insert the power plug all the way in.

- Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.

COP

Also do not twist or tie the cords.

- Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.

- Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged.

• Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean off the dust around the power outlet. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet to cause a fire.

527

Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage

• Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source. The equipment may become hot and cause skin burns.

• Do not carry the camera around while it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.

• Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sun without the lens cap attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.

• Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire.

• If you drop the camera in water or if water or metal fragments enter inside the camera, promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and electrical shock.

• Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a hot environment. Doing so may cause battery leakage or a shorter battery life. The battery pack or back-up battery can also become hot and cause skin burns.

• Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the equipment.

Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.

your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center.

COP

528

Digital Camera Model DS126461 Systems

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

Y

— Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used

15 of the FCC rules.

COP

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666)

CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)

When connecting to and using a household power outlet, use only AC

Adapter Kit ACK-E6 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz, rated output:

8.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire, overheating, or electrical shock.

529

530

USA and Canada only:

The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery.

For CA, USA only

Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

COP

Y

16

Viewing the CD-ROM Instruction Manuals /

Downloading Images to Your Computer

Y download images from the camera to your computer, gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL COP software on your computer. It also explains how to view the PDF files on the Software Instruction Manual CD-

ROM.

Camera

Instruction Manual

EOS DIGITAL

Solution Disk

(Software)

Software

Instruction Manual

531

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

The Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM contains the following electronic manuals (PDF):

Camera Instruction Manual

Explains all the camera functions and procedures, including basic content.

Quick Reference Guide

Simple and portable guide covering basic function settings, shooting instructions, and playback instructions.

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

must be installed in your computer. Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet. After installing Adobe Reader, follow the procedure below.

1

COP

MANUAL” CD-ROM into your computer.

2

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

With Windows, double-click on the CD-ROM icon in

[ (My) Computer ]. With Macintosh, double-click on the CD-ROM icon on the desktop.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your computer’s operating system.

532

Viewing the Camera Instruction Manual CD-ROM

3

Double-click the START file.

X

The screen shown in step 4 will appear.

The icon displayed will differ depending on your computer’s operating system.

4

Click your language.

5

read.

COP

X

The instruction manual will be displayed.

You can save the PDF file to your computer.

The Camera instruction manuals (PDF files) have page links to make it quick to open the page referred to. Click on a page number in the

Contents or Index to jump to that page.

To learn how to use Adobe Reader, refer to Adobe Reader’s Help section.

533

Downloading Images to a Computer

You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to your computer. There are two ways to do this.

Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

1

Install the software

(p.538)

.

Use the provided interface cable

2

to connect the camera to your computer.

Use the interface cable provided with the camera.

Y

When connecting the cable to the camera, use the cable protector

(p.34). Connect the cable to the

COP

< camera.

> icon facing the back of the

Connect the cord’s plug to the computer’s USB terminal.

3

Use EOS Utility to transfer the images.

For details, refer to the Software

Instruction Manual on the CD-ROM

(p.539).

534

Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When

connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).

Downloading Images to a Computer

Downloading Images with a Card Reader

You can use a card reader to download images to your computer.

1

Install the software

(p.538)

.

2

Insert the card into the card reader.

3

the images.

X Use Digital Photo Professional.

COP

Instruction Manual (p.539).

When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to your computer.

535

Software Overview

EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk

This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras.

EOS Utility

With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

You can also use this software to set various camera settings and shoot remotely from the computer connected to the camera.

Digital Photo Professional

images. You can quickly view, edit, process and print RAW images. You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images.

COP

Picture Style Editor

You can edit Picture Styles, and create and save original Picture Style files. This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images.

536

Software Overview

An Internet connection is necessary to install the software below.

Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your Internet-connected computer. Click [ Easy installation ] ([ Install ] on a Macintosh), and the software will be installed automatically.

ImageBrowser EX

Connect to the Internet to download and install the software*.

This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images. You can easily view still photos and play back MOV and MP4 movies, and also edit and print JPEG images.

* EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing

ImageBrowser EX.

Map Utility

Y

Connect to the Internet to download and install the software.

Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by COP

The ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser programs that came with previous cameras does not support the EOS 7D Mark II’s still photos, MOV, and MP4 files. Use ImageBrowser EX.

537

Installing the Software

Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the software. The software will not be installed correctly.

Follow the procedure below to install ImageBrowser EX, Map Utility, and other software on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk. Software installation requires an Internet connection. You cannot download and install the software without an Internet connection.

Even if a previous version of ImageBrowser EX and Map Utility are installed in your computer, follow the procedure below to install/update

ImageBrowser EX and Map Utility. They are optimized for this camera.

You can also use the auto update feature to add the latest functions.

If previous versions of software other than ImageBrowser EX and Map

Utility are installed in your computer, follow the procedure below to update (overwrite) the software.

1

Insert EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM).

Y on the desktop, then double-click on [ Canon EOS Digital

2

Installer ].

Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to install.

COP

For Macintosh, click [ Install ].

If the install screen for “Microsoft Silverlight” is displayed during installation, install “Microsoft Silverlight”.

3

Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the computer restarts.

When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete.

538

Software Instruction Manual

Contains the Software Instruction Manuals.

Copying and Viewing the Software Instruction Manual PDFs

1

Insert the [Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL] CD-ROM into your computer.

2

Double-click the CD-ROM icon.

For Windows, the icon is displayed in [ (My) Computer ].

3

For Macintosh, the icon is displayed on the desktop.

Y

Macintosh

EOS Utility

Digital Photo Professional

COP Windows

EUx.xW_E_xx

DPPx.xW_E_xx

PSEx.xW_E_xx

Picture Style Editor

EUx.xM_E_xx

DPPx.xM_E_xx

PSEx.xM_E_xx

Map Utility MUx.x_E_xx

Instruction manual for ImageBrowser EX (ImageBrowser EX

User Guide) is included in the software.

4

Double-click the copied PDF file.

Adobe Reader (most recent version recommended) must be installed on your computer.

Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet.

539

Index

Numerics

10- or 2-sec. self-timer.................. 143

Subjects difficult to

focus ................................ 139, 306

AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) ............... 88

1280x720 (movie) .........................331

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ............... 88

1920x1080 (movie) ....................... 331

Acceleration/deceleration

24.00p...........................................333

640x480 (movie) ...........................331

65-point automatic selection AF ...91, 97

tracking .................................... 114

AF Operation indicator....... 89, 131

AF point auto switching............ 115

AF points light up in red ..... 89, 131

A

AF sensor .................................. 99

A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............ 80

Tracking sensitivity................... 113

AC Adapter Kit ..............................474

ALL-I (For editing/I-only) .............. 332

Acceleration/deceleration

Ambient light sensor............... 24, 394

tracking ......................................... 114

Anti-flicker shooting...................... 185

Access lamp .............................43, 44

Aperture-priority AE.............. 220, 316

Accessories ...................................... 3

Area AF frame.......................... 91, 97

Adobe RGB...................................187

AE lock.......................................... 229

AEB

(Auto Exposure Bracketing).. 227, 434

Aspect ratio .................................. 295

Y

Auto Lighting Optimizer.......... 79, 175

AF ................................................... 85

AF area selection lever...............58

COP

AF Configuration Tool............... 108

AF group...................................100

Auto playback............................... 382

Auto power off .......................... 45, 69

Auto reset..................................... 194

Auto rotation................................. 395

Auto switch card........................... 147

AF method........................ 299, 343

AF Microadjustment .................133

AF-ON (AF start)

Auto time setting .......................... 209

Autofocus 9 AF

Automatic selection (AF) .......... 91, 97

button ......................... 55, 446, 448

AF operation............................... 86

AF point .................... 90, 93, 95, 99

Av (Aperture-priority AE) ...... 220, 316

A/V OUT (Audio/video output)...... 376

B

AF point expansion...............90, 95

AF point registration .................450

AF point selection...............93, 453

Beeper........................................69

B (Bulb) ................................ 230, 314

Battery........................ 38, 40, 46, 470

Battery Grip ............................ 46, 478

Color information ......................128

Customization...........................117

f/8 AF.................................. 99, 103

Beeper............................................ 69

Black-and-white images ....... 162, 165

Bracketing ............................ 173, 227

Facial information ..................... 128

Manual focusing (MF)....... 140, 308

Out of focus ..................53, 54, 498

Recomposing .............................83

Bulb exposures ............................ 230

Bulb timer................................. 231

BUSY ........................................... 153

540

Index

Custom WB .................................. 169

C

w (Custom shooting)...................464

Cable.........3, 385, 412, 425, 478, 534

D+................................................. 180

Protector .....................................34

Date/time ........................................ 47

Camera

Daylight saving time ....................... 48

Depth-of-field preview .................. 221

Camera shake ..............53, 54, 246

Clearing the camera settings......70

Detailed information ..................... 357

Dials

Holding the camera ....................54

Settings display ........................468

Cards ..............................5, 21, 41, 67

Main Dial .................................... 56

Quick Control Dial ...................... 57

Digital compass ............................ 206

Card reminder.............................42

Formatting ..................................67

Low-level formatting ...................68

Calibration................................ 207

Digital terminal.. 23, 34, 412, 425, 534

Troubleshooting ....................44, 68

Write protection ..........................41

Case..............................................108

Dimmed menu items ...................... 66

Dioptric adjustment......................... 54

Center-weighted average metering ........................................225

CF card 9 Cards

Charger .....................................32, 38

Direct printing ............................... 412

Y

Distortion correction ..................... 182

Chromatic aberration correction....182

Cleaning (image sensor)...............405

COP

CLn ...............................................409

Color space...................................187

Downloading images

(to a computer) ............................. 534

DPOF

(Digital Print Order Format) .......... 421

Drive mode ................................... 141

Dual cross-type focusing ................ 99

Color temperature .................168, 171

Dust Delete Data .......................... 407

Color tone .....................................164

Continuous AF ..............................294

D

E

Continuous file numbering ............193

Continuous shooting .....................141

Electronic level ............................... 75

Erasing images............................. 392

Contrast ................................164, 175

Coordinated Universal Time .........198

Err........................................... 25, 510

Error codes................................... 510

Copyright information....................195

Creative photo...............160, 233, 238

M (Creative Zone) icon....................8

Cropping (for printing) ...................419

Evaluative metering...................... 224

exFAT ............................................. 68

Exposure compensation............... 226

Exposure compensation with

Cropping information.....................443

Cross-type focusing ........................99

Auto ISO....................................... 223

Exposure level increments ........... 434

Custom Controls .....................62, 445

Custom shooting mode .................464

Exposure level

indicator.................... 26, 27, 288, 323

541

Index

Exposure simulation ..................... 296

External Speedlite 9 Flash

Eyecup.......................................... 247

Eye-Fi cards.................................. 475

Eyepiece cover ....................... 33, 247

F

FE lock.................................. 258, 259

Feature guide.................................. 78

FEB............................................... 269

File extension................................192

File name ......................................190

File size......................... 151, 334, 357

Filter effects .................................. 165

Final image simulation .......... 291, 326

Focusing 9 AF, Manual Focusing

(MF)

Focusing screen................... 440, 478

Folder creation/selection .............. 188

For editing (ALL-I) ........................ 332

Formatting (card initialization) ........ 67

Frame rate............................ 331, 350

Free run........................................ 339

Full Auto mode ............................... 80

Full High-Definition

(Full HD)............................... 313, 331

Function availability by shooting mode.............................. 480

G

Fine (image-recording

GPS.............................................. 197

quality) .................................. 149, 151

Firmware version .......................... 491

First-curtain synchronization.........269

Flash (Speedlite)...........................253

H

Grid ........................ 74, 295, 344, 355

Y

HD ................................................ 331

HDMI .............. 34, 341, 348, 350, 385

Built-in flash..............................254

Custom Functions .................... 271

COP

External flash............................ 259

FE lock ............................. 258, 259

HDMI CEC ................................... 386

HDR ............................................. 233

Headphones ................................. 337

Help................................................ 78

High ISO speed noise reduction .. 176

Flash control............................. 262

High-Definition (HD) movies......... 331

Flash exposure

compensation ...........257, 259, 269

Highlight alert ............................... 359

Flash mode............................... 267

Flash sync contacts .................... 22

Flash sync speed ............. 260, 263

Flash sync. speed in Av

Highlight detail loss ...................... 359

Highlight tone priority ................... 180

High-speed continuous shooting.. 141

Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 360

mode ........................................ 263

Manual flash ..................... 267, 283

Red-eye reduction .................... 256

Hot shoe................................. 22, 259

Household power ......................... 474

I

Shutter synchronization

(1st/2nd curtain) ....................... 269

Wireless............................ 268, 272

Focus indicator ............................... 80

Focus lock....................................... 83

ICC profile .................................... 187

Icon .................................................. 8

Illumination (AF point) .................. 131

Illumination (LCD panel)................. 60

Image conversion factor................. 50

Focus mode switch ......... 50, 140, 308

542

Index

Image dust prevention ..................405

J

Image-recording quality ........149, 330

JPEG .................................... 149, 151

Image review time...........................70

Jump display ................................ 362

Image Stabilizer (lens) ....................53

L

Images

Language ....................................... 49

AF point display ........................359

Auto playback ...........................382

Auto rotation .............................395

Copying ....................................388

Downloading images

Large (image-recording quality) ... 151

Large Zone AF ......................... 91, 97

LCD monitor ................................... 21

(to a computer) .........................534

Erase ........................................392

Highlight alert............................359

Brightness adjustment ............. 394

Electronic level........................... 75

Image playback........................ 353

Histogram .................................360

Index.........................................361

Menu display...................... 64, 484

Shooting function settings.. 60, 469

LCD panel ...................................... 25

Jump display

(image browsing) ......................362

Magnification ............................364

Manual rotation.........................367

Numbering ................................193

Chromatic aberration Y

Image Stabilizer ......................... 53

Playback ...................................353

Protection .................................368

COP

Size...........................151, 334, 357

Slide show ................................382

Instruction manual........... CD-ROM

Lock release............................... 51

Peripheral illumination correction ................................. 181

Lens group ................................... 100

Lens hood....................................... 52

Transfer ....................................425

Light (IPB) .................................... 332

Two-image display....................366

Lens.......................................... 30, 50

Live View shooting ................. 84, 285

Viewing on a TV set..........376, 385

Aspect ratio .............................. 295

Index display .................................361

Exposure simulation................. 296

INFO. button ...60, 288, 323, 354, 468

Face+Tracking ......................... 300

Initial AF Point...............................127

FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 302

Interval timer .................................250

FlexiZone - Single .................... 304

IPB (Light/Standard)......................332

Grid display .............................. 295

ISO speed .....................154, 317, 321

Information display................... 288

Automatic setting (Auto) ...........156

Automatic setting range............158

ISO expansion ..........................157

Manual setting range ................157

Manual focusing (MF) .............. 308

Metering timer .......................... 298

Possible shots.......................... 287

Minimum shutter speed ............159

Setting increments....................434

iTR AF...........................................128

Quick Control ........................... 293

Silent shooting ......................... 297

LOCK.............................................. 59

LOG.............................................. 210

543

Index

Logging ......................................... 210

Log data ...................................211

Autoexposure shooting ............ 314

Compression method............... 332

Drop frame............................... 341

Long exposure noise reduction..... 178

M

Long exposures ............................ 230

Low-speed continuous shooting ... 141

Editing out first and last scenes ..................................... 380

Enjoying movies....................... 376

File size............................ 334, 335

M (Manual exposure)............222, 320

Free run ................................... 339

Magnification.................305, 308, 364

Grid .......................................... 344

Start position............................. 365

HDMI output............................. 348

Main Dial.........................................56

Malfunction ...................................495

Manual exposure .................. 222, 320

Manual focusing (MF) ........... 140, 308

Manual reset .................................194

Manual selection (AF).........90, 93, 95

Maximum burst ..................... 151, 153

Medium

(image-recording quality) ......151, 403

Memory cards 9 Cards

Movie recording size................ 331

Movie Servo AF speed ............ 345

Y

Movie shooting button.............. 348

Menu............................................... 64

My Menu...................................459

COP

3 icon ......................................... 8

Playback .......................... 376, 378

Quick Control ........................... 329

Rec run .................................... 339

Record command .................... 341

Recording time......................... 334

Recording/playback count ....... 340

Metering mode..............................224

Shutter-priority AE ................... 315

Metering timer................. 55, 298, 347

Microphone ...................... 314, 337

Silent control ............................ 338

M-Fn ............................... 92, 125, 258

Metering timer.......................... 347

Silent shooting ......................... 347

Microadjustment ...........................133

Manual exposure shooting....... 320

Sound recording ...................... 336

Microphone ...........................314, 337

Information display................... 323

Stills ......................................... 327

Mirror lockup .................................246

Headphones ............................ 337

Time code ................................ 339

Mode Dial..................................29, 56

Frame rate ............................... 331

Monochrome images ............ 162, 165

Viewing on a TV set ......... 376, 385

Wind filter................................. 336

MP4.............................................. 330 MOV..............................................330

M-RAW

Movies .......................................... 313

(Medium RAW)............. 149, 151, 152

AE lock ..................................... 318

AF method................................ 343

AF mode...................................329

Multi function lock................... 59, 442

Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 176

AI SERVO (AI Servo AF).......... 342

Aperture-priority AE.................. 316

Attenuator.................................336

Multi-controller................................ 58

Multiple exposures ....................... 238

My Menu ...................................... 459

544

Index

N

Noise reduction

Paper settings .......................... 415

Photobook set-up..................... 429

Print order (DPOF)................... 421

High ISO speed ........................176

Long exposures ........................178

Nomenclature..................................22

Printing effects ......................... 416

Tilt correction............................ 419

Program AE.......................... 216, 314

Non-Canon flash units ..................260

Normal

Program shift............................ 217

Protecting images......................... 368

(image-recording quality) ......149, 151

Q

NTSC ............................331, 385, 491

Q

(Quick Control) . 61, 293, 329, 374

O

Quick Control Dial .......................... 57

ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............87

R

One-Shot AF ...................................87

Rating mark .................................. 371

One-touch image

RAW ............................. 149, 151, 152

quality setting ........................153, 456

RAW image processing ................ 398

P

P (Program AE).....................216, 314

PAL ...............................331, 385, 491

Partial metering.............................224

PC terminal ...................................260

Peripheral illumination correction..181

COP

PictBridge......................................411

Record function ............................ 146

Record separately ........................ 147

Record to multiple ........................ 147

Recording level............................. 336

Red-eye reduction ........................ 256

Reduced display........................... 361

Picture Style ..................160, 163, 166

RAW+JPEG.......................... 149, 151

Y

Release shutter without card.......... 42

Pixels ....................................149, 151

Remote control shooting .............. 248

Playback .......................................353

Remote switch.............................. 248

Possible shots.................46, 151, 287

Resizing........................................ 403

Power..............................................45

Rotation (image)........... 367, 395, 419

Auto power off ......................45, 69

S

Battery check......................46, 470

Battery information ...................470

Household power......................474

Safety shift.................................... 436

Safety warnings............................ 526

Possible shots ............46, 151, 287

Recharge performance.............470

Recharging .................................38

Pressing completely........................55

Saturation ..................................... 164

Scene icons.......................... 290, 319

Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 80

SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards

Pressing halfway.............................55

Second-curtain synchronization ... 269

Printing..........................................411

Self-timer .............................. 143, 249

Cropping ...................................419

Page layout...............................415

Sensor cleaning............................ 405

545

Index

Sepia (Monochrome) .................... 165

Sharpness.....................................164

Shooting function settings....... 60, 469

Shooting information display.........356

Tone priority.................................. 180

Toning effect (Monochrome) ........ 165

Touch pad............................... 59, 338

Tracking sensitivity ....................... 108

Shooting modes........................29, 60

Av (Aperture-priority AE) .......... 220

B (Bulb) .................................... 230

w (Custom shooting) ..............464

M (Manual exposure) ............... 222

P (Program AE) ........................216

Tv (Shutter-priority AE)............. 218

A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ....... 80

Shooting orientation registration ... 125

Tripod socket.................................. 24

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ........ 218, 315

Two-image display ....................... 366

U

Ultra DMA (UDMA)......................... 42

Underscore "_" ..................... 187, 192

USB (DIGITAL)

terminal ........................ 412, 425, 534

Shutter button ................................. 55

UTC.............................................. 198

Shutter synchronization ................ 269

V

Shutter-priority AE ................218, 315

Silent shooting

Silent continuous shooting ....... 141

Silent LV shooting............. 297, 347

Silent single shooting ............... 141

Video system................................ 330

Viewfinder ...................................... 27

Y

Single shooting ............................. 141

Single-image display..................... 354

COP

Slide show .................................... 382

Grid ............................................ 74

Information display..................... 77

Viewing on a TV set ............. 376, 385

Volume (movie playback) ............. 379

W

Warning icon ................................ 441

Small

White balance (WB) ..................... 168

(image-recording quality) ......151, 403

Bracketing................................ 173

Software........................................ 536

Speaker................................... 24, 378

Color temperature setting ........ 171

Correction ................................ 172

Custom .................................... 169

Spot AF .....................................90, 95

Spot metering................................ 225

Personal................................... 170

Wind filter ..................................... 336

S-RAW (Small RAW) .... 149, 151, 152

sRGB ............................................ 187

Wireless flash shooting ................ 272

Standard (IPB) ..............................332

Z

Strap ............................................... 33

Zone AF ................................... 91, 96

System map.................................. 478

T

Temperature warning ............ 310, 351

Time code ..................................... 339

Time zone ....................................... 47

546

MEMO

COP

Y

547

COP

Y

The lenses and accessories mentioned in this Instruction Manual are current as of August 2014. For information on the camera’s compatibility with any lenses and accessories introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center.

CPX-E105-000 © CANON INC. 2014

This quick reference guide explains the basic function settings and how to shoot and play back images.

You can take this guide with you when shooting. For detailed instructions, refer to the EOS 7D Mark II (G)

Instruction Manual.

CPQ-E105-000 © CANON INC. 2014

E

English

Preparation

Menu Operations

< 6 > Main Dial

< M > button

<

Q

> button

< 5 > Quick

Control Dial LCD monitor

<

0

> button

1. Press the < M > button to display the menu.

2. Each time you press the <

3. Turn the < 6

Q Y the < 5 > dial to select the desired item.

4. Press < 0 > to display the setting.

5. Turn the < 5 > dial to set the item, then press <

0

>.

A

Mode

COP d

/

s

/

f

/

a

/

F

Modes

Secondary tabs

Menu items Menu settings

Main

Tabs

Quick Start Guide

1

5

Insert the battery.

2

Insert the card.

The camera-front side slot is for a CF card, and the camera-back side slot is for an SD card.

3

* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.

White index

Y

Red index

Attach the lens.

COP camera’s mount index of the same color.

4

Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <

f

>.

Set the power switch to <

1

>.

Image-recording Quality

o Select [ z 1: Image quality quality, then press <

0

>.

], then press < 0 >.

o Turn the < 6 > or < 5 > dial to select the image-recording

Image-recording quality

Pixels

Possible shots

RAW: Turn the < 6 > dial to select the quality.

JPEG: Turn the < 5 > dial to

A

Picture Style

N select the quality.

Y o Press the < b > button.

COP A ], then press <

0

>.

Turn the < 5 > dial to select the

Picture Style, then press <

0

>.

Style

D Auto

Description

Color tones optimized for each scene.

P Standard

Q Portrait

Vivid colors and sharp images.

Nice skin tones and slightly soft images.

R Landscape Vivid blue skies and greenery, and very sharp images.

V Monochrome Black-and-white images.

o For < S > (Neutral) and < U > (Faithful), refer to the camera’s instruction manual.

6

While holding down the center of the Mode Dial, set it to <

A

> (Scene

Intelligent Auto).

Image Playback

Index

6

Magnify

6

7

Focus on the subject.

Aim the viewfinder center over the subject and press the shutter button halfway to autofocus.

8

9

Press the shutter button

COP

Review the picture.

The image just captured will be displayed for 2 sec. on the

LCD monitor.

0 x

Playback

L

Erase u

COP

Y

9

56

Select image

B Shooting information o A M icon to the right of a function title indicates a function that can be used only in these modes: < d >

< s > < f > < a > < F >.

o

Number of Possible Shots (Viewfinder Shooting)

Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use

At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 800 shots Approx. 670 shots

9

Q

Quick Control

o Press the < Q > button.

X The Quick Control screen will appear.

Highlight tone priority

AE lock

ISO speed

Aperture

Flash exposure

Shutter speed compensation

Shooting mode

Custom

Exposure

Controls compensation/

AEB setting

Picture Style

AF operation

White balance

Metering mode

White balance correction /

COP

Drive mode White balance bracketing

Y

Imagerecording quality

Recording function/Card selection

Auto Lighting Optimizer o Tilt the < 9 > to select the function, then turn the <

< 5 > dial to set it.

6 > or o In the <

A

> mode, you can only select or set the recording function, card, image-recording quality, drive mode, and flash firing.

Electronic Level

o Press the <

B

> button to display the electronic level.

Custom Functions

N

8 1: Exposure 8 3: Display/Operation

Exposure level increments Focusing screen

ISO speed setting increments Warnings z in viewfinder

Bracketing auto cancel

Bracketing sequence

Number of bracketed shots

Safety shift

LV shooting area display

Dial direction during Tv/Av

COP

Same exposure for new aperture

Custom Controls

8 4: Others

8 2: Exposure/Drive

Set shutter speed range

Set aperture range

Continuous shooting speed

Add cropping information

Default Erase option

8 5: Clear

Clear all Custom Function

(C.Fn)

Shooting Operation

Nomenclature

< m >

Flash exposure compensation/

ISO speed setting button

<

B

>

AF area selection/

Multi-function button

Shutter button

< o > Drive mode selection/

AF operation/AF method selection button

< n

> White balance selection/

Metering mode selection button

Mode Dial lockrelease button

Mode Dial

<

6

>

Main Dial

<

A

/ k

>

Live View shooting/

Movie shooting switch

<

0

> Start/

Stop button

Power switch

< 5 > Quick

Control Dial

<

0

>

Setting button

Y

COP

Focus mode switch

< D >

Flash button

< p

> AF start button

< A > AE lock button

<

S

> AF point selection button

< p

>

AF Area selection lever

<

9

>

Multi-controller

LCD Panel

Aperture

Shutter speed

White balance

Exposure level indicator

(Setting value)

ISO speed

Electronic level

Grid

Area AF frame

Battery check

AE lock

Flash-ready

Flash exposure compensation

Shutter speed

Multi function lock switch Access lamp

Possible shots

Metering mode

Battery check

OK

AF operation

Drive mode

Y

AF points

Exposure level indicator

(Metering/Flash metering)

Focus indicator

Maximum burst

ISO speed

Exposure level indicator

(Setting value)

Aperture

Not good

A

Mode

All the settings necessary for shooting are set automatically.

You just press the shutter button, and the camera does the rest.

d

/

s

/

f

/

a

/

F

Modes

You can change the camera settings as desired to shoot in

* Set the < R

Y

> switch to the left (Multi function lock released).

COP d

: Program AE

o Set the Mode Dial to < d >.

o When focus is achieved, the camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture as in the < A > mode.

s

: Shutter-priority AE

o Set the Mode Dial to < s >.

o Turn the < 6 > dial to set the desired shutter speed, then focus on the subject.

X The aperture will be set automatically.

o If the aperture display blinks, turn the

< 6 > dial until it stops blinking.

f

: Aperture-priority AE

o Set the Mode Dial to < f >.

o Turn the < 6 > dial to set the desired aperture, then focus on the subject.

X The shutter speed will be set automatically.

o If the shutter speed display blinks, turn the < 6 > dial until it stops blinking.

a

: Manual Exposure

o Set the Mode Dial to < a >.

o Turn the < 6 > dial to set the o Turn the < 5 > dial to set the

COP the exposure level indicator.

D

Using the Built-in Flash

A

Mode o If necessary, the built-in flash will be fired automatically in low-light or backlit conditions.

d / s / f / a Modes o Press the < D > button to raise the built-in flash, then shoot.

i

: ISO Speed

N o Press the < m > button, then turn the < 6 > dial.

o ISO 100 to ISO 16000 can be set in 1/3-stop increments.

o When “ A ” is selected, the ISO speed is set automatically.

When you press the shutter button halfway, the ISO speed setting will be displayed.

o

Drive Mode

COP

Y o Press the < o > button, then turn the < 5 > dial.

u : Single shooting o : High-speed

continuous shooting i : Low-speed

continuous shooting

B : Silent single shooting

M : Silent continuous shooting

Q : 10-sec. self-timer/

remote control k : 2-sec. self-timer/

remote control f

: AF Operation

N o Set the lens’s focus mode switch to < f >.

o Press the < o turn the < 6 > dial.

> button, then

X (One-Shot AF):

For still subjects

9 (AI Focus AF):

Switches the AF operation automatically

Z (AI Servo AF): Y

S

AF Point Selection

N

COP

S > button, then look through the viewfinder.

o The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt the

<

9

>. If you press <

9

> straight down, the center AF point (or center zone) will be selected.

o The < 6 > dial selects an AF point in the horizontal direction, and the < 5 > dial selects an AF point in the vertical direction (toggles among zones in Zone AF).

AF Area Selection

N o Look through the viewfinder and press the < S > button.

o Use the < p > or <

B

> button.

X Each time you operate it, the AF area selection mode changes.

A

Live View Shooting

o Set the switch to < o Press the <

A

>.

0 > button, and the monitor.

COP o Press the shutter button halfway to focus, then press it completely to take the picture.

o Press the < 0 > button to exit the Live View shooting.

o Number of Possible Shots (Live View Shooting)

Temperature No Flash 50% Flash Use

At 23°C / 73°F Approx. 270 shots Approx. 250 shots k

Shooting Movies

o Set the switch to < k >.

X The image will appear on the

LCD monitor.

o Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

o Press the < 0 > button to start shooting a movie.

o To stop movie shooting, press the < 0 > button again.

o

Y

Recording movie shutter button completely.

COP

Microphone o Movie shooting modes

• < A / d / F > : Autoexposure shooting

• < s >

• < f >

• < a >

: Shutter-priority AE shooting

: Aperture-priority AE shooting

: Manual exposure shooting

Canon

Ver.29.1

EOS DIGITAL

.............................................

Solution Disk

For Macintosh

Canon Utilities:

Dig

i

tal Photo Professiona

l

3.14 lmageBrowser EX

EOS Utility 2

.

14

PhotoStitch 3

.

2

Picture Style Editor 1

.

14

EOS Sample Music

EOS Lens Registration Tool 1

.

1

EOS Web Service Registration

T

ool 1

.

0

8*1! I

English

Fran~ais

/Italiano

Espanol I Deutsch

PyccKHM

/1li*'PX

!!~Of

For Windows

Canon Utilities:

Digital Photo Profess

i

onal3

.

14 lmageBrowser EX

EOS Utility 2.14

PhotoStitch 3

.

1

Picture Style Editor 1

.

14

EOS Sample Music

EOS Lens Registration Tool 1

.

1

EOS Web Service Registrat

i

on Tool

1.

0

I 11111111111111111111111111111

C53-0151-02

1111111

CCHM105000

TrgMg

Pfioto

Your Images

Printed Free

From concept

t

o print

,

the professional's choice is Canon

.

Have yo

u

r images printed on a p

r

ofess

i

ona

l

model for free

.

*

*Please refer to the Try

My

Photo website Terms & Conditions.

Visit www.registercanon.com to register your new EOS camera today and receive the following*:

• Automatic notification of firmware and software updates

• Priority telephone support

• Exclusive priority e-mail support address

•· Exclusive savings on select products, classes and workshops

There is no charge to register or for the benefits offered.* These benefits valid in the U.S. only.

Please read the Terms and Conditions at www.registercanon

.

com for complete details.

_anon

For accessories and other supplies visit

shop.usa.canon.com or an Authorized Canon Dealer.

1111111111111111111111111111111111

CIWM105000

.EOS 70 Mark II (G) OJGPSfl~b'fffflCJ~~:lt!!il!c*'JilNUU.l

E O S 70 Mark II (G) O)G PS ~Ii§lcl: , t Jl'O) ijjj~ O)mJ !ll'li!UtiiJI;:iJ~L / "LG ~ 3::9 ( 20 14~B.FH~tl: ) o

.Z.

<D ft!!<D1fffli5Jii§ijjjmv;!;:-:Jt, ~"Licl:, <1:3~t!J\tEI~izY5'-1;:<1:3Fc~G ~tibtt < c ~G o

~~~~fiJi ~.llli;:J&Illt!!liili

:1 1 v;f.-1'. n::.nr.::J r . ct>ll .A

~ *"IDOO . -11~. r

>') n 15m oo . :1 5::Jiv . 74 "'<' Y~i; < ~J . r i!!¥71!.

'J .

-{

:::JO

::;

Y

1-' t:'

. B

P.

:$:

:::J

. ~oo.

:::Z5'' J

"'<' 1:i :t

1:1. I ?

. 'E iv'T' r 1-'lv.

-1'

I

Ct l

. v':t

;;<1\ lvJC

I

1-'!

Vv

1\ 'l'

. 7P

:::z~::;.

'T"'?

5 .

7

;t;

-i iJ

YV t:'Y. :ot!Jtf

:t 5 :::Z.

-I

PIVJC t

V- -"' r-

::; I-·

:t-

1>.

"'?n ::t5!.

7Y(Iil!). li:T "'?

, J\57 P-1 . -"Z i v , t:JI· "'?7Y(fb ), 1 \ :JY~!ll(:j<: ) , -"Z;j<:;( I?, :t -:::Z I-IJ P. -"'1 1/ 'l' , ift' :::Z =r · "'-l v '.YI

:1t:' :T. :1 1 1/ t!IJ

P . -"'5 1 1/ 0/,

EOS 70 Mark II (G) ?

OP7P . '1' :1 0:::Z . :fi :::J, 'T'Y "'?

-:7, I :::Z t-=r . 7-iY ?

Y I-' . 75 :J :::Z. 7 1 1/Vr. I-' 4 '.Y. 'f' IJ :;"\', 1\:Jt!

IJ -. P 1 :::Z 5 :J I-' . :P41 1/5 Y I-' . 1 5'1J P.

1Jtf 7:::Z~ :; .

0 0/ P . :::Z O I\

5 1't:' P. 1Jt:'T:JO/:t5' 4 :J . u t--r= r . 1 1/ ?

t :.t-::1 11/ 7 . "'<'1 1/5' . 'E/ r ;;<7o. :t5:.t5" • .Ji

v ?

I . Jtf 5:; 1-'. Jtf l l/ t-1:!1

1/ . lv "'< = r.

'1' 7' . :::Z O -"' =r

:t "'?

:J. 1-J [,:::J , t 0/I) I/

. :::Z-"Z -{ ::;, :::Z?I

7'~ :::Z -1 ~ 9 ?

54:T. "'<7 1-' =r . 4 'f' IJ :::Z. :t-:::Z i'5 1JP. = :t V -5 :.t

K I~~ 1 :::Z5TIVe 00-f-.> i jjjmv;!

;: J:: ::> "L i cl:, GPSO)fleffltcJ;cmi!miJ~fl "LG ~.@L. cb\15 fJ *9 <D L', <1:3 fse G ;: tcJ;.@OO'f-.l

ijjj mv;O) ) n~~ O) mifj i JI ;: Gi c.

b ' ::>

9.@c~lcJ:ffil;: 5 .±~ G

-c < r.:~G ~ 0

"L L: fse ffl

< o OO:?l L'GPS ~ 1 f ffl

•:e7JII7:J /(-

EDS 70 Mark II ( G) : OS 126461 (GPS'E i ::J.-JlJ'E7% : CH9-1352 )

~English

• Areas of Use and Restrictions for EOS 70 Mark II (G) GPS Functions

GPS functions of the EOS 70 Mark II (G) are in compliance (as of 8 (month)/2014 (year)) with the radio wave regulations of the areas listed below .

For details on other areas where they can be used , contact your nearest Canon Service Center .

Model Area of Use

EOS 70 Mark II (GI

Brunei Darussalam , Cambodia, People ' s Republic of China . Taiwan. Hong Kong, India, Jap a n, South K o re a, M ac ao , Maldives, Nepal , Pa k i s tan , Philippin e s , Singap o re .

Vietnam , Canada , United States of America , Brazil , Cayman Islands (Brit i sh) , Chile , Colombia, Cost a Ric a, Ecuador , El Salvador, Guatemala , Honduras , Aruba,

Saint Martin (Dutch) , Panama , Paraguay , Peru , Saint Ma r tin (French) , Virgin Islands (U .

S .

) , Venezuela , Austria , Belg i um , Bosnia and Herzegovina , Bulgaria , Belarus , Croatia ,

Cyprus , Czech Republic , Denmark. Estonia, Finland, France, Georgia . Germany, Gree c e , Hungary , Iceland, Ireland , Italy , Kaz a khstan , Latvia , Liechten s tein , Lithuania , luxembourg , Malta , Montenegro , the Netherlands , Norway , Poland , Portugal, Romania , Russia , Slovakia, Slovenia , Spain , Sweden , Switzerland , Ukraine , Macedonia ,

United Kingdom , Australia , New Zealand , Bahrain , Israel , Oman , Turkey , Seychelles

• In certain countries and regions. the use of GPS may be restricted . Therefore, be sure to use GPS in accordance with the laws and regulations of your country or region . Be particularly careful when using GPS outside your home country .

• Model Number

EOS 70 Mark II (G) : DS 1 26461 (including GPS module model : CH9-1352) lEJ

Fran~ais

• Regions d'utilisation et restrictions pour les fonctions GPS de I

'

EOS 70 Mark II (G)

Les fonctions GPS de I'EOS 70 Mark II (G) sont en confonnite (a partir de 8 (mois)/2014 (annee)) avec les r eglementations sur les ondes radio des regions indiquees ci-dessous .

Pour plus d 'i nformations sur d ' autres regions ou ils peuvent etre utilises , adressez-vous au Service Apres-Vente Canon le plus proche .

Modele Region d ' utilisation

EOS 70 Mark II (G)

Brunei Darussalam , Cambodge, Republique Populaire de Chine , Taiwan , Hong Kong , lnde, Japcn , Coree du Sud , Macao, Maldives , Nepal , Pakistan, Philippines , Singapcur ,

Vietnam , Canada , Elals-Unis d'Amerique , Bresil, lies Ca'lman s (Royaume-Uni) , Chili , Colombie , Costa Rica , Equaleur , Le Salvador . Guatemala , Honduras . Aruba .

Saint-Martin (Pays-Bas) , Panama , Paraguay , Perou , Sa i nt-Martin (France ), lies Vierges (Etats-Unis), Venezuela , Autriche, Belgique , Bosnie-Herzegovine , Bulgar i e , Bielorussie ,

Croatie. Chypre . Repub l ique !cheque

. Danemark , Estonie , Fin Iande , France . Georgie , Allemagne , Grace . Hongrie. lslande , lrlande , ltalie , Kazakhstan , LeHonie . Liechtenstein ,

Lituanie , Luxembourg , Malta, Montenegro , Pays-Bas , Norv8ge , Pologne , Portugal, Rouman i e , Russia , Slovaquie, Slovenia , Espagne , Suede , Suisse, Ukraine , Macedoine ,

Royaume-Uni , Australia , Nouvelle-Zelande , Bahre"ln , Israel, Oman , Turquie , Sey c helles

• Dans certains pays et regions, !'utilisation du GPS peut etre limitee . Assurez-vous d'utiliser le GPS en confonnite avec les lois et reglements de votre pays ou region .

Soyez particulierement prudent lorsque vous utilisez le GPS a l'etranger.

• Numero de modele

EOS 70 Mark II (G) : DS126461 (comprenant le modele avec module GPS : CH9-1352)

• Zonas de uso

y

restricciones para las funciones GPS de Ia EOS 70 Mark II (G)

Las funciones GPS de Ia EOS 70 Mark II (G) cumplen (a fecha de 8 (mes)/2014 (ano)) con el reglamento de ondas de radio de las zonas enumeradas a continuaci6n .

Para obtener informacion sobre otras zonas en las que puedan usarse , p6ngase en contacto con e l Centro de servicio Canon mas cercano.

Modele Zona de uso

EOS 70 Mark II (G)

Brunei Darussalam , Camboya , RepUbli c a popu l ar China, Taiwan , Hong Kong , India , Jap6n, Corea del Sur , Macao , Maldivas , Nepal , Pakistan , Filipinas , Singapur , Vie t nam ,

Canada , Eslados Unidos de America . Brasil , Islas Caiman (Reina Unido) , Chile , Colombia , Costa Rica , Ecuador , E l Sal v ador , Guatemala, Honduras , Aruba ,

San Marlin (Paises Bajos) , Panama , Paraguay, Peru , San M a rlin (Francia), I s las Virgenes (EE .

UU .

) , Venezuela , Austria , Belgica , Bosn i a-Herzegovina , Bulgaria , Bielorrusia ,

Croacia, Chipre , RepUblica Checa , Dinamar c a , Estonia , Finlandia , Francia , Georgia , Alemania, Gr e cia , Hungrla , I s l a ndia , lrlanda , ltalia , Kazajistitn , Laton i a , Liechtenstein ,

Liluan i a , Luxemburgo , Malta, Montenegro , los Paises Bajos , Noruega , Polon i a , Portugal , Rumania , Rus i a. Eslovaqu i a. Eslovenia , Espana . Suecia , Suiza , Ucrania ,

Macedonia , Reina Unido , Australia , Nueva Zelanda , Bahrein , Israel , Oman , Turquia , Seychelles

• En determinados paises y regiones , es pos i ble que el uso del GPS este restr i ngido . En consecuenc i a , debe asegurarse de utilizar el GPS de acuerdo con las leyes y normativas de su pais o region . Tenga especial cuidado cuando viaje fuera de su pais .

• Numero de modelo

EOS 70 Mark II (G) : DS126461 (incluido el modele de m6dulo GPS : CH9-1352)

Statement on EC directive

Canon Inc . timto prohlasuje, ze Iento CH9-1352 je ve shode se zakladnimi pozadavky a dalsimi prislusnymi ustanovenimi smernice 1999/5/ES .

Undertegnede Canon Inc . erklcerer herved, at f0lgende udstyr CH9-1352 overholder de vcesentlige krav og 0vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF .

Hiermit erklart Canon Inc., dass sich das Gerat CH9-1352 in Obereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden

Anforderungen und den Obrigen einschlagigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 199915/EG befindet.

Kaesolevaga kinnitab Canon Inc . seadme CH9-1352 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EU pohinouetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele satetele .

Hereby , Canon Inc., declares that this CH9-1352 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC .

Por medio de Ia presente Canon Inc . declara que el CH9-1352 cumple con los requisites esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de Ia Directiva 1999/5/CE.

ME THN nAPOYLA Canon Inc . LlHAONEI OTI CH9-1352 LYMMOP<t>ONETAI nPOL TIL OYLIOL>EIL

AnAITHLEIL KAI TIL AOinEL LXETIKEL LliATA=EIL THL OL>HriAL 1999/5/EK.

Par Ia presente Canon Inc . declare que l'appareil CH9-1352 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de Ia directive 1999/5/CE.

Con Ia presente Canon Inc . dichiara che questo CH9-1352 e conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed aile altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE .

Ar so Canon Inc . deklare, ka CH9-1352 atbilst DirektTvas 1999/5/EK bOtiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem.

Siuo Canon Inc . deklaruoja, kad sis CH9-1352 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB

Direktvvos nuostatas .

Hierbij verklaart Canon Inc . dat het toestel CH9-1352 in overeenstemming is met de essentiele eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG .

Hawnhekk , Canon Inc ., jiddikjara li dan CH9-1352 jikkonforma mal-ntigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti onrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Alulirott,Canon Inc . nyilatkozom, hogy a CH9-1352 megfelel a vonatkoz6 alapveto kovetelmenyeknek es az 1999/5/EC iranyelv egyeb eloirasainak .

Niniejszym Canon Inc . oswiadcza , ze CH9-1352 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC .

Canon Inc. declara que este CH9-1352 esta conforme com os requisites essenciais e outras disposi96es da Directiva 1999/5/CE .

Canon Inc . izjavlja, da je Ia CH9-1352 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES .

Canon Inc. tymto vyhlasuje, ze CH9-1352 spina zakladne poziadavky a vsetky prislusne ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Canon Inc . vakuuttaa taten etta CH9-1352 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sita koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Harmed intygar Canon Inc . att denna CH9-1352 star I overensstammelse med de vasentliga egenskapskrav och ovriga relevanta bestammelser som framgar av direktiv 1999/5/EG .

Her meO lysir Canon Inc . yfir pvi aO CH9-1352 er i samrcemi viO grunnkrofur og aOrar krofur, sem qerOar eru i tilskipun 1999/5/EC .

Canon Inc . erklcerer herved at utstyret CH9-1352 er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og

0vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF .

C HaCTORll.ll1fl AOKyMeHT Canon Inc. AeKI1ap11pa, Ye CH9-1352 e B Cbrnac11e C OCHOBHI1Te

11311CKBaHI1R 11 CbOTBeTHI1Te nocTaHOBJleHI1fl Ha .Q11peKT11Ba 1999/5/EC .

Prin prezenta , Canon Inc. declara ca aces! CH9-1352 este conform cu cerin\ele principale ~i cu celelalte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC .

Please contact the following address for the original Declaration of Conformity

:

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

CE

Canon

CANON INC .

30·2, Shimomaruko 3-chome , Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CIW-M105-000 ©CANON INC . 2014 PRINTED IN JAPAN

1M PRIME AU JAPON

IMPRESO EN JAP6N 0814Ni35 .

0

Ca

..-.nn

'I I V

CANON ' EOS Digital Camera'M and Accessories Limited Warranty-

For U.S,A . & Canada Only

The l im i t ed war rant y se t forth below is goven by C a non U .

S.

A n c. ( Canon U.S.

A .) in t he U n i te d Sta t es o r Cano n Canada Inc. (Canon Canada) i n Cana d a wi th respec1 to t h e C an on brand

E O S

O g~al

C or a, a s w ell as with r e s pect to th e a cc e ssor i es p ackaged

The Products are the o nl y Products t o w hich th is l i m H ed wan anty a pp l ies. w 1 h t h is l i m i t ed w a rra n ty {collect i vely t he "P roducts")", w h en purchased and used i n the U nited Sta t es or Ca n ada

Your P r oducts. wh en ae liv e re d t o yo u i n ne w cond it io n in I tS oroginal coro t ai n e r , ar e wa r ranted ag ai nst defects in m ate ri a l s o r work m a n s hi p as f ollows: fo r a per i od of one ( 1 ) year from t h e da t e of ori g inal pu r cha s e , defe ct ive parts or de l octivo P r odLIC1s retum ed to Ca n on U .

S.

A . or Canon C a nada, or t h e i r au th ori z ed Proclucts s ervi ce p r ov i ders , as app l icable , and proven t o be de f ective upon i nspection . w il l be repa i r ed wi t h ne w or comparable reb u in pa rt s or e x changed lor , ef u rb i shed P roducts. as determ i J'\ed by Canon U .S.A. or Canon Canada . o r t he a u tho r ized

Products service pro v ider

TH IS WARR A N TY DOES N O T COVE R A NY A CCESSOR I ES N O T M E N TI ON ED AB OVE. This l i mi t ed w affan t y s h al l o n ly apply it the Products are used i n conj u nctooo w i th compa t ible comp lll er equipmen t a nd compatible so ftwa r e , as t o Wh ich i te m s Cano n U .

S.A. o r Canoo C a nada sha ll have no r e spons i bi l ity .

Non · C ano n b rand eq u ipment e n d softw 11 11~ t ha t rn a~ be d i Sirib ul ed wit h t h e P rod u ct s a r e s o ld " a s Is " and wi th o u t warra nl y of a n y k i nd by Ca n i n cluding any imp li ed wa r ra nt y r egar d ing me rch an t abi ll ly or

Iii ness l o r a p o n U .S.A. or Can o n Ca n ada, artlo::u l a r p urpose , an d a ll auo:: h wa rr a n tlea a r e dlao:: l al m ed. Th e

~W i e wa rr a nt y , II a n y, w ith th e re speo:: t t o a uc h no n-c an on br an d Items Ia g i ve n b y the m a n ufa ct urer Of' p rod uo::e r the reo f.

T hi s l i mited wa rr anty co v e r s all de f ects encoun t e r ed i n n o r ma l use of the P roducts. and does not apply in !

he f ollowi n g cases :

(a )

(b)

(c)

L oss of o r oamage t o tM Products due to abuse , m i sha nd ling, imp1'0pe r packag i ng by you. a ll era tio n , acc id ent . e l ec l rica l c u rre n t nuctu6t i ons. failu r e to f ollow operating. ma i ntena n ce or en v iroome n ta l i n struct i oos prescribed i n Ca n on U .

S.A.'s or Cano n Canada's user's man u al or services perfo r med by someo n e other th an ca n on U .S.A. o r C an on Ca n ada , or an au lh ori z ed Products service provider . W it hout l im it ing lhe fo r egoi n g. w at o r damage , sand/corros i on damage, battery l eak age . d r opp 1 a me r a. scrarches , a b ra~o n s to the body , le n ses or LCD disp l ay or damage l o any o f t he Accessories men tioJ'led in t h e f i rst p a ragraph above w i l l be p r es u med to have r esu~ed f r om m i suse, abuse o or da m age r f ail u r e to opera l e th eP r oductsasse l f ort h l ntheoper at i n g l nstruct i o n s .

Use o f parts or su p p l ies (otne r t han t hose sol d b y C a non U .

S.A

. or Ca no n C ana d a) that ca u se damage t o t h e P rod O<:: ts o r cause p r oblems tfth(!ProdUC!shadhadtho

i rscria l n ll mbero r da l inga l leredor r emoved a b n orm<~lly l<equ e nl s e rv i ce ca ll s o r serv ice

N O IMP LIE D WARRA N TY . INC L UDI N G A N Y I MPLIED WARRA N TY OF MERCH A NTAB I LITY OR FITNESS F OR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE , APP LI ES TO THE PR ODUC T S AFTE R

THE APPLICAB L E P E RIOD OF THE EXPRESS LI M ITED W A RR A NTY STA T ED A BOV E . AND N O OT HER E X PRESS WA R RAN TY O R GUARA N TY , EXCEPT AS ME N T I ON ED ABOVE ,

GIVEN BY ANY PERSON OR E NTITY W ITH R E SP E CT TO THE PRODUCTS SH A LL BIND CANON U.S.A. O R CANON C A N A D A . (SO M E S T ATES A N D PROVINCES DO N OT A LLOW

LIM I TATI O N S O N H O W LO N G A N I MP LIE D WA RR A NT Y LA STS . SO T H E A BO V E LI M IT A T IO N MA Y N O T APPLY T O Y OU .

) CA N ON U .

S .

A . OR CANO N CANAD A S H ALL NO T BE

LIABLE FOR LOSS OF R EVENUES OR PROFITS , INCON V EN I ENCE. E X PE N SE FOR SUBST I T UTE EQ UIPM E NT OR SERV I CE , S T OR A G E C H ARG E S. L O SS OR CORRUPTIO N O F

DA T A . OR A N Y O T HE R SP E CI A L , I NC I DEN TA L OR CO N SE Q UE N TI A L DA MA GES CAUS E D BY TH E US E OR MISUSE OF , OR I NA BI LI TY TO USE, T HE PRO DU CTS, REGARDLESS

OF THE L E G AL THEOR Y O N W HI CH THE CLAI M IS BASED. AN O E VE N IF CA N O N U .S.

A . O R CA NON C A N A D A HA S BE EN A DV I S E D OF T H E POSSIB I LITY OF SUC H D A MAGES

IN NO EVE N T S H ALL RECOVERY OF A N Y KI N D AGA I NS T CA N ON U.SA OR CA N O N C A N ADA BE G REA T ER IN AM OUNT TH AN T HE P UR CH A SE PRICE OF T H E PRODUC T S

S O L D BY CANO N U.S.

A . OR CA NO N C A NA D A AND CAUS I N G TH E AL L E GED D A M AGE . WITH OUT LI M I TIN G T HE FOREGOI N G. YOU ASSUM E A LL RIS K AN D LIABILITY FOR

L OSS, D AMA GE O R I N JURY T O YOU A N D YO U R PR O PER T Y AN D T O OTH E RS A ND T HE I R PROPERT Y A R I SI N G OUT OF U SE OR M I SUSE OF, O R IN A BILITY TO USE, T H E

PRODUCTS NO T CAUS E D DI RE CTLY BY T HE NE G LI G E NC E OF C AN ON U .S.A

. OR C AN ON C ANA D A . (SOME STATES AND PROV I NCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUS I ON OR

LI M IT ATIO N OF I NCIDE NTA L OR CO N SEQUE N TI AL D AMA GES . SO T HE A BOV E EXCLUSIO N OR LI M ITATION MA Y NOT A PP L Y TO YOU .

) T H I S LIMITED WARRA N TY SH ALL NO T

EXTE N D TO AN Y O NE O T HE R THA N TH E OR I G I NAL PURC HA S ER OF T H E PRODUC T S. OR TH E PERSON FOR W HOM IT WAS PURCHASED A S A GI FT . A ND STATES YOU R

EXCL U SIV E R EME DY

Ca non U .

S.

A .

Y oomayobta i ntectrnica l supportlo r yo u rProductsaslo l lo w s :

• Internet s u ppo rt a l - w .

uaa.

e a n o n .com/ a r.r

ppo rt ( E mail suppo r1 a l so ava i la b le)

• T elep h o n e assistance fro m a Cano n U.S.

A . Customer Ca r e rep r esentali v e fr ee of c h arge d u r i ng reg u lar business ho u rs a t 1 800-0 1< .CA

NON ( 1 800-e52 2666 ) .

C tr n oncan a da

Youm ay ob t a i ntech n lca l supportfo r yo u r P rod u ctsas f o l lows;

• l n te rn o t s u pport f o r E n g h s hatwww .

cano n .

o::aleng ti s h l o::s (Ema ilsu p portalsoava i li!

bl e )

• l n l er ne t s u pport lor French a t www .

ca n on .

calf r a n ca i slcs (E-ma i l support a l so available)

• T elep h one ass i stance fr om a Canon Canada C u stomer Ca r e representatrve free o l c ha rge dur i n g reg u la r b u si n ess hou r s at 1 -800-0 K -CAN ON (t -800-6 5 2-2666)

Whe n you ca ll , have yo u r Products serial numbers and yo u r d a le of p u rcnase avai l ab l e to expedite service. A Can o n Cus t omer Care represe nt ali v e w i ll a tt empt l o d 1 gnose t h e n a tur a o f l h c problem and corroct it ove ' t he lelephone. If t h e problem ca n no t b e correc t ed over the t e l ep ho ne. you wi ll be asked to f o l l ow t he app l icable proce d ures for MA I L · I N SERV I CE

N o t e tha t a dated proo f o f p u r chase I S r equrred attne ti me o f service . This req ui remenf w 1 l l be sa t i sfied by p r ov i ding a copy of you r daled b ill of sale

T ech ni ca l s u ppo rt p t og r a m lermsaresub j ecltochangewi lh ou l notrce

MAIL-IN SERVICE

M AILIN SERV I CE 1s a progr am under wh 1 r Products a r e r epai r ed by a Canon U .S

A or a Ca n o n Canada autho r ized P roducts service provider. You will be gr.ton t h o n ame. add r ess and p h ooe n u mbe r o f a n a uthorr z ed Products serv 1 . by oont a ctrng t800 -oK --C AN O N ( t 800 652 2666) {Canon U.SA Cus t ome r Ca r e representative I Canon Ca na da Custome r

Ca r e r ep r esentat i ve) . It i s your r espoos i b i lity to pr operlypackageands e n d the d ef ect i ve Produc l s . tog e the r wnh a co p yofyou r date d p roa l of p urch a se. e com p l e te exp lan a t i on of the proble m an d a re turn ad dr ess to the a u thorrzed P roducts service provider at your e x pense . Do not inc l ude any othe r items with the defec ti ve P r oducts . The de f ect i ve P roducts covered by t his li m i ted w a rr an ty w i ll be r e pa rr ed and re tu mOO to you w 1 hoot ch a rge by t ho a u t ho rr z od Products service provrder . Any P r oducrs rece i ~ed by the author 1 t are not covered by the l i mited warranty wi ll be returned u n r epa i red, o r at t he discre ti o n o f t ho au t horized Produc t s sorvico provider . yo u m a y r eceive a written est i ma t e of r epa i r at such cost astheservicep r ovidermay e s t ablrs hh o m t 1 me t o t m e

T his limited warranty g1ves yo u spec1frc lega l rrghts, and you may a l so have ot h er r i ghls, w h ic h vary f rom s t a l e lo s t a l e (or p r ovi n ce l o provi nc e i n Canada).

' T heba tte rypackpackagedw i th t heProduc t scarrresaseparaten i J'le t y(90)dayl i m i ted w arranty

Canon U .

S .

A .

, Inc.

Canon Canada , Inc.

() 2000 Canon U .S.

A .. I nc. C a n on is a reg i ste r ed trademark an d EOS is e tradema rk of Cano n I nc

All br an d o r product n a me s ar e r e g i st e red lr ademarks or tr ademarks o f thei r r espective owners

canon

cANoN LIMITED wARRANTY

CANON U.S.A., INC. t~'i;7~

CANON CA!IIAD~ lf\IC.

N AM E

N OM

A D DR E SS

A DR E SS E

C IT Y

V I L LE PR OVI

THES E A RE N O T R E G I S T RAT I O N CA R DS

R e t ain f o r yo u r R eco rd s

C E S CAR TE S NE SO NT PAS G ELL ES P O UR L ' E NR EG I S TREMENT.

L es con s erver comme refere n ce .

N C E

MODEL

MODELE

BODY NO .

BOITIERNO

D EA LE R ' S N AM E & ADDR E SS

MA R CHA ND NO M & ADR E SSE

POSTAL CODE

CO DE P OS T A L

EO S 7D Mark II ( G )

PURCHASE DATE

DATE D ' ACHAT

C T S-7 1 63 004

0814 Ni 96.0

Pr inted in J APAN lmp ri m e a u J A P O N

C

anon

Dealer Record of Canon Purchase

Fiche d'Achat pour Concessionnaire Canon

Compt't' this card a t time

A rempllr au ~ of sale. ile l'achat ~

P RESE NT OW NE RSH IP A ND PR ODUC T S INT ERESTED I N

A rti c l es d ej a en possess i on o u ju g e s d i g n es d 'i nte r iH

OW N S INTERE S TED IN

E n possess i o n Int e r esse p a r

~~~ ; ~~s --------, (cca=m=e= a ") ________ I" en = ' ) ________ __

P H OTO ( Appar eil)

(Came r a )

(Appa r e il )

( Ob j ec lif )

(lens)

(Ob j ec li f )

I N TE R E ST E D I N INTE RC H AN G EAB LE LE NS OW N S

Ob j ect i f in t e r c h angeab l e E n poss ess ion I n t e r esse par

.

O THER ACC E SSO RI ES

Aut r es accesso i r es

'

OW N S

En p o sSQSs iQn I nt e r esse pa r

MODEL

Modele

EOS 7D Mark II ( G )

SERIAL NO .

No . desE!rie

C U S T OME R

.c.Ji.g_ffi

NAM E ADDRESS

Nom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Ad r esse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

C I TY / STA TE Z I P P H ONE

Vi ll e / Pr ovince - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Code p os t a l - - - - - - - - - - Telephone - - - - - - - - - - -

Ca -..On

Garant" hm1tee des appare 1 ts photo numenques EOS o,g,tal Camera " et des accessmres de CANON ' -

'I I Pour tes Etats·Ums etle Canada seu l ement

La pr&sente garantie ~mk~e esc I01Kro1e par Canon U .

S .

A

Canoo, des aocessoires livrl'ls avec ce tt<J garantie limitOO

.. loc. (Canon U .

SA' au~

(collectivemtK>t •

Eta t s-Unis ou Car>on Canada Inc. ( Canon Can.ada) au Canada ptoduits

·)'.lorsq

u 'ils

SQO\

~ l'"'g.an:l de l'apparc i photo num<inquo EOS 00 marqoo act>et9s at ~tii.Us aux Etats-u ,; s oo au Canada. les ptodwts soot le s seuls auxqtJOis cctte garantic

MnttCcs ' appliqoe .

T oul neut d ans son emballage d'oogine, est garan!

r ccmtre lout v ic e de matiere el de fabncabon oomme sui t : pooda.nt une ¢00c:le de oo ( II an~ pieces ou tes produ~s detectueux qlli serom re toum9s a Canon U .

S .

A. ou Canon Canada, ou a le~.~rs loomisseurs de servo,;e agrOO de prodtnts , .eon le cas, et doot l'inspectioo con l irme une de f ectoos i tl! seront rl!pares avec de nooveUes pillces ou des agr ~ produil ,li>; ~

(jeprodurts r81at

, oo OChanges oom r e des pro:Juits ramis io neuf, tel que dl!lermint! par Caoon compl!!< de

Ia date de 1'8d1at in itia l. lea

U .

S.A. ou Canon Canada, ou le fo umisscur de servtce

CETI E GARAN T IE NE COUVRE P,6,S LES ACCESS

Otn ES QUI N E SONT PAS MENTIONNES Ct-OESSUS. La un bquipement 01lormatiq u e compat i ble e1 des logiciels COfr1Jlatib p~Csen t e garantie limito\e s'appl ique seuternen t s i l es . pour les que l s Canon

U SA ou Car10n Canada n'assume aliC\Intt responsabil i te. e~ pr0<1u1ts oon t utit i cootointament avec

L 'eq uipemiHlt e i iK log lcle ts de m;orques 8lllre s Qlll! Cenon qui peu~~<~

Cenada, y c0111pri1 louie genrntie impl i ci te il l'~ard ck Ia qllillrte marchan dll ou de l'eptitlHie

Canon,estdoonMperlelebrlcentouleproducteurdecetarticle. nt tlre dl s lrlbu is

111/fl:

I.;!$ produ its 9on t vendu• • te t e Qllfll l ~ .&ana ga r entle d' a uc1.1ne sorte per Cenon U.S

.

A. ou Canon

~ 1.1ne fi n par11cu ll6ro. L a se ulfl gar a nlle, 1 1 garantle

II y a,

11 00 • "'" erllcle d'une merque eutre que

(a)

(b)

(c)

La pena ou r enOOmmagcmcnt l' e<olfe\iefl etrec t ue aiii9Ufs que des produ~s causes ro mission d'observer les directives chtiz acoosSO!res mention roes au prem"' r directives<Jefonctooonement;

Caroon U.S.

r>"ragraplle

A . t a corrosion , Jas !utres de pile, ta chute 00 l' appa r par l ' usag a abvsit, Ia mar>1pulation negtigente , femballage ina 09qoatlart par vous,les modi fication s , il f6gard du mode

<fl.lli~satron. des 'ond~>Or>S d'entreticn et d\1 m1~ev amboant Gnonc&es rtans oo eil,

Caoon Canac!a, ou un loum~sseu

~s

9grat>gnor8$ , !' ab r asi on cr-dl'SSUS, domma\ICS qoo I' r de seMce agrOO de produils. Sans~ te ce

QU O

~s ~K ci dents,les vanations de oourant etectJique, manOO d'utJhsation

, de Caoon USA oo Canoo Canada. ou de les domma9"S causes par l' eau , l e sa~la e t (ou ) oo les domm<>ges au oome r , au • objecl 1l s. a l' alfd>eo..wa cristaux liquio;le ~ ~;~Utes don'ma9CS causes a chacun does pr~sume <11\cooter de I'U S<I9l' im propre, de ru sage abus ff

00 de l' i mpossibilitEi <fu li ~ ser les produits . tel qu'indiql>O! dans lcs

L' utilisation de pieces ou d e IOJ~iture s ( autres que celles vendoos par Canoo U.S.A

. oo

Canoo Canada ) ayant p<;>ur e n et d'eodommage r IM produits ou <fcntra1oor uoo tr~eoce anormate d ' appels d'entretren oudeproblem&$ n kes~ itanll ll

La modoltcabo n ou lc retran du numEiro de r ecou r s8u serviced ' entretren et ap<es-V<!n

ta:

~rie ou 00 datation deS produrts

AUCUNE GARANT I E IMPLIC I TE , Y COMPRIS TOUTE GAAANTIE IMPLICI TE A L' EGARD DE LA OU A LI T E MARCHANDE OU

DE L 'AP TITU DE

A

UNE FIN PART IC ULii::RE . NE S ' ,6,PPLIQUE AUX

PROOU t TS APAi::S LA PER lODE PRESCR I TE DE LA GARANTIE EXPRESSE LIMITEE SUSMENT I ONNtE I:: T. A L " EXCEPTION DE LAD I TE GAFV.NTIE EXPRESSE LIM ITE

E . A UC UNE AUTRE GARANTIE

EXPRESSE Nl AUCUNE

T

AUTRI:: GAHANT I E ACCORDEE PAR TOU

OUTE OBLIGA T ION, OUEL LE OU ELLE SO I T

POSSIBLE QUE LA RESTR

(CERTAINS ETATS E

T

I C T ION ENONCEE Ct -DESSU S NE S 'APPLIQU E PAS DANS VO T RE CAS I

PEATE DE PROOUtTS D ' EX PLOI T AT I ON OU DE PROFI T S . N l

A

L

E PERSONNE OU ENT

T CERTAI NES PHOVINC

IT E

ES

A l'EGARD DES PROOUITS N

'EGARD DES INCONVENIENTS

CANON U.S.A

' AURA POUR EFFET DE L I ER CANON U

N'ALITQRISENT AUCUNE RESTRICTION SUR LA DUREE D'UNE

OU CANON CANADA N '

.

S.A

GARAN"nE

. 0U CANON CANADA

IMPLICI!E

ASSUME AUCUNE RESPONSABILITE A

;_ AINSI , IL

A

EST

L 'EGARD DE LA

ET D ES FRAIS ENGAGES POUR DE l' EOU I PEMENT

DE REMPLACEMENT. DES SERVICES

D" ENTRE TI EN E T APRES VENTE , POUR L ' ENTREPOSAGE , LA PEATE

OU

LA CORRUPTION DE DONNEES , N l

D E L'US,6, GE O U DE L'U SAGE IMPROPRE

A

L'EGARD DE TOUT DOMMAGE SPECIAL, IND I RECT OU ACCESWRE DECOULAN T

DE

L ' I MPOSSIB ILI T E D ' UTIUSER LES PAOOUITS, OUEL LE QUE SO I T L ' ARGUMENTAT I ON JUR I DIOUE SUR LAQUELLE S'APPU IE LA DEMANDE , E T . OU

M~ME Sl CANON U S A . OU CANON C A NADA A ETE I NFORMEE DE LA POSSIB ILI TE Of T ELS

OOMMAGES . AUCUN RECOUVREMENT . QUELLE QU " EN SOT LA FORME, CONTRE CANON U.S

.

A

0U CANON CANADA NE SERA SUPERIEUR AU MONT ANT DU PRIX D"ACHAT DES PROOUITS VENOUS PAR CANON USA OU C ANON CAN ADA ETA L'ORIGINE DES DOMMAGES PRESUMES

SANS VOUS LIMITE R ACE QUI PRECEDE. VOUS ASSUMEZ TOUSLES RISOUES

CORPORE LLES SUBIS P,6,R VOUS

. VOTI'lE PAOr'A itrE

LES PRODUITS A ~lOINS

(CER T AINS E T ATS

OU

D'AUTAES PEASONNESQU

QUE LESDIT S DOMMAGES MATERIELS , PERTES

ET T OUTE LA RESPONSABILITE

LEUR PROPRtETE

A L' EGAR

EN RAISON DE

D DES

L'USAGE.

PERTES, DES

DE L'USAGE

ET E!l.ESSURES

CORPORELLES N'A I ENT ETE CAUSES PAR

LA

I

DOMMAGES

M PROPRE ,

MATERIELS E

OU DE L' I MPOSS

NEGLIGENCE DE CANON U.S

.

A.

T

I

OU

DES BLESSURES

BILITE D 'UTILI SER

CANON CANADA

ET CERTAINES PROVINCES N"AUTOR I SENT AUCUNE EXCLUSION N l RESTR IC TION DES DOMMAGES A CCES~O IAE S

OU INDIRE CT$ ;

AI~S I.

I L EST POSS I B L E OUE LA

RESTRICTION OU L ' EXCLUS I ON ENONCEE C IDESSUS NE S ' APPLIQUE PAS DANS VOTRE CAS.) LA PRi::SEN

L'ACHE TE UA INIT I A L

DE TOUT PAOOUIT, OU LA PERSONNE QUI A RECU L ESDITS P RODUITS E N CADEAU. E T

TE GARANTIE UMI T EE N'ES T PAS ACCOADEE

CONSTITUE VOTRE RECOURS EXCLUSIF ,

,6, D ' AUTRES PERSONNES QUE

Canon U .

S .

A .

DcsSCfVr<:csdeooulicn t flChmquepourvosprodu l tsson t ottensoommesu i t

• Soutie nl nternet a u moyen du site Web : www .

ll sa.ca

non .c

om/ s up-port tSoutierr par oourrrcr l'ilectrorrrque auss i drsponible)

• Sout i en t<!lephQ,.que

(1-800-652·2666) aupri!s dun r epresentant du Centre de rcnse i gnements che<tli!le de Canon U .S.

.. sans Ira is

, pendant les heures norma las d 'ow erlure au 1 · 81)().0K

· CANON

Canon Canada

Oesserv ic (lsdesouticntcchniquepourvosproduitssontoffensoommesurt

:

• Sout i en Internet en a n glais au moyen du site

•

•

Soulr1!11 In ternet en lran~ais

Soutien ti!li!phonique a u

Web: au moye n du site Web: prCs d ' unc reprCsen t www.c.anon

ante ou d'ouverture au 1 · 8oo-DK.CAN0N ( 1 ·800-652·2666)

- w d'un

.

.

calengllshlce canon.c...,rancal

(Soutien par slcs (So representant du Centre 00 uti courrier !!lectronrq

u e aussi en par oourr i d sponi~e) er etectmnique aussi disponible) r011seignements cl ientl:lle de Canon Canada . sans fra i s, pe n dant tes heures normales

Lo rs de l'appel , assu r ez-vOJus <fa\fO ir l e numero de &erie des produ•ts e r Ia dato do son achat a ponOO de Ia ma t n

Cent r e de renseignemems ct enli!le de Canon lent era de dCte r rnrner Ia source du probleme et de resoudre ce l alin d'accetf.ner le service u<-<:i par Uil&phone . S "

. Une il est i mpossible repu!senlante ou un rep r i!senlanl du de r€1soudre 1e problll m e pa r telephone , on vous p r iera de suivre les d rrec tr ve~ approp11r*ls pour le SERVICE POSTAL. Veuillez noter qu 'une preuve d'achal datlle est r eQuise fournrr u neoopredevotreacledevent e datC. klrs du service d ' entret r en et aprlls·vente. II sull i t de

Lesoonditionsduprogrammedesou tf e n tec h nkjuesontmodrl r ablessanspr&avis

SERVICE POSTAL

Le SERVICE POSTAL est un programmtr seton lequelles r i!

parahons de vos produrtssont etfectuOOs par u

Vous ob t iendrez l e I\Om , t ' ad r cssc et n I<Wrnisseu r de service agr&e des produ r ts de Ca n on U.S.A. ou Caoon Ca n ada .

1c numCro de rCICphone d'un foumisse u r de service agrQC dos produ~s . en commun i quant avec 1

800--0K CANON (1·800·652·2666) servr<:e clienlr:l'le C<1non U .

S.AJrepresentant de service clientele C anon Canada) . II vous incombe d'emballer ade-quatcment vos produits dlltectueu ~ e t dele l aire

1representant de parvenir, <). vos lr<lis, i accompagn9 d ' une cop i e de votre preuve d'achat datee nclu r e aucun autre article avec l es

, produilsdlifectueu~. d ' une e~plicatiOJn dlitaillfle du probiCme er de

LesprOOurtscouvertspar Ia l 'adresse presentcgaranlre lim it de retour au lou mrssour de serviC(! ag r OO des produrts. Vous n e devez lle seront repa reser vousseront ret oumes sans fraisparle f ournisseurde serviceagre&deproduits.

L esprodu i t snoncouvensparlaprese n te\jaran tielimillierer;uspar le f ournisseurdeserviceagrelideprodu r t sscromre l ournessansavoirll!e

r epa r esou.8

drscrl:l ti on du lo u misse ur de serviceagrllr!l de p r odu i ts, vouspourrez recevo i r urreest i mation Ccritc dcsf r a rs de r<lpa r ution au coilt te l qu ' i l est l'itabli 3. !

'occasi on par le tournrsseurcle

L a pr@sentega ra ntie l im il6e vous acrorde des droils part i cul i ers rCCQnnuspar Ia lo r et i f se peul que vous d r Spos i ez d'autrcs dro i rs qu i peuvent provinceauneautreauCanada ) . varierd'un Elal a un autre (ou d 'u ne

'Lebloc-batterie l ivreavec l esproduits oo mponeunogaran ti olimrt6esepar6ed"unedurE!edequat

r e vingt-di~(90 )j<Wr s

Canon U.S.A.

, Inc.

Canon Canada Inc .

C Canon U.S.A.. Inc.

, 2000 Ca n onestunemarqueOOposOOet EOSestunemarquedecommercedeCano n Inc

T ous l e s autres n oms de marques ou do produrts sont dos marQues dllposlles ou des m arque s de commerce de leurs propri&taires respectils .

REMARKS

REMARKS